Home

PaperVision® Enterprise

1. A General Description Tracks the invoice for Acme Inc Name Tracking Invoice Project Name Accounting Workflow ID 1 A Status Active True WorkFlow Designer screen 6 Optionally enter a description for the WorkFlow 7 Right click the WorkFlow and select Add Pre Condition The Search fields display hOBO a s 9 2 20 e Tracking Index A eB Tracking Invoice SET B Pre Conditions i Description orkSteps heme A Get Pre condition ID i Process 2 A Search a Process Invoice Document Selection Method lt None gt E test Criteria Only False New Documents False New Versions False Search Criteria lt Empty gt WorkFlow Designer with Document Selection Method 8 Click the expanding arrow on the left side of the Document Selection Method field to expand the selection window PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 299 az Chapter 10 WorkFlow 9 Select one or more Document Selection Methods that will be applied to the new pre condition e Criteria Only document does not have to be a new document or a new version Note When the WorkFlow Pre Conditions automation service scheduling task executes as configured in the global administration settings it looks for any pre conditions defined with the Criteria Only Document Selection Method If any documents meet the criteria the WorkFlow instance is created a
2. Text Sequence Removal You can add edit or remove individual sequences Adding or editing sequences is accomplished by selecting Add or Edit The Text Sequence Removal Definition dialog box appears S Text Sequence Removal Definition Sequence Regular Expression I Min Column fo Max Column fo Min Line fo Max Line fo Disposition Stip Sequence from Output i Cancel Text Sequence Removal Definition Sequence This setting specifies the textual value or regular expression to be sought PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 257 a Chapter 9 Report Management Regular Expression This setting specifies whether or not to treat the sequence as a regular expression Otherwise the sequence is searched for as a standard textual value Min Column This value specifies the minimum column that the sequence must fall within Max Column This value specifies the maximum column that the sequence must fall within Min Line This value specifies the minimum line on the page that the sequence must fall within Max Line This value specifies the maximum line on the page that the sequence must fall within Disposition The disposition indicates what should be done with the sequence after it has been identified PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 258 w Chapter 9 Report Management Fields
3. eeseeeeeeees 303 documents GefMitlOn esis ei ae Hine een 11 E email attachment path 0 ee ceeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 58 test MESSAGE lt 535 25c cecsccsssaseiscssescesissassehcoseceasenes 58 email queue ee ceseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteensees 14 20 TEMOVING ItCMS eee eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteneeneeeees 20 email Settings ee seeeeceeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeetseeeeeeeres 57 mail ApS eas ceistisasechsesebadece sede ihesdisenteesaserheodazensts 295 using to automate tasks 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeereeee 299 encryption data PLOUP ss 6s ccsisstececeossnsiiedssascedebensesnsonenecses 106 encryption keys creating MEW isoiset iiie EEE EiS 109 deleting i oivcci esvescesacediveiuaeeacin sees cer teacsteasecses 110 EdIN E sosisini esis cat itened animate 110 enhanced auditing cccceeceeseeseeeeeeeeeteeeees 149 Enhanced Auditing enabling for a project ceceeceeseeeeeeteeeees 149 entity CONMIPULATION sisisi siisii 66 cr ating ANEW srities eirinen iaiia 77 definitio gg ese Feet enairar eiere 9 deleting afi ies iv vscavterveed anesesi densi dinesesecreess 79 display settings eeseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 74 Properties sai amiareonori ieni ansiar n p eenaa 67 entity display settings Character Cases ariii iniiis 74 default document grouping seeeeeeeeeeeee 75 default web document display method 75 document viwer upgrade availability 75 entity ID definitiOM sssiss
4. Chapter 9 Report Management 2 Click Add or Edit The Character Replacement Definition dialog box appears Character Replacement Definition From ASCII From Decimal From Hex Discard E To ASCII To Decimal To Hex Character Replacement Definition 3 Assign the appropriate settings described below and then click OK e From ASCII ASCII character that is being replaced or discarded e From Decimal Decimal number of the character that is to be replaced or discarded e From Hex Hexadecimal number of the character that is to be replaced or discarded e Discard Specifies that the character is to be discarded not replaced with another character e To ASCII ASCII character that is used to replace the desired character e To Decimal Decimal number of the character used to replace the desired character e To Hex Hexadecimal number of the character used to replace the desired character PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 243 w Chapter 9 Report Management Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer Text sequence removal provides a means to search for a regular expression in the incoming block of data and have it completely removed This process will extract bothersome control sequences that affect page output and display Additional information on regular expressions can be located in Appendix F Regular Expressions You can add edit or remov
5. 1 Select Global Administration gt System Settings 2 Inthe System Settings screen click the Configure Automation Service Scheduling wW Chapter 2 Global Administration G3 Sy icon The Automation Service Scheduling dialog box appears 4 Automation Service Scheduling m Automation Service Schedule Automation Server CHADGYIRXP_O X Operation Schedule Next Run Time Last Run Time Status Maintenance Queue Repeat every 1 minute s 2011 05 31 15 53 00 2011 05 31 15 52 00 Success Email Queue Repeat every 10 minutefs 2011 05 31 15 54 00 2011 05 31 15 44 00 Success Deletion Queue Repeat every 60 minute s 2011 05 31 16 51 00 2011 05 31 15 51 00 Success Workflow Automated Repeat every 1 minute s 2011 05 31 15 53 00 2011 05 31 15 52 00 Success Monitored Import Paths Repeat every 1 minute s 2011 05 31 15 53 00 2011 05 31 15 52 00 Success PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide Automation Service Scheduling i Chapter 2 Global Administration 3 To add a new operation to the schedule click Add The New Automation Service Schedule dialog box appears New Automation Service Schedule x Operation EAEE Start Time 201 1 05 31 15 50 55 Schedule minute x Repetition Schedule Repeat every fi minute s New Autom
6. 11 25 2009 10 36 AM Data Storage PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 140 2 Double click on Message Capture File Sets The Message Capture File Sets screen appears where you can filter print roll back and export Message Capture File Sets Message Capture File Sets o 18 TT 831022040004776 2 23117 Master 11 WIN g E7 z 28 12 25 20 11831005760004354 200805281 22520 Master 8 WINX g 2008 05 28 12 23 11 11831039840004104 200805281 22311 Master 7 WINS Mazx Items fi 000 Close Message Capture File Sets An Aan manan a naa a O aaa akaaka Daian a a ia I I IO PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 141 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Filtering the Message Capture File Set List When thousands of file sets exist it is often desirable to filter the list that is being displayed To filter the file set listing 1 From the Message Capture File Sets screen click the Filter icon The Data Storage Filter dialog box appears Data Storage Filter Message Capture File Set Filter File Set Name Finished P to OoOo O Policy Set C Data Group P Clear Fiter a Data Storage Filter 2 Enter the filter criteria and then click OK Enter dates in the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format The file sets that meet the specified filter criteria will be displayed Note If the results have a filter appli
7. Entity Configuration sscssccsscsssscssscssscssscsssssssscsscssssesssessnessecssonss 67 Entity PEO PCL CS x5 cas eso e hee cca a ae sane aca seee cote sena sees arenes ee eet ates 68 Working With EAE eissits e Eae ee ata wectesraniveicee Ve deseo aA eels 78 Chapter 4 Entity Administration e ssoessoesoossooesoossoosssosseosssosssosssosssosssosssoesssesssesssee 81 Backup JO GS fez Arnone erara EE E E EEA EEEE EEEE Er Hie 82 PROCESSING LOS 8 oss tscchee Sed inte shiz 2400505 save Pae REAS Eea R ER AE vleidhashasicavspndaiessatslesesetesses 87 CUETENE SESSIONS sieren niniaren Anaea eE EAE A ARESE ERE E PAORS REPA SEARA REEI ENTERO ERNER 88 D c ment Grants s s sce etsdssgnessesaescsaneeizssadesescdodssancebaeues sonascepsobenieodsedscdassbuaeassenteeibesadeten ed eteaats 89 L cked USET Sareea ease sssscteesSnsactes ease fabiaussesod eQscsheskea vast pipesiesaeerch eds EEEa EET eE OEN ER 90 DMG niter TO a E AEE TA E EE E AE ieee Riga 91 Data EION o KAAT O ET E T EA 93 General Security rsads ice ssc it esbes ese aiae aei EEr EENAA EE AER ERREEN 109 Enetyption Keysis hci sisci csinesncbengseintsoensceusedesciashusiendsendaietssasteedetssdssedassreosantiioninueineabeties 109 Sec rity POLI Cy ecer ics tes sacess deca h steceserestsctieseseccess sDcdterasnbegbessndsadesaecavieincsies cnabugeeeieessdeceeassties 112 SVSESMGLOUPS EAEN AA E A EEE E AA 120 System USES erir ei ie eR E EEEE KEO EEE REEE AE EEKE NERE EEEE Ei 123 Migrati
8. Maintenance Log 10 Properties Workstation CHADGVIRXP_O Final Status Success Started 2011 05 31 13 34 16 Ended 2011 05 31 13 34 16 Name Apply Records Retention Entity 1 Project 5 Information lt MAINTINFO gt lt MAINTTYPE gt A4PPLY RECRET lt MAINTTYPE gt lt ENTITYID gt 1 lt ENTITYID gt lt PROJID gt 5 lt PROUI D gt lt MAINTINFO gt Message Records Retention Applied Maintenance Log Entry Properties Click Close Exporting Maintenance Log Entries You can export selected maintenance log entries to an XML file To export selected maintenance log entries ae a Nn In the Maintenance Logs screen select one or more logs Click the Export icon Click Yes to confirm the export In the Export Maintenance Logs dialog box locate the export directory where the export will be written Enter the file name Click Save to confirm the export A message will notify you where the export was written PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 44 nz Chapter 2 Global Administration Deleting Maintenance Log Entries To delete maintenance log entries 1 In the Maintenance Logs screen select one or more logs 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Migration Jobs Global administrators have the same capability to process migration jobs as entity system administrators However global administrators can see migration jobs for
9. Report Management Configuring Fields You can configure individual fields within a region and define them as index fields document breaks or index fields and document breaks To draw a field within a region 1 Select the appropriate region on the page and then click the Field icon 2 Drag the cursor around the appropriate area on the page and then the Field Properties dialog box appears S Field Properties Field Type Index Field Only Field Name Invoice Number X Break Offset fo m Field Validation Regular Expression ee ____ l Case Sensitive m Field Location Relative to Region Left columns 5 Width columns 14 Top lines fi Height lines fi Cancel Field Properties Field Type The following types of fields are available for selection e Index Field and Document Break Saves the data within the field for document retrieval and when the field data changes automatically marks a new document e Index Field Only Saves the data within the field for document retrieval e Document Break Only Checks for changing values and when the values change automatically marks a new document Field Name For index fields the field name corresponds to the name of the index field that will be populated with the located values PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 268 a Chapter 9 Report Management Break Offset For
10. When email notifications are sent they are placed into a holding queue which is then processed by the automation service to perform the actual sending of the email This holding queue or Email Queue can be viewed as a list of emails that are waiting to be sent PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Ei Automation Service Status Deletion Queue A Mi Global Administrators Import Licensing amp Maintenance oe SE Migration Jobs Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings H Entities iy ID_ Date Time Sender Recipient Subject Ent 1 2011 05 27 14 15 25 2011 05 27 14 15 25 2011 05 27 14 15 25 2011 05 27 14 19 39 2011 05 27 14 19 39 QA DSI com QA DSI com QA DSI com QA DSI com QA DSI com dana trancoso digitechsystems com dana trancoso digitechsystems com dana trancoso digitechsystems com dana trancoso digitechsystems com dana trancoso digitechsystems com Your Case has been closed Your Case has been closed Your Case has been closed Your case has been approved Your case has been approved To remove an item from the email queue Email Queue 1 Highlight one or more items and then select the Delete icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the removal 5 27 2011 220PM Note If Email Queue items are deleted either via sending the email or deleting them manually their attachments are removed from t
11. Deleting Directory Manager Jobs Deleting directory manager jobs will remove the job but will not remove any documents that were imported through the job To delete a directory manager job 1 Inthe Directory Manager Jobs screen select one or more jobs 2 Click Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Editing an Existing Directory Manager Job To edit an existing directory manager job 1 Inthe Directory Manager Jobs screen select the appropriate directory manager job 2 Click the Properties icon 3 Inthe Directory Manager Job Properties dialog box make the necessary modifications to the directory manager job For descriptions of each setting see the section on Directory Manager Jobs 4 Click OK to save the changes PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 184 Chapter 6 Records Retention The features of Records Retention allow records managers to design policies that schedule automated document retention or destruction Retention policies set a lock date time specifying a time before which documents cannot be deleted Destruction policies set a destruction date time specifying a time after which documents will be deleted if not still locked Destruction policies can also require document reviews prior to scheduling destruction Document reviews can trigger an email which can optionally include a link to take the recipient directly to the list of documents to
12. Regions are areas on a page from which one or many index values are extracted Regions are either Normal Regions or Detail Regions Each region contains one anchor and zero to many index values Normal Regions Normal regions are used to locate index information that is extracted once within a document e g Invoice Numbers Date Customer Name etc and are located once on a page Once the normal region has been located by its anchor index values are extracted and the indexing engine continues processing any other defined regions It is common for normal regions to use either fixed or floating anchors Detail Regions Detail regions are used to extract detail information from a document e g part numbers from the detail listing of an invoice Once the detail region has been located by its anchor index values are extracted The system then repeats the process until the anchor can no longer be located on the page Detail regions generally use floating anchors Note If a detail region is configured for a job full text data will not be imported into the retrieval system since detail field extraction creates duplicate documents multiple document entries pointing to the same set of pages Duplicate document full text indexing results in the document being indexed as many times as there are duplicate entries Generally the use of detail regions and fields negates the need to perform full text searches on the documents as the pe
13. Report Management 3 Configure the appropriate settings described below and then click OK Start Column This value specifies the starting column position for each line that will be evaluated for channel codes The ASA ANSI reports generally use a Start Column of 1 Column Width This value specifies the width from the Start Column that will be used to evaluate channel codes For instance if Start Column is 5 and Column Width is 5 then the engine will look for codes that fall within columns 5 6 7 8 and 9 The ASA ANSI reports generally use a Column Width of 1 Strip Codes If enabled the columns specified by Start Column and Column Width will be removed from the output Channel 1 to C These selections specify the channel command that will appear in the specified columns Action Indicates the action to be taken when the code is encountered Ignore No Action The code is ignored and no action is to be taken when encountered The remainder is simply tagged onto the previous line Move to Line This action moves to the line number specified in the Action Value property and then outputs the remainder of the input line If the specified line number is below the current line of the page it simply moves to the specified line of the current page However if the specified line number is above the current line of the page a new page is created and then it moves to the specified line of the new page to output Vertical Space T
14. Integration Definitions Importing an Integration Definition PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to import an integration definition that was created by previously exporting the configuration The import process will import the entire definition To import an integration definition 1 Inthe Integration Definitions screen click the Import icon 2 Select the XML file and then click Open 3 Click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 230 Chapter 9 Report Management PaperVision s Enterprise Report Management is an optional separately licensed component of the PaperVision Enterprise suite It allows users to perform COLD ERM processing on print streams up to 2 GB in size for each file while extracting document index information Report Management allows organizations to distribute printed reports and documents through the PaperVision Enterprise system without the need to scan the source documents There are no separate components to install as PaperVision Enterprise and PaperVision net Enterprise include the report management definition components Report management job definition management and monitoring are accomplished through the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console Report Management makes extensive use of regular expressions For a syntax guide on the use of regular expressions see Appendix F Regular Expressions File Sets The PaperVision
15. Modifications to integration definitions are downloaded by the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client running in Integration Mode when the user logs in To edit an existing integration definition 1 Inthe Integration Definitions screen select the appropriate integration definition Click the Properties S icon 3 Inthe Integration Definition Properties dialog box make the necessary modifications to the integration definition properties For descriptions of each setting see the section on Integration Definitions 4 Click Save Deleting an Integration Definition To delete an integration definition 1 Inthe Integration Definitions screen select one or more integration definitions 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Exporting an Integration Definition PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to export integration definitions The export creates an XML document describing the definition so it can be imported into another PaperVision Enterprise system All of the definition properties are included To export an integration definition 1 Inthe Integration Definitions screen select the appropriate integration definition 2 Click the Export icon Locate the directory where the export will be saved 4 Enter the file name and then click Save You will be notified where the file was saved PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 229 ez Chapter 8
16. PaperVision Enterprise keeps track of it all and redirects the requests to the correct database The same goes for end user applications PaperVision Enterprise automatically routes all database lookups to the appropriate database server File Replication PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to perform file replication on documents and full text data in the system Replication capabilities are included as a core component of PaperVision Enterprise File replication allows all changes to the document files and full text databases to be replicated to another server and or site for backup and high availability applications You can replicate your data to as many separate locations as necessary either locally or across WAN connections to separate sites PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 341 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security Security Great lengths have been taken to ensure the security of the PaperVision Enterprise system whether it is being accessed directly through PaperVision Enterprise PaperVision net Enterprise or through a third party application utilizing PaperVision Enterprise s APIs Session ID Encryption Regardless of whether or not your site uses SSL secure socket layers for your web and application servers PaperVision Enterprise encrypts the session ID that is passed back and forth between the clients and servers This ensures that a s
17. This setting allows users to view the status of a document s WorkFlow instances View Annotations This setting allows users to optionally view annotations on documents Force Annotations On This setting requires that users view annotations on documents useful for enforcing redacted portions of documents Users are able to perform operations on documents to which they have access but they cannot remove hide or move the annotations For full text documents with annotations forced on full text is hidden behind the annotation but users can still perform a full text search on the document In addition if this setting is enabled and an annotation fails to display the document will not display protecting the security of the annotations Create Modify Annotations This setting allows users to create and modify annotations on documents Audit Reviews for Individual Documents This setting allows users to perform security audits on documents PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 164 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Apply Retention Locks This setting allows users to set document retention lock dates for records retention Remove Retention Locks This setting allows users to clear document retention locks for records retention Apply Destruction Dates This setting allows users to specify document destruction dates for records retention Approve Destruction Lists This s
18. ceeeeceseeeeeeeceeeeeeneeerceaeeeeeeeens 202 NOTIFICATIONS serseri 15 44 90 global administrator notification method 58 VIC WIDE prosesini e onarena ebin ira Eea sE 90 91 O offset files Report Management cee 232 online help NOW to open is cices iets siiietnciialeiietece 13 overlay definition file Report Management 232 overlay form Modi INE cies aici asian 278 overlay image file Report Management 232 overlay text display modifying properties 277 P package file vice svesccsasscs cies cies nn 86 package workspace ccccescceseesseeseeseeeteeeseeees 60 PaperVision Enterprise APIs c ceseeeeeees 359 PaperVision package files eeeeseeseeeeteeeeeees 93 parsing COMPUTE c cs cccisntdzececeveieeteasshsceiasee stan ceaeeradinta 228 HOSE E T 228 parsing engine Report Management 235 passwords SEINE oriit rresten reor eE REEE aT ERNE 124 post condition definition meninei tii 290 pre conditions WorkFloWw sseeseseeseseeeee 289 primary web server URL 60 printing TEPON Seinnor enn n R E ea 340 process loCKS crnca nnn nnn 15 45 deleting spannina ia enrcn asec 45 processing logs si cccccsiecccicetinceitecsdeciiers ence 86 project definition seguine REE eea 9 projects compressing full text for eeeeeeeeee 148 CLEAN G eierne eeoa EEEE EE 142 46 deleting enerne a eet 148 Editing soenen n e a an EE 147 rebuilding full tex
19. m eem 4an DOl S 9 F POE p a General Description Graphic Binoculars Initial workstep True Name Get Workstep ID 2 Workstep Participant lt Automated gt a Time Limit for Uncompleted Worksteps Owned Notification Group SALES The maximum time minutes before notification 0 The maximum time minutes before transition 0 Transition Workstep A Time Limitfor Worksteps Waiting in Queue Notification Group SALES The maximum time minutes before notification 0 The maximum time minutes before transition 0 Transition Workstep Get WorkFlow Designer Grid View PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 304 wW Chapter 10 WorkFlow 5 Optionally select a graphic for the Workstep The default graphic for all Worksteps is the Information icon a Select the Graphic field and then click the ellipse The WorkStep Graphic popup displays WorkStep Graphic x A p E Binoculars Books Card File Envelope 8 E Exclaimation Eye File Cabinet File Drawer a Ss 3 File Folder Handshake Index Card File A 2 a i Key Keyboard Keyboard Key Keyboard Keys wy 2 Mailbox Open Book Paper Question Mark bg io 9 Send Email Stop Sign Telephone cancel WorkStep Graphic popup b Select a graphic from the Workstep Graphic popup and then click OK to display the graphic in the Workstep The graphic displays in the lower right hand corner of the Wor
20. 268 setup overlay operations cccceseeereeeeeees 276 Test Execution sinirinin 271 Report Management page detection methods AS400 Spool 3 1 Digit Commands 256 ASA ANSI with Channel Commands 253 Custom Control Codes 251 Form Feed Characters 249 Max Lines per Page ccccscesseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 249 Text Seguen E veisvessecceas aescetsdangadeacsinasasnevsectes 249 Text Sequence Removal Page 08 257 Report Management path cece eeceteereeeeeeees 60 report range archiving ooo eeeeeeceseceseceseceeecseeceeeeeeeneeeeeeneens 341 reports Document ACCESS 0 ceeeeteeeseeseeseeeeeees 326 27 OXPOTtING e eee eecceseceseceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeenrees 341 PLGA Osos ac shes tas eee radenia a ERORAS EPES 339 PRUNES NE EAE slashes telindees 340 Records Retention Destruction 328 29 System Operations QuEeTICS c seeeeereeeee 330 Utilization oe eee eeeeseceeeeeceeeereeeeeeeeaeenees 331 WLC WIS icc ates ecrachiresusatiesstedisestas testes lenny 338 WorkFlow History cc eeeeeeceeereeteeeeeneeeees 333 WorkFlow Status ccccccccceccccessssseeeenees 335 37 Rijndael encryption cceeseesceeeeseeeteeeeesees 108 S searches ampersand 0 0 0 cecececeeseeceseceseeeeeeeseceeesseenees 364 S T E E 364 Miting sssissisissrssisrisissessirssersisessessiseissistisino 364 multiple srissisissrssisiisissessisireisiseiseisiserssssrisins 364 WILACAL eesse e
21. Firewall Web Server Web Server Web Servet Databaze Document Server store Large Enterprise In this example there are internal users on an internal network that access either the application servers via PaperVision Enterprise or the web servers via their web browsers The web servers assumed to be load balanced redirect all of their processing to the application servers also assumed to be load balanced The application servers are the only servers that interact directly with the database or document store This configuration can provide unlimited scalability PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 349 Appendix C System Architecture Naturally external users connecting via the internet can use their web browsers to access PaperVision net Enterprise An interesting option is the ability for those external users to install the PaperVision Enterprise application on their computer and point their connection to the web servers This in effect will allow a user to run the desktop application remotely without the need for a VPN All of the communications including transfer of documents between the remote desktop application and the web servers is handled via http and can be secured using SSL negating the need for VPN access PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 350 Appendix D Customization and Integration In additio
22. Otherwise enter the server database user name password connection type and TCP IP port and click OK This information can specify a completely separate database or database server than you are using for other entities 6 To use SQL Server s Trusted Connection authentication method simply leave the User Name and Password fields blank 7 Inthe General tab select the Data Group Path Migration Backup Path Full Text Path and Batch Path 8 Configure any additional entity properties as described in the previous section on Entity properties and then click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 79 o Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Editing an Existing Entity To edit an existing entity 1 Inthe Entities screen select the appropriate entity and then click the Properties icon 2 Make any necessary modifications to the entity s properties 3 Click OK to save the changes Note Altering the database settings to a new different database will not create the entity tables in the new database as this is only done when creating a new entity Deleting an Entity Deleting an entity removes all traces of its existence from the database It also removes any full text databases and depending on the global system settings may remove data groups To delete an existing entity 1 Inthe Entities screen select one or more entities to delete 2 Click the Delet
23. Server1 7 Enter a Minimum Modified Date and time Any documents that have a modified date value greater than or equal to this value will be considered for import Selecting the Disabled option will disable the date checking during import so that file date is not considered 8 If you will be extracting index values from a delimited portion of the file name i e you might extract the SSN from segment 2 of a file named Bob Smith_777 777 7777 Oct 19 2000 TIF specify the Field Delimiter that will be used to break the file name into segments 9 Click the Add button to create a new Field Extraction The Field Extraction dialog box appears Field Extraction Field Name z Field Source File Date cme Field Extraction 10 Select the Field Name to extract PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 182 W Chapter 5 Project Administration 11 Select the Field Source that specifies where the document index field will obtain its value For example given the following file name and path with the Job Path being F Test Import and the Field Delimiter being an underscore F Test Import Acme Corp A132 Bob Smith _777 77 7777 TIF File Date Date the file was last modified File Name with Extension Bob Smith_777 77 7777 TIF File Name without Extension Bob Smith _777 77 7777 Entire File Path F Acme Corp A132 Bob Smith_777 77 7777 TIF Directory Level
24. deleting error log entries cee eeeeeeeeee eee 132 exporting error log entries 131 exporting file set information eee 136 fille ANALYSIS 252 205 vececsitiecedess Kerra vuectes angen 239 file S tS cccesssessesececeessesrecerevsesee 133 231 32 filtering file set list ee ceeeeseeeceteereeeees 135 INtFOCUCTION sises eeceeceseeeeeeeeteeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaees 231 JODS esti Hieeieiiai AASS 236 parsing Engine innisin asii 231 rolling back file sets 135 viewing file set properties eeseseeeeeseeee 137 report management errors eeeeeeeeceeneeeteceeeees 15 Report Management errors 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeees 130 Report Management jobs CONFIQUIATION eeecceseeeteeeteeseeeneeeneeees 279 85 deactivating icon lita leeds acetate one 286 deleting iis nei kE Wai nce R 286 editing sh A eid E Wied desta eee 286 CXPOTUING vec cscs sea RE RE Rs 287 fields and breaks settings ee 259 71 fields breaks configuration operations 262 fil settings ssns 240 44 form overlay configuration 000 273 78 form overlay settings c ccceeeeseeeees 272 78 general settings 62 cceceeieeseensiseeeesccoeenies 236 38 IMPONE poeiers isnin reaa aE E 287 line settings siiin 245 46 page settings oseere 247 58 region properties ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeereeseeeeenes 263 region properties anchors ceeeeeeeeeneeeee 265 region properties field configuration
25. gt Show Region Displays all components Components anchor ranges and fields for the currently selected region View gt Show Document Displays all break regions and Breaks document break fields View gt Enable Disable Greatly increases the size of the Enlarged Frames frame around displayed items to make it easier to grab with the mouse Items gt New Region Starts the mode necessary to draw a new region Items gt New Detail Region Starts the mode necessary to draw a new detail region Items gt New Field Starts the mode necessary to draw a new field in the currently selected region Items gt Properties Displays the properties for the currently selected item Delete Items gt Delete Deletes the currently selected region or field Navigation gt Close Closes the Configure Fields Breaks screen PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 262 w Chapter 9 Report Management Configuring Regions You can configure regions that are located once on a page or that appear repeatedly on multiple pages detail regions To draw a region 1 Click the Region icon or the Detail Region icon 2 Drag the cursor around the appropriate area on the page and the Region Properties dialog box appears Region Properties General Anchor Region Name Name Detail Region E rT Break Documents Cc Current document starts jo pages prior to curent
26. m Data Processing l Disable data group sizing Force copy and delete of imported data groups Full teload imports compare last modified dates Force purged data group deletion Purge data groups during entity deletion J Require dirmgr submit files for directory manager job processing Clear package workspace prior to each use m Data Size Management Max Attachment Data Group Size MB fo Max Backup Package Contents Size MB 4096 Report Management Settings Max Documents per File Set f 0000 Delete Source on Success Require Submit File E Log Archiving Min Import Log entry age to retain hours 36 Number of Security Log entries to retain 500 Cancel System Settings Data Disable data group sizing As PaperVision Enterprise imports data groups the system logs the amount of storage utilized by the data group Although this process can be time consuming for large data groups it provides valuable information to administrators who manage storage resources PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 51 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Force copy and delete of imported data groups This setting overrides the entity level and manual settings for Copy data groups during import and Delete source data group after copy The global administrator can ensure that all documents are stored in their appropriate location Th
27. the Export Selected Item s icon 2 Click Yes to confirm the export In the Export Log dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 4 Enter the file name and then click Save You will be notified where the file was written Exporting a Range of Error Log Entries You can export a range of error log entries to an XML file To export a range of import log entries 1 Inthe Report Management Error screen click the Export Range icon The Export Error Log Entry Range dialog box appears 4 Export Error Log Entry Range Select the From and To date time values to define the range you would like to export From Date Time 1900 01 01 00 00 00 To Date Time 9999 1 2 31 23 59 59 Ok l Export Error Log Entry Range 2 Enter the date range of the log entries to export and then click OK Enter dates in the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format 3 Click Yes to confirm the export 4 In the Export Log dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 5 Enter the file name and then click Save You will be notified where the file was written PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 133 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Deleting Selected Error Log Entries To delete selected error log entries 1 Select the entity and then select Report Management Errors 2 Highlight the entries to delete and then click the Delete Selected Item s ico
28. the document can be either viewed in the native application for the file as defined by the operating system or in the PaperVision Enterprise document viewing browser plug in Since the plug in enforces functional security on those documents you may wish to require all users who are accessing the system to use the plug in Enable Integrated Windows Authentication This setting allows users of the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client application to authenticate automatically using their Windows domain and user name eliminating the need to log into PaperVision Enterprise This requires that a PaperVision Enterprise user account exist that is in the Domain User format for the Windows user attempting to login Due to the nature of IIS Windows authentication and process redirection this functionality can only be used when the client application is connected directly to the PaperVision Enterprise database in other words you cannot be redirecting to a PaperVision Enterprise application server Disable encrypted document grant URLs This setting enables document grant URLs to be passed unencrypted which makes the URLs considerably shorter Although guessing a grant ID which is a GUID would be difficult disabling the document grant URL encryption opens a potential vulnerability Users should weigh the benefits of a considerably shorter URL against the loss of security provided by encrypting the URL If this option is selected the application will
29. 21 Global Administrators s i sss cctessussncesessissssnsentebsasssbesiceneassizcdndsvncocesonaceshssbusscoussntds ionzscadensnesio 23 Topor QUEUE seere eragi erene insane araon Rna E Errai A EERE Torii ARPER ses EPSEN PAESE EREEREER EREEREER 26 Monitored Import Paths cc sacesdssacssssesstaccesssnnsadessesecsessneassiecandsdecned sonadcahsspuanannssntais sstescedbrenseaes 28 Import LoS eenean besndtdhessniass Rn ora EERE Aaner Ei ER EAEE AREE A AEE ER Torii 32 TAGS S10 eee Ea EE E EE E EEEE a RE 38 Maititenance QUEUS i cctssaccstesscdczeessbdeilcazecnadinscdsadtedascasinsiseddaetianegteaeis dbigdadeasca sis iotadueeedbeaniadle 41 M intenance LOg Sesiinae spisie EErEE ded onsen ste eniSsdecnedessalegdessuaneeusstteds ARESE Praia 43 Migration JODS s i5ec4s cacs acesside sdeseesnccoscssisesbussnteeseiesteoaca vas snsieesiesdasongessidegiastusnesseadsietstiaendeensaae 45 IN OGLE C EEL INS os 520 fe sacs esse ccs sansa es E sa dete ca sca snes s aciesteceates T EE 45 Process LOCKS e355 55 ooo 5hcs Secs sade a cacetnce cs araa eeraa hes sgaens Erat ARE Esaoe E Aaaa EE na AANA ead erisa 46 Report Management Ertorss caichsssescescssizesisssaseestesnssancsvescesusesoscsesnestesaussbissaceapes niperebesnsveseosnsegts 47 Systemi Sevens cs 5cchessese aaee eR Eea encase AEAEE EAT AER paT REEDA STAREA EA OERE RE PENES 47 Automation Service Scheduling icc cccseccsccasavesccacesssteassectcostececesdeceacvadesssserdeesecesvencsqsaseiceceaseacee 62 Chapter 3
30. 7 Message Capture Message Capture Policies Each policy set must contain one or more policies Each message is evaluated against each policy in the order that the policies are displayed If a message meets a policy s criteria and that policy has an action value of Drop then the message will no longer be evaluated against any further policies In order for a message to meet the policy s criteria all of the specified fields criteria must be met General Settings General settings for Message Capture Policies include the new policy name effective date and other classification settings E New Policy General Message Sender Recipient Policy Name FO Effective Date 201 1 06 02 11 05 37 Capture Mode jl tst s Action Capture o YS Project ACCOUNTS PAYABLE v Classification P AllMessages IV Active i i Cancel New Policy General Policy Name The Policy name specifies the name of the policy within the policy set Effective Date The Effective Date specifies the minimum date and time that the policy will be evaluated PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 207 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Capture Mode The Capture Mode specifies which capture agents will utilize this policy e All The policy will be utilized by both the Message Capture Server and the Message Capture Harvester e Capture The policy will only be uti
31. Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 119 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration System Groups Groups allow you to select similar users and assign a common set of access rights to those users simultaneously In other words you can create user accounts and rather than assign each of those users rights to a project you can add those users to a group and assign the group rights to a project Groups are also used in defining WorkFlows Creating a New Group To create a new group 1 Select the entity and then select General Security gt System Groups The System Groups screen appears ET AE AE Console Action Help H Global Administration Entities lt Default Company gt 1 Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage General Security Ta Encryption Keys Security Policy System Groups i System Users g Message Capture Policy Sets S Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors Reports ADMIN 11 25 2003 1 51PM sy System Groups PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 120 2 Click the New icon The New Group screen appears C New Group Select All New Group Enter the Group Name 4 From the Available Users list select the users who will comprise the new group and then click the right arrow to move them to the Group Members list 5 Click OK to save the new group PaperVision Enterprise Adminis
32. Automated Worksteps When a Workstep s participant is listed as lt Automated gt it is designated to be handled by any computer running the PaperVision Automation Service for which the WorkFlow Automated operation is enabled When the automation service determines that it is time to process automated workstep instances the following events occur 1 The server retrieves a list of automated workstep instances that are unowned 2 The server loads the WorkFlow definition for the first workstep 3 The server then takes ownership of that workstep instance so other servers processing WorkFlow do not try to run the same workstep 4 The Workstep s post conditions are evaluated to see if the workstep should be transitioned If a post condition is met the server transitions the Workstep to the next Workstep PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 291 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow If no transition is yet necessary the server processes the first task in the workstep Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until there are either no more tasks to process or a post condition is met If there are no more tasks to process and no post conditions have been met the server will transition the workstep to a Stop End state finalizing the WorkFlow Steps 2 through 6 are repeated until all of the worksteps have been processed The server then repeats steps 1 through 7 for any remaining entities Non Automated
33. Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs H 4 Projects El Accounts Receivable g Enhanced Auditing Document Associations D Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions Security Access Directory Manager Jobs fg Records Destruction Lists EB Records Retention Policy Sets Oe Report Management Jobs a WorkFlow Definitions 11 13 2003 1 43PM oy Security Access PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 166 2 Click the New e New Security Access General Rights Fields Project Name Accounts Receivable Apply Rights to Mm ACCOUNTING Group C ACCOUNTING SUPERVISOR ADMIN OSALES MANAGEMENT USER_1 USER_2 USER_3 New Security Access General 3 Select the users and groups Note If you select a user or group who already has rights in this project the project rights will be replaced with the new rights you are defining PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 167 ez Chapter 5 Project Administration 4 Select the Rights tab to assign rights to the selected users and groups The New Security Access Rights tab appears Ya New Security Access sen General Fields m Document Functions l View Documents I Tag for Migration l View Outside Papervision Delete Documents Export Open Documents Modify Documents D Print Fax Documents I Add
34. Chapter 2 Global Administration Editing Existing Licenses It may be necessary to edit an existing license to assign the license to a different entity or named system To edit an existing license 1 Select the appropriate license and then click the Properties icon The License Properties dialog box appears License 9016 1000 0050 54P0 00000 Properties X Product Enterprise User License 30 Day Demo Version 10 00 Quantity 50 Serial No 00000 License Date 2011 06 10 License Code 9016 1000 0050 54P0 00000 Auth Code R055 Assigned To lt Detault Company gt Named System lt N A gt License Properties 2 To assign a license to an entity click the Assigned To drop down menu to select another entity 3 To assign a license to a specific computer enter the machine name in the Named System field 4 Or click the Browse button to locate the machine name 5 Click OK Deleting an Existing License To delete an existing license 1 Highlight the license in the list You can also delete multiple licenses at one time 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 40 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Maintenance Queue The Maintenance Queue lists maintenance jobs such as full text rebuild full text compression data group encryption data group moves etc that have been que
35. Document s index field value for the specified field as specified by the FieldName The following Parameter Tags can be used for only client tasks e WF USERNAME Current User Name e WF SESSIONID Current Session ID Raise COM Event This task type is designed for systems integrators to integrate task management into third party applications It will cause the server s COM component PVSystem to raise the WorkstepTaskRequest event if this is an automated task If this is not an automated task it will cause PaperVision Enterprise s WorkFlow control PVDMWfView to raise the WorkstepTaskRequest event This task type has the following options e Info Value Specifies information that will be passed when the event is fired this information will be with the WorkstepInst class and WorkstepDef class that are also included automatically Alter Index Values This task type automatically displays the Alter Index Values screen while viewing the document If the user selects Save the task will be marked as completed this task type has no PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 310 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow Task Type Description Send Email Force Index Value This task type sends an email to the specified address with the specified body content and attachments See Email Tags for information on using dynamically generated information This task type has the following options
36. Documents l Email Documents Create Document Grants I Workflow Instantiations l View Workflow Status gt 4nnotations l View Annotations I Create Modify Annotations Force Annotations On Audit Reviews Tl For Individual Documents m Records Retention l Apply Retention Locks Remove Retention Locks Apply Destruction Dates I Approve Destruction Lists Folders l View Folders Move Folders I Create Folders I Move Docs into Folders Delete Folders I Remove Does from Folders l Rename Folders Signatures l View Signatures Il Sign Documents All Rights Cancel New Security Access Rights 5 Select the rights to be granted to the selected users and groups For descriptions of each see the section on security rights PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 168 6 Select the Fields tab to limit index field access for the selected users and groups The New Security Access Fields tab appears New Security Access Check Date Check_Number Invoice Date Invoice Number Payee Editable Fields Check Date Check_Number Invoice Date Invoice Number Payee New Security Access Fields 7 Remove check marks from the fields that users should not have access to view or search 8 Ifthe users have rights to modify documents remove check marks from the fields that the user should not have rights to modify 9
37. Enterprise Report Management parsing engine creates file sets to allow processed information to be grouped into manageable chunks of data These chunks of data are appended into data groups The primary value of file sets is the ability to perform a roll back in which the data for the file set is removed from the PaperVision Enterprise system no longer available for retrieval and based on the data group status permanently removed from the data group This function is useful in removing file sets that were created by a job that was incorrectly configured without affecting the rest of the information within the data group Starting in PaperVision Enterprise R41 when documents are deleted from a file set contained within a Read Write data group the data file containing the document s information is modified to completely remove the document from the file set PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 231 4 Chapter 9 Report Management Each file set contains at least the following files e Data File s These files contain the output page data They are named with either a PVERMCDATx or PVERMDATx extension based on whether the data within the file set is compressed e Offset File s These files contain the offset data that is used to calculate where a specific page of data can be located within the corresponding data file They are named with a PVERMOFFx extension e Document File This
38. Import Paths In some scenarios you may need to change multiple monitored import paths to a new location Once the data has been physically moved it is necessary to modify the paths that PaperVision Enterprise monitors To modify multiple monitored import paths 1 Highlight more than one monitored import paths 2 Click the Modify Path icon PaperVision Enterprise will evaluate all selected import paths and find their common path The Search and Replace Path dialog box appears ii Search and Replace Path Original Path servert PVE_Import_Path Replacement Path server2 PVE_ mport_Path_New eee Search and Replace Path 3 Click the ellipsis button to locate the new Replacement Path 4 Click Replace PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 31 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Import Logs Import logs provide a recorded history of data group imports that have occurred for both manual imports and imports performed by the PaperVision Automation Service To view the import logs select Global Administration gt Import gt Import Logs a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Status Entity Data Group Path Ei Automation Service Status Deletion Queue A Email Queue W Global Administrators Bi Import 33 Import Queue EN Monitored Import Paths a amp Licensing H Maintenance BY Migration Jobs Notifications
39. MMI G 4c ercesicinemiiainconiaeees 317 21 workstep task types ccescesseesseereeeeeeeeees 314 16 workstep tasks deHNINE sannar 312 16 workstep transition ssssseesssessessrsererrsreersserees 290 worksteps automated 000 ee eee eeeesecneeeeceeeeeceseeeeenecneeetenee 293 defining 2 ee ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesees 306 10 linking oo eee eteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeneeensees 310 11 Worksteps for New WorkFlow screen 306 worksteps VS tasks cccccsseecseeteeeseeeeeeteeeteensees 292 X XML data groups eeceeeeesecesecseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 94 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 385
40. Queue Items To view the properties of Import Queue items 1 Double click the appropriate import queue item in the list The Import Queue Item Properties dialog box appears x Import Queue Item Properties Submitted 2011 05 27 10 59 34 Entity Name Default Company gt Workstation CHAD GYIRXP Location C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop D Last Error Import Queue Item Properties 2 Click Close Deleting Import Queue Items You can delete import queue items that have not been processed This is useful if a data group has accidentally been queued up for import To delete import queue items 1 Highlight one or more import queue items 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 27 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Monitored Import Paths The PaperVision Automation Service offers the ability to have data automatically imported see the section on System Settings for more information on enabling automation services This can be used to import data groups that are live are being processed by another application or data groups that have been copied or FTP d to a location that the automation service is monitoring When monitored import paths are being used PaperVision Enterprise looks for the existence of one of the following files in a monitored import path e DATAGRP MDB for PaperFlow
41. Reasons V Addadt slosure Reasons to list Cancel Enhanced Auditing 3 Select Enable Enhanced Auditing If applicable select one of the following settings in the Disclosure Recipients section e Users must select Disclosure Recipients from list This setting specifies that users must select an existing recipient from the list when making a disclosure e Users can enter ad hoc Disclosure Recipients This setting specifies that users can select an existing recipient from the list or they can enter an unlisted recipient e Add ad hoc Disclosure Recipients to list When a user enters an ad hoc recipient that new recipient will be added to the global list for others to select in the future 4 Enter the value that will be used when viewing documents in the Viewing Disclosure Reason field Enhanced auditing requires that any disclosure be tracked When a document is viewed rather than requiring the user to specify why the document is being viewed which can be done as a Manual Disclosure this specified value is entered as the disclosure reason PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 152 W Chapter 5 Project Administration 5 If applicable select one of the following settings in the Disclosure Reasons section e Users must select Disclosure Reasons from list This setting specifies that users must select an existing reason from the list when making a disclosure e Users
42. Reference Guide 11 E Chapter 1 Introduction Documents Documents contain the individual pages or images for a given set of index values When document grouping is enabled in System Settings gt User Options documents are grouped per page results By default 100 documents appear per page of search results in PaperVision Enterprise Using the Administration Console The PaperVision Administration Console provides a single point of administration for everything related to PaperVision Enterprise including WorkFlow configuration The tool can manage an unlimited number of entities from a single sign on Only global administrators system administrators and WorkFlow administrators can log into the administration console Administrators The PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console supports three types of administrators Global Administrators Global administrators can control every aspect of configuration for the PaperVision Enterprise system including configurations for all entities However they cannot access the documents in a project as a system entity administrator can Global administration is only performed in the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console application System Administrators System administrators can completely administrate a single entity and have access to all functionality in all projects for that entity However system administrators cannot assign the entity s data group full text migration
43. Select whether to Submit Purge Job purge handled by the PaperVision Automation Service or Purge Immediately data group is purged while you wait and then click Purge PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 104 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Resizing Data Groups Resizing data groups causes PaperVision Enterprise to automatically recalculate the total space used by each of the files within the data group If the size calculated by the resize operation is less than the size recorded in the database a notification is automatically sent to all global administrators alerting them to the discrepancy To resize data groups 1 Inthe Data Groups screen select the appropriate data groups and then click the Resize icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the resizing Moving Data Groups PaperVision Enterprise offers the ability to move data groups to an entity s specified Data Group Path This is particularly useful when storage is outgrown and needs to be relocated to other media If you attempt to move data groups that already exist in the entity s data group path or In Line data groups they will simply be ignored The move process consists of copying the entire contents of the data group to the destination updating the recorded location of the data group in the database and then attempting to physically delete the data group from its source location This process ensures that the data group
44. System Settings Entities 5 27 2011 11 07AM sy Deletion Queue The deletion queue lists the user who submitted the purge and the corresponding entity ID when the job was submitted and the path that is to be purged To remove an item from the deletion queue 1 Highlight the items to remove and then select the Delete icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the removal PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 19 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Manually Running an Item in the Deletion Queue Generally items in the deletion queue will be purged by the PaperVision Automation Service once they have been successfully processed However you can manually run a deletion queue item To manually run a deletion queue item 1 Double click on the appropriate item The Deletion Queue Item Properties screen appears ES Deletion Queue Item Properties Submitted 2011 05 27 11 07 07 User ADMIN 0 Path c pve_data ENT1 4TTACH20110527 Information Data Group AT TA4CH20110527 Purge Deletion Queue Item Properties 2 Click Run Now to process the deletion queue item and remove all of the files in the specified directory PaperVision Enterprise will run the deletion queue item and return to the Deletion Queue screen when completed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 20 Email Queue a Chapter 2 Global Administration
45. a new document version deletes a document imports data groups purges data groups or deletes projects the system checks whether a Replication Journal Entry Path has been defined If so it will write a journal entry a specially formatted text file to that location specifying the type of operation that was performed and the files or directories that it was performed on The actual replication process takes place on a machine or multiple machines running as a PaperVision automation server with the File Replication automated process setting configured This server will attempt to access all of the Replication Journal Entry Paths It will create a list of all of the journal entries that have been entered and then sort them by date time created Once sorted each entry will be processed replicating the same operation to all of the defined Replication Destination Paths If an error occurs during a replication an error entry is written to the journal file specifying the operation and line where the error occurred the file is renamed to keep it from accidentally being processed again and a copy of the journal file is made to the local machine in the Digitech Systems Common Files JournalErrors directory where PaperVision Enterprise was installed Once the error has been resolved you can simply rename the file removing the ERROR extension to have the file re processed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Gui
46. allow a third party application to interact with the workstep Automated tasks are executed after the previous task in the workstep is executed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 289 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow Workstep Participants A workstep participant is defined in the workstep definition to specify either a group of users who can perform the workstep or lt Automated gt to indicate that the server will perform every task in the workstep Workstep Transition A workstep transition takes place when a workstep is completed and the flow of the WorkFlow moves or transitions to another workstep Post Conditions Post Conditions are rules that are evaluated when a workstep instance is activated and then after each task is processed to determine whether the workstep is completed Post conditions contain two pieces of information the evaluation rules and the transition workstep The evaluation rules specify which tasks must be completed and or any document index criteria that must exist in order for the rule to be satisfied If the rule is satisfied then the workstep is marked as completed and then transitioned to its transition workstep The transition workstep specifies which workstep is next The transition workstep can also specify the end of the entire WorkFlow or to transition to another WorkFlow entirely A workstep definition may contain multiple post conditions Each post cond
47. an interface for browser based users to access PaperVision whether that is over the Internet or the intranet Web servers redirect all of their back end processing to application servers e Application Servers offload the processing from web servers and client applications Application servers perform database lookups cache document files etc e Web Application Servers are simply servers that perform the duties of both web and application servers Technically the difference between a PaperVision Enterprise web server and application server is very little Both servers use Microsoft s IIS to either serve web pages or handle web services traffic However a web server as opposed to a web application server or an application server will redirect all of its processing to a second server or group of servers to perform the back end functions Configuring a web server to use a separate application server is as easy as creating modifying a single file on the web server To do this create a file in your lt Program Files gt Digitech Systems Common Files directory called PVDM INI In this file place the following 2 lines of text PVDM REDIRECTREQ http yourappserverhere or https If your web server sits behind a load balancer or is being accessed via non standard ports you should also add the following line WEBURL http yourwebserverhere or https Alternatively you can insert the following line WEBURL http yourwebserverhere
48. attachment data group for that project To create a new attachment data group 1 Inthe Data Groups screen click the Create New Attachment Data Group icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the creation of the new attachment data group Migrating Data Groups A data group can be submitted for migration so that the contents of the data group along with any modified document index fields are written to an entirely new data group Note Data group migration is not supported for PVERM PaperVision Enterprise Report Management C A R or DataFlow data groups To migrate a data group 1 Inthe Data Groups screen select the data group and then click the Migrate 2 icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the submittal of the data group for migration You can then run the migration job at your convenience Backing Up Data Groups You can submit a data group to be backed up in its entirety Data group backup jobs are initially scheduled to run only once although you can modify the job to make it recurring To submit a backup job for an entire data group 1 Inthe Data Groups screen select the data group and then click the Backup icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the submittal of the data group for backup 3 Select the desired Backup Package Encryption Key to be used when backing up the data group and then click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 106 a Chapter 4 Entity
49. be reviewed In order for automated records retention processing to occur the Records Retention operation must be scheduled in the Automation Service Scheduling When the automated records retention operation runs each project is evaluated If an active policy set exists for a project each policy in the set is processed in order For retention policies only documents that have not been locked are evaluated against the specified criteria For destruction policies only documents that are not marked for destruction and are not marked to be reviewed for destruction are evaluated against the specified criteria After the policy set is evaluated document destruction deletion is performed for any documents whose destruction date time is less than the current date time Important Regardless of the destruction date time if a policy does not exist for a project then destruction will not occur Records Retention Policy Sets A policy set determines which documents should be retained or destroyed and when destruction notifications should occur Only one policy set can be active at a time Each time a policy set is saved the newly saved policy set is activated and any existing policy sets are superseded As a result a fully auditable list of policy sets is maintained Each destruction or retention schedule references the policy set name and policy name that was used to mark the document for destruction or retention A policy se
50. be specified PaperVision Enterprise will import the index field data based on the order of the index fields Note The index fields are given followed by a roll number then a frame number You must supply all index fields defined in a project If specific information for a field is not available you can leave the value blank but be sure to leave a placeholder for the information XML Data Groups PaperVision Enterprise supports importing XML formatted data groups This allows any application capable of creating XML files to be able to import documents of any type images MS Word PDF files etc into PaperVision Enterprise The format required for an XML data group is specified in the DATAGRP Format XML file located in Digitech Systems PaperVision Docs directory where PaperVision Enterprise was installed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 95 Viewing Data Groups To view the data groups 1 Select the entity and then select Data Storage The Data Storage screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Entities H lt Default Company 1 g Message Capture File Sets q Backup Processing Report Management File Sets Current Activity n Jat ge General Security G Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs 2 Projects Report Management Errors Reports 117 2572009 10 36AM Data Storage pepo gh MeO pee ep atte gece ee a aa
51. be used to completely automate the creation and transport of package files To be importable package files must include an additional unencrypted file embedded in the root of the package file known as the package information file File Name lt PackageFileName gt pvpkginfo File Contents lt xml version 1 0 gt lt PVPACKAGEINFO gt lt ENTID gt EntityIDHere lt ENTID gt lt ENCRYPTKEYNAME gt KeyNameHere lt ENCRY PTKEYNAME gt lt IMPORTFILE gt ImportFileNameHere lt IMPORTFILE gt lt PVPACKAGEINFO gt As PaperVision Enterprise imports a package file it first extracts the package information file It uses the ENTID and ENCRYPTKEYNAME values to determine if the package contents are encrypted If the ENCRYPTKEYNAME value is not empty then it will retrieve the encryption key value for the encryption key name for the entity ID specified and use that value to decrypt the remaining contents of the package Then PaperVision Enterprise extracts the contents of the package file to the path specified in the Global System Settings Local Package Workspace Path Once the contents of the file are fully extracted it uses the file name specified in the IMPORTFILE value i e DATAGRP MDB to determine the data group type and performs the import of the data group Once the import is complete the package file contents are removed from Local Package Workspace Path PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Refere
52. data group you must purge the data group Additionally this property does not apply to PVERM PaperVision Enterprise Report Management Data Groups as they only support Append import types Delete Orphaned Documents This setting causes a Full Reload import to compare the list of documents that exists in the source data group with the list of documents that exists in PaperVision Enterprise from that data group Any documents that no longer exist in the source data group i e were deleted after an earlier import but still exist in PaperVision Enterprise will be removed from PaperVision Enterprise Note This property does not apply to PVERM PaperVision Enterprise Report Management Data Groups PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 73 a Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Apply object changes during reload During a Full Reload import PaperVision Enterprise updates the document index values for existing documents After updating the index values it can either leave the document objects pages and pointers to document files as they are with this option not selected or it can update the existing document s pages in one of two ways 1 As new object version creates a new version of the object with the updated page and pointer information from the data group Any annotations that have been applied to the imported documents will be lost since this is a new vers
53. destruction of the documents contained within each list Administrators can have destruction lists deleted without the documents being approved or denied or cleaned up The cleanup process recalculates the number of documents in each list If the list no longer contains any documents it is automatically deleted Deleting Records Destruction Lists To delete records destruction lists 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Records Destruction Lists The Records Destruction Lists screen appears a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help i Global Administration ID Creation Date Time Policy Set Policy Docs H Entities 1 2011 06 03 16 23 11 AR Policy 1 AP Policy May 2011 1 lt Default Company gt 1 2 2011 06 03 16 27 27 AR Policy Set2 Outdated Docs 3 Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage General Security G Message Capture Policy Sets ss Migration Jobs 49 Projects z g Accounts Receivable Enhanced Auditing Document Associations i Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions Security Access amp Directory Manager Jobs E2 Records Destruction Lists Ez Records Retention Policy Sets SP Report Management Jobs a WorkFlow Definitions 6 3 2011 4 32 PM Records Destruction Lists 2 Select one or more lists and then click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Refer
54. gt Report Range 2011 05 01 00 00 00 to 2011 05 31 23 59 59 Run Date 2011 06 06 14 27 15 Current Full Text DB Size 11 14 MB 0 01 GB Current Utilization 69 56 MB 0 07 GB Average Utilization 0 00 MB 0 00 GB Number of Samples 2011 05 27 00 00 00 Total Workstep Instances Project ID Accounts Receivable 5 Storage 20 13 MB Project ID DJ Sample 8 Utilization Report PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 323 iz Chapter 11 Reports Utilization reports include the following information Number of pages viewed printed and emailed additional operations are available with the archived data for this report by each user Note This information is only included if enabled in the Entity Properties Current storage utilization including storage space utilized by any full text databases Average utilization over a series of samples snapshots recording the current amount of storage in use at a specified time as defined by the global administrator Number of Documents and Pages within each project Note This information is only included if enabled in the Entity Properties Number of WorkFlow instances completed on each day of the report period PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 324 WorkFlow History WorkFlow history reports contain information pertaining to completed WorkFlow
55. icon The Report Management File Set Properties dialog box appears Report Management File Set Properties Start Time 2004 12 28 10 54 44 Finish Time 2004 12 28 10 54 45 Job Name N A Imported DG Workstation CHADGYIRXP Data Group DG20041228105445 DG File Set 20 KCC041228105445 Documents 19 Pages 20 Bytes 37883 Time secs 1 m Files Processed File Name C DJ_Sample ben cold tst Report Management File Set Properties 3 Select Close when finished viewing the information PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 139 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Message Capture File Sets Message Capture file sets are created as the PaperVision Message Capture Server processing engine parses message files File sets and their contents are discussed in greater detail in the File Sets section of the Message Capture chapter Viewing Message Capture File Sets To view message capture file sets 1 Select the entity and then select Data Storage The Data Storage screen appears PaperVision Administration Console EEE Action Help ai 2 E Global Administration Entities lt Default Company gt 1 19 Message Capture File Sets Backup Processing Report Management File Sets Current Activity Data Storage E General Security G Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors Reports
56. image height to be stretched or shrunk Overlay Image Cropping These values specify the number of pixels to remove from the edges of the blank form s image Overlay Image Add Border These values specify the number of white pixels to add to each edge of the blank form s image PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 278 w Chapter 9 Report Management Configuring Report Management Jobs You can create edit deactivate delete export and import report management jobs To create a new report management job 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Report Management Jobs The Report Management Job screen appears gt PaperVision Administration Console SEE Action Help Bakel 6 Backup Processing Nar Path s Workstation 5 Current Activity N Mfiledsil Report_Mgmt lt ANY gt Data Storage General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets ge Migration Jobs Projects FE Accounts Receivable g Enhanced Auditing Document Associations JA Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions Security Access Directory Manager Jobs 5g Records Destruction Lists EB Records Retention Policy Sets Report Management Jobs a WorkFlow Definitions 11 24 2003 2 15PM oy Report Management Jobs PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 279 w Chapter 9 Report Management 2 Click the New ico
57. includes password protected PDF files PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 366 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions Presentation Formats Apple iWork Keynote versions 2 3 08 and 09 Applix Presents versions 4 0 4 2 4 3 4 4 Corel Presentations versions 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X3 Extensible Formats Description Language XFD XFDL IBM Lotus Symphony Presentation 3 0 Lotus Freelance Graphics 2 Lotus Freelance Graphics versions 96 97 98 R9 9 8 Macromedia Flash versions through 8 0 Microsoft PowerPoint Macintosh versions 98 2001 v X 2004 Microsoft PowerPoint PC version 4 Microsoft PowerPoint Windows versions 95 97 2000 2002 2003 Microsoft PowerPoint Windows XML versions 2007 2010 Note Transparent shapes in Microsoft PowerPoint files are also supported OASIS Open Document Format versions 1 and 2 OpenOffice Impress versions 1 1 1 2 0 StarOffice Impress versions 6 7 8 Spreadsheet Formats Apple iWork Numbers versions 08 and 09 Applix Spreadsheets versions 4 2 4 3 4 4 Comma Separated Values CSV Corel Quattro Pro versions 5 6 7 8 Data Interchange Format IBM Lotus Symphony Spreadsheet 3 0 Lotus 1 2 3 Charts versions 2 3 4 5 Lotus 1 2 3 versions 2 3 4 5 96 97 R9 9 8 Microsoft Excel Charts versions 2 3 4 5 6 7 Microsoft Excel Macintosh versions 98 2001 v X 2004 Microsoft Excel Windows versions 2 2 through 200
58. information on entering criteria please refer to Appendix E Search Criteria Using Email Tags Since email tags can be used in any of the email values email tags can provide powerful capabilities in automating a number of tasks For instance if the PaperVision Message Capture Server is being utilized to capture incoming emails for a customer support project a WorkFlow could be used to generate an automated response back to the requesting user by simply inserting the following value into the WorkFlow task s Send To field PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 295 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow lt WF DOCINDEX Sender gt In an email body it may be desirable to send a status to a loan applicant as follows Dear lt WF DOCINDEX Applicant Name gt This message is being sent to update you on the status of your lt WF DOCINDEX Loan Type gt loan request The application is currently in the lt WF DOCINDEX Loan Status gt stage of processing If you would like to review your loan application simply select the link below lt WF DOCGRANT 2007 10 30 AppleCore A gent https login imagesilo com gt Your password to access the document is AppleCore Best Regards ABC Loan Company The email body specified above may create an actual email that reads as follows Dear John Smith This message is being sent to update you on the status of your home loan request The application is currently in th
59. l Post Conditions 1 Tasks bg Process 2 5 g Process Invoice l 3 Post Conditions Tasks B test iB Post Conditions Task Ordering 2 Select a Task to reorder 3 Click the up or down arrow to move the task to the appropriate place Note The task will not be reordered in the left hand column of the WorkFlow Definitions Properties screen Defining Workstep Post Conditions After you have graphically defined the worksteps and their flow you can define post conditions To define workstep post conditions 1 Inthe WorkFlow Designer screen select the appropriate Workstep The Workstep displays in the Grid view PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 312 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow 24 WorkFlow Designer Ol FRE O a s g Index Conditions Ricen The Precondition Name Default Post Condition to test fkSteps Get Invoice Number Post condition ID 2 g Invoice Transition To WS test rkSteps Order Get z ne Sequence Number Past Conditions Tasks a aaien gt Task 22 Search Criteria lt Wildcard gt Task 33 a Settings Process 2 Tasks lt Empty gt Process Invoice Post Conditions Default Post Condition to test be tass l P test 4 Ill a Post Condition View 2 Ifnecessary change the name of the post condition If necessary change the Transition to Workstep WS or WorkFlow WF 4 Enter the se
60. license purchases for either the server or client access licenses e SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition supports databases with a maximum size of 10 GB Most PaperVision users will be hard pressed to exceed this limit e SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition supports only one processor with support for multi core processors up to 1 GB of RAM used by SQL 2008 R2 Express Edition itself and supports 32 bit and 64 bit operating systems e SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition has a governor that is designed to optimize its performance on the wide array of operating systems that can act as a database server Based on our research using an average workload customers should be able to expect to run upwards of 100 PaperVision Enterprise concurrent users before having to consider an upgrade to the full Microsoft SQL Server product Naturally scalability will be determined by your workload and the hardware and software configuration of the machine that is acting as a PaperVision Database Server For additional information about Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition see Microsoft s web site http www microsoft com sqlserver 2008 en us express aspx PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 344 w Appendix C System Architecture Automation Servers PaperVision Enterprise s automation service performs the following tasks without any user intervention e Logs users out of the system who hav
61. odf includes OASIS Open Document Format for Office Applications Quattro Pro TAR tar TIFF tif Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format tnef Treepad hjt PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 374 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions e Unicode UCS16 Max or Windows byte order or UTF 8 e WMA media files metadata only wma e WMV video files metadata only wmv e WordPerfect versions 5 and later wpd wpf e WordStar versions 4 5 6 ws e Write wri e XBase including FoxPro dBase etc dbf e XML xml e XSL xsl e ZIP zip PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 375 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions Q To better understand the Maximum Results per Query and Document Grouping user settings explain how PaperVision Enterprise searches for documents including and excluding full text search criteria A PaperVision Enterprise searches for documents excluding full text search criteria by following the steps below 1 PaperVision Enterprise executes the submitted index value query against the SQL database limiting the results to the value specified by Maximum Results per Query and sorting by the Document ID value 2 For each document returned from that database query PaperVision checks to ensure the requesting user has document level access to it 3 If after stripping out d
62. processed with OCRFlow and DataFlow data groups PaperVision can extract full text information from the following document file formats Adobe Acrobat pdf Adobe Flash SWF Ami Pro sam ANSI ASCII text txt EBCDIC Eudora MBX message files mbx GZIP gz 373 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide ia Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions HTML htm html JPEG jpg Lotus 123 MBOX email archives including Thunderbird mbx MHT archives HTML archives saved by Internet Explorer mht MIME messages Microsoft Access 95 through 2007 MDB Microsoft Excel xls xlsx Microsoft Internet Explorer Archives mht Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Outlook Email files eml Microsoft Outlook Express 5 and 6 message stores dbx Microsoft Outlook Message files msg Microsoft PowerPoint ppt pptx Microsoft Rich Text Format rtf Microsoft Vista XML Paper Specification xps Microsoft Word for DOS doc Microsoft Word for Windows versions 1 2 6 7 8 Word 97 9 Word 2000 10 Word XP 11 Word 2003 12 Word 2007 doc docx Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Works wks MP3 metadata only mp3 Multimate Advantage II dox Multimate version 4 doc OpenOffice 2 x and 1 x documents spreadsheets and presentations sxc sxd SXi SXW Sxg stc sti stw odt ott odg otg odp otp ods ots
63. remains available for access during the entire move process The move process is performed as a maintenance queue item by the PaperVision Automation Service Note You must not import the data group at the same time that you attempt to move it To move data groups 1 Ensure the entity s Data Group Path is located where the data groups should be moved 2 Inthe Data Groups screen select the data groups and then click the Submit for Move icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the submittal of the data groups The appropriate maintenance queue items will be created and then processed by the PaperVision Automation Service when it is scheduled to process the maintenance queue PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 105 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Creating New Attachment Data Groups As users attach or add new documents or check in a new document version within PaperVision Enterprise the server automatically places the new files into an attachment data group If an attachment data group does not already exist it is automatically created From that point forward all new attachments for that project are placed into this new data group In some instances this data group can become quite large and you may want to create a new attachment data group in a different storage location All attached documents and new document versions are always placed into the most recently created
64. search type And finds documents where all criteria have been met Or finds documents where any of the criteria has been met e You can enter the CURRENTDATETIME tag as general search criteria to represent the current date and time that the search is run This is particularly useful in situations where documents need to be identified that are of a certain age A specified number of years Y months M days D hours H minutes N or seconds S can be added to or subtracted from the current date and time Possible uses for the CURRENTDATETIME tag are as follows CURRENTDATETIME Current Date Time CURRENTDATETIME 1Y Current Date Time plus 1 year CURRENTDATETIME 12M Current Date Time minus 12 months CURRENTDATETIME 2D Current Date Time plus 2 days CURRENTDATETIME 96H Current Date Time minus 96 hours CURRENTDATETIME 900N Current Date Time plus 900 minutes CURRENTDATETIME 120S Current Date Time plus 120 seconds e During the search PaperVision Enterprise will initially sort the results based on the selected Sort By field in ascending or descending order Note Long text fields cannot be sorted PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 357 Appendix F Regular Expressions A regular expression is a pattern of text that consists of ordinary characters for example letters a through z and special characters known as metacharacter
65. sensitive When populated each message s recipient email address is evaluated against an Active Directory lookup to determine whether the recipient falls within a specified group If they are within at least one of the listed groups the message is considered to have met the Recipient Active Directory Group Names criteria You can click the Import button to import a line delimited list of group names PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 212 Configuring Message Capture Policy Sets To create a new policy set 1 Expand the appropriate entity and then select Message Capture Policy Sets The Message Capture Policy Sets screen appears PaperVision Administration Console elk Global Administration ID Name Policies Status Creation Date Time Created By 5 Entities GQ 1 AP Message Capture Policy Set 1 Active 2011 06 02 11 15 45 ADMIN lt Default Company gt 1 Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage E General Security Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs Projects AA Report Management Errors Reports 6 2 2011 WA6AM Oy Message Capture Policy Sets PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 213 2 Click the New gt K icon The New Message Capture Policy Set General dialog box appears El New Message Capture Policy Set General Policies File Set Options Policy Set Name Comments
66. the From and To date time values to define the range you would like to delete From Date Time To Date Time crea Delete Log Entry Range 2 Enter the date ranges and times if applicable and then click OK 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Archiving Import Log Entries Although import log archival can be scheduled as an automated service task you can also manually archive the import log entries The archival process uses the Global System Settings Import Log Archiving Leave entries for the last X hours in the system value to determine which entries to archive To manually archive import log entries 1 Click the Archive Old Import Logs icon 2 Select Yes to confirm the archival PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 36 Viewing Import Log Archives To view the import log archives 1 Click the Import Log Archives icon The Import Log Archives dialog box appears i Import Log Archives Available Archives Start Date Time End Date Time 2011 05 31 11 56 58 2011 05 27 11 00 01 2011 05 27 13 51 54 Import Log Archive KML View Restore Import Log Archives 2 Highlight an archive and then click the View button 3 Click Close ORT REE pen ep atten E N E T E NN L E eae E R R a a PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 37 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Licensing The licensing featu
67. the current status of all automation servers connected to the PaperVision Enterprise database e Deletion Queue provides a list of directories that have been submitted to be deleted based on the purging of a data group and have not yet been processed by the automation service e Email Queue displays all emails that will be processed by the automation service to perform the actual sending of the email e Global Administrators contains the global administrators for PaperVision Enterprise e Import lists data groups that have been queued up to be imported by the PaperVision Enterprise Automation Service PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 15 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Licensing allows global administrators to manage PaperVision Enterprise licenses for each entity Maintenance lists maintenance items to be processed by the PaperVision Enterprise Automation Service and logs of completed maintenance items Migration Jobs allow global administrators to facilitate the collection of documents from a repository into external data groups CD ROMs etc Notifications display system notifications for global administrators when specific events occur Process Locks contains a list of operations currently locked by the system in order to prevent attempts to run the same operation simultaneously Report Management Errors displays all report management errors for all report ma
68. the export will be written PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 34 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Exporting a Range of Import Log Entries You can also export a range of import log entries to an XML file To export a range of import log entries 1 Click the Export Range icon The Export Log Entry Range dialog box appears 4 Export Log Entry Range Select the From and To date time values to define the range you would like to export From Date Time 1900 01 D1 00 00 00 To Date Time 9999 1 2 31 23 59 59 Export Log Entry Range 2 Enter the date ranges and times if applicable and then click OK 3 Click Yes to confirm the export 4 Inthe Export Log dialog box enter the file name and path where the log entries will be written 5 Click Save A message will notify you when the process is complete Deleting Import Log Entries To delete import log entries 1 Highlight one or more import log entries 2 Click the Delete Selected Item s icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 35 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Deleting a Range of Import Log Entries You can also delete a range of import log entries To delete a range of import log entries 1 Select the Delete Range icon The Delete Log Entry Range dialog box appears 4 Delete Log Entry Range Select
69. the number of new users that were added Note Existing users will not be recreated PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 127 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Migration Jobs PaperVision Enterprise facilitates the collection of documents from your repository into external data groups CD ROMs etc This feature becomes particularly useful in applications where specific sets of data are required to give to an end user e g for legal projects where an attorney extracts information about a specific case and places it on a CD ROM to take to trial Migrating information requires three steps 1 A user tags the documents for migration in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client 2 A user submits the migration job in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client 3 A system administrator performs the migration process Once the user has submitted the migration job the administrator must run the job to extract the selected tagged documents and copy them to a location which can be burned onto CD ROM or copied onto some other media The extracted information is formatted into a standard PaperFlow data group Note COLD ERM documents and C A R references are not supported for migration Additionally migration jobs do not export document annotations If the optional PaperVision Distribution Assistant component has been licensed the PaperVision Distribution Assist
70. values as well as the file set message numbers for each message It is named with a PVMSGDOC extension e Info File This file contains the XML document describing the file set and summary information It is named with a PVMSGINFO extension e Submit File The contents of this file are unimportant as the existence of this file is used to trigger import of the file set It is named with a SUBMIT extension The PVMSGSUBMIT file is generated when Message Capture closes the file set and it is ready to be imported into PaperVision Enterprise PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 201 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Non Repudiation As the message capture agents process messages into file sets a hash value is calculated and stored for each message When a message is retrieved by a user the message hash is recalculated against the retrieved message and verified against the stored hash value to validate that the message has not been tampered with Document Indexing PaperVision Message Capture always extracts the following index values from messages regardless of project configuration When the file sets are imported into PaperVision Enterprise the import expects the project fields to be named exactly as follows e Sender e Recipient e Subject e Message ID e Message File Type e Message Type e Message Date Time e Message Size e Message Attachment Name e Message Encryption e Messag
71. will utilize in determining how if at all those documents are grouped e None documents will not be grouped by default e Oldest First by default documents will be grouped with the oldest documents at the beginning pages e Most Recent First by default documents will be grouped with the newest documents at the beginning pages Default Web Document Display Method This setting specifies whether new users default document display method use the PaperVision Viewer or the Browser Based Viewer Note This setting is overridden by the Require Web Clients to use the Browser Plug in security policy setting In other words if the security policy setting is enabled then the Default Web Document Display Method will always force the user to view documents with the browser plug in Display Document Viewer Upgrade Availability This setting specifies whether a notification appears for web users when they attempt to first view a document or WorkFlow when the PaperVision ActiveX Document Viewer plug in is not running the latest version File Types to Display in Registered Application This setting specifies that files with these extensions will automatically be viewed within their registered applications rather than rendering them through PaperVision Enterprise This is particularly useful in environments that utilize proprietary file formats or file formats not supported by PaperVision Enterprise You can specify multiple
72. you will be forced to select OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 149 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Deleting Projects Deleting a project will remove all of the project related data from the system However security audit data will be left intact for reporting purposes Furthermore deleting projects does not delete physical documents from their respective data groups To delete projects 1 In the Projects screen select one or more projects 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion Rebuilding Full Text for Projects PaperVision Enterprise offers the capability to submit a project to have its full text indexes rebuilt This is useful if the full text database has become corrupt or the administrator wants to change whether or not external and COLD documents are to be full text indexed Full Text rebuilds are submitted as maintenance jobs to be processed by the automation service When they are processed a separate full text database is created and populated Once the rebuild has completed the old database is removed and the new database is referenced To rebuild full text for a project 1 Inthe Projects screen select one or more projects 2 Click the Submit for Full Text Rebuild al icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the rebuild and submit the maintenance job Compressing Full Text for Projects PaperVision Enterprise offers the
73. 0 F Test Import Directory Level 1 Acme Corp Directory Level 2 A132 Directory Level 3 through 64 Blank File Name Segment 1 Bob Smith File Name Segment 2 777 77 7777 File Name Segment 3 through 64 Blank 12 Click OK to add the field extraction 13 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for any additional Field Extractions 14 If most of the file extensions for the files that exist in the Job Path will be imported select Import all files except the extensions listed below Then specify any file extensions separated by a comma or a space that should not be imported 15 Otherwise if most of the file extensions for the files will not be imported select Import only files with the extensions listed below Then specify only the file extensions that should be imported 16 As the directory manager job is processed the files can either be copied to a new attachment data group by selecting Copy files to a new data group or they can be referenced from their current location by selecting Use an in line data group located at the job path If you are copying files to a new data group you can also specify whether or not you want to Delete Original files after successful import 17 If you wish to temporarily disable the job remove the Active check mark 18 Select OK to create the new directory manager job PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 183 a Chapter 5 Project Administration
74. 23 2011 05 27 14 23 32 2011 05 27 14 45 24 PVE FE lt Default Company gt 1 Backup Processing E Backup Jobs gl Processing Logs y Current Activity Current Sessions Document Grants Locked Users hb Notifications e Data Storage General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors Reports 67201 224PM Current Sessions To manually kill any of the sessions essentially logging the user off select the appropriate sessions and then select the Kill icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 88 Chapter 4 Entity Administration Document Grants A document grant is an access mechanism created by a user that lets an outside user access a document via a web URL that takes that outside user directly to the document Document grants can have passwords and expiration dates associated with them a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration User Name Created Project Expiration Document a Entities k 2011 06 01 14 37 34 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 2011 06 02 14 37 20 ATT Dec 28 lt Default Company 1 2011 06 01 14 36 22 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 2011 06 02 14 36 17 ALIANT COMI q Backup Processing 2011 06 01 14 36 04 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 2011 06 02 14 34 10 ALIANT COMI ea Backup Jobs gil Processing Logs B Bs Current Activity Fj Current Sessions Document Grants Locked Users ib Notifica
75. 3 M IMATE ANCE see s52sdecs eat daest xi cddeat Setuaete Hecsdesrereyiisee ts 15 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 382 maintenance log entries Ce l a0 erage er ree eee E 44 EXPONE ooi ee aee RE EE REEE ERE erases 43 maintenance logs cessecesecseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeates 42 viewing log entries 43 maximum global session idle time e 48 Message Capture document indexing 202 exporting file set information ee 141 Mle SCtS jhe A a i 138 filtering file set list eee eeeeeeeeeceeereeeeees 140 introductions rnin ee 201 non repudiation s sessesseeeeesesesssrserssesereersee 202 recipient settings eeeeeeeeeeeeerrereeeee 212 rolling back file sets 141 sender setting Sasien kin 211 viewing file set properties 141 Message Capture policies cccccecseseereeeees 207 SENES ea R 207 12 Message Capture policy set Configurations sssri isa 213 17 Message Capture policy sets activating senser aeae reas EEE AE 218 deleting sssorenire iison sire 218 Editing oi cabectnscgseese sents geusie cs siace ESTen Ria 218 OXPOTNG socere irene Eneee Era saaret n E Ereet 219 TMPOMMINE soenen oeeie EE a 219 SCHINPS usera Ee a E a 203 6 MetacharactErs csnusosisonre iniii 367 migration Jobs 15 44 126 deleting psoe enn oeiee Eak 129 TUNNIN eisie ia neee E EE ETE 127 28 monitored import paths reting NEW cisternae 28 N NOMN LEPUCIACION
76. 35 ADMIN Migration Tag GRAPHICS PLUS 1997 011 09 13 14 28 27 ADMIN Migration Tag Accounts Receivable AUTOMATED SYSTEM 2011 09 13 14 28 20 ADMIN View Accounts Receivable ALIANT COMMUNICAT 2011 09 13 14 28 14 ADMIN View ATT 1997 08 28 00 00 0 e Max Items fi 000 Close Document Access Report PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 318 a Chapter 11 Reports Document access reports include the following information e Date Time the operation was performed e User performing the action e Operation being performed i e print fax view e The project the operation was performed in e Document index values for the document the operation was performed on e Page range the operation was performed on e Disclosure recipient if using enhanced auditing e Disclosure Reason if using enhanced auditing e Disclosure Notes if using enhanced auditing e Source IP address or computer name the operation was performed from PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 319 a Chapter 11 Reports Records Retention Destruction Records Retention Destruction reports provide information pertaining to the retention lock and destruction dates of documents within a project Archiving is not available as the report is a representation of live data not historical data FA Records Retention Destruction Doc ID COMPANY NAME
77. 4 Entity Administration 5 Select Yes to submit the data groups for encryption Now that the maintenance jobs to encrypt the data groups have been submitted the data groups will be encrypted when the automation service processes the maintenance jobs To submit data groups for decryption 1 Ensure the data groups to decrypt have already been encrypted an encryption key name appears in the Encryption column 2 Highlight the data groups A 4 Select Yes to submit the data groups for decryption Now that the maintenance jobs to decrypt the data groups have been submitted the data groups will be decrypted when the automation service processes the maintenance jobs Click the Submit for Decryption icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 108 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration General Security PaperVision Enterprise s robust security architecture allows system entity administrators to control nearly every aspect of system access General security properties are configured through the entity s security policy Project level and document level security is handled from within the project configuration However prior to configuring project level and document level security system users and groups must first be defined Encryption Keys PaperVision Enterprise provides the ability to configure and manage encryption keys Once configured an encryption key can then be used fo
78. 4 DSTFLAMMCMM HR 6956 1934 CATE ME ARLERI SETER HATTHEYWS SAMANTHA 113 LAFAYETTE RD 1U3 AUK THHAMP FUN NE USYb2 ee Eie pene Banco mooner e peor H ve ao ii E X MATTHEWS SAMANTHA 114 LAFAYETTE RD 12 rm A an a HORTHHAMPTON HE 03962 0000 86000 3 3811964 b c d e 120 ROGM DOARD 550 00 i 1260 00 504000 331291 Check Number Check Date 4461118 MATTHEW ANTHEA 01061149 92053621118 GUERRA RALPH 09111165 555 2 92061182118 0ATES SANDRA 08181119 810 8 92133144118 HENDERSON GREGORY 06011166 921 11 92153685118 VETTER CHARLES F 06101118 894 8 92181031118 BENNETT BRENDA L 10231119 30 00 Page 1 of 1 20314461 118 MATTHEWS SAMANTHA 01061149 906 06 Test Execution Results You can navigate through the documents and pages by clicking the appropriate toolbar buttons selecting the corresponding menu items or using hotkeys Specific documents can also be selected by double clicking on the document in the document list PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide w Chapter 9 Report Management Test Execution Results Operations fal Home Displays the first page of the current document Displays the last page of the current document Displays the first page of the first document Ctrl Page Up Displays the first page of the previous document Bl Ctrl Page Down Displays the first page of the next document Ctrl End Displays the firs
79. 4 02 0364103 122118 010219 12 Validator Range Fields TTHEWS SAMANTHA 115 LAFAYETTE RD 103 NORTHHAMPT i Invoice Number 01061149 F M 122118 08 1 8 10 OS 0000012425 cs 3 Payee Check_Number 05 122118 Al 010649 idl ie A MATTHEWS SAMANTHA nehor 115 LAFAYETTE RD 103 45 0800 45 oO Float Range NORTHHAMPTON NE 03962 0000 Al 86000 A3 38119 t Validator Range Fields z ROOM BOARD 550 00 440000 9 Detail Regions Icu 1260 00 504000 PHARMACY 331291 IV THERAPY 10050 MED SURG SUPPLIES 411225 LABORATORY 115000 DX X RAY 294285 CT SCAN OTHER 382550 OPERATING ROOM 568985 ANESTHESIA 104985 ELOOD ADMIN 2025 RESPIRATORY SVC 4300 DIMIN ToOAT MITPNT iraran Output Page 1 of 597 Row 2 Col 66 Configure Fields Breaks You can perform the various functions needed to configure fields and breaks by clicking the appropriate toolbar buttons selecting the corresponding menu items or using hot keys PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 261 Chapter 9 Report Management Home Navigation gt First Page Displays the first page of the aa data e the processed data Rl F3 Navigation gt Find Page Locates a specific page number of the processed data Page Navigation gt Next Page Displays the next page of the Down processed data Navigation gt Last Page Displays the last page of the processed data View gt Show All Displays all regions anchors and fields View
80. 676 where 676 is the non standard port number Since the web server will never need to interact with the database it is not necessary nor recommended for security reasons to start the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console and connect to a database on the web server Note If the PVDM INI file is edited after viewing a document and the edit affects the Brower Based Viewer such as adding editing the redirect statement HS must be restarted to ensure the browser based viewer detects the change PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 346 w Appendix C System Architecture System Design Scenarios The single user workgroup department and large enterprise system design scenarios are described in the following section Single User The single user scenario exists where a single user will need to access PaperVision Enterprise There may not even be a network of any kind Single User Station Single User In this scenario the single user station will house the SQL Server database PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console and PaperVision Enterprise Web Client all on the single user station Workgroup In a workgroup up to 20 users all of the clients are accessing PaperVision Enterprise without a PaperVision server other than a non dedicated database R a amp User Station User Station User Station User Station User Station and Embedded D
81. 7 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 367 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions Microsoft Excel Windows XML version 2007 2010 Microsoft Office Excel Binary Format versions 2007 2010 Note Merged cells and those containing Unicode text in Microsoft Excel files are supported In addition charts cell color and border formatting in Microsoft Excel 2007 spreadsheets are also supported Microsoft Works Spreadsheet versions 2 3 4 OASIS Open Document Format versions 1 2 OpenOffice Calc versions 1 1 1 2 0 StarOffice Calc versions 6 7 8 Text and Markup Formats ANSI ASCII HTML versions 3 4 Note Character set detection is supported for HTML files Microsoft Excel Windows XML version 2003 Microsoft Visio XML version 2003 Microsoft Word Windows XML version 2003 MIME HTML mht Rich Text Format versions through 1 7 Unicode HTML Unicode Text versions 3 4 XHTML version 1 0 XML generic version 1 0 Word Processing Formats Adobe FrameMaker Interchange Format versions 5 5 5 6 7 Apple iChat Log versions 1 AV 2 AV 2 1 and AV 3 Apple iWork Pages versions 08 and 09 Applix Words versions 3 11 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 368 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions e Corel WordPerfect Linux versions 6 0 8 1 e Corel WordPerfect Macintosh versio
82. 8 12 31 18 Finish Time 2008 05 28 12 31 18 Policy Name Master 11 Workstation WINXP Data Group DG20080528123158 DG File Set 11831022040004776 200805281 23117 Documents Messages Bytes Time secs Message Capture File Set Properties 3 Select Close when finished viewing the information PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 143 Chapter 5 Project Administration A project is a logical grouping of documents based on a common indexing schema When a data group is imported and the project referenced in the data group does not exist the project is automatically created Additionally projects can be manually created Projects support up to 200 named index fields per document Important Microsoft SQL Server supports maximum row sizes of 8060 characters If the length of the combined index field data for a document exceeds 8060 characters SQL Server cannot support it and the system displays an alert Creating New Projects System administrators can create delete and edit projects within the entity Deleting a project will remove all of the project related data from the system However security audit data will be left intact for reporting purposes Furthermore deleting projects does not delete physical documents from their respective data groups Tip In addition to the toolbar commands and menu options available for each project
83. 9 Report Management Line Delimiter Type Once the raw data has been gathered and pre processed it must be assembled in to lines i e lines on a page The Analyze File operation can assist you in determining the correct value to use for this setting e CR LF uses the carriage return line feed combination to delimit lines from each other e CR Only uses only the carriage return character to delimit lines from each other e LF Only uses the line feed character to delimit lines from each other e Null Character uses the null character to delimit lines from each other e Fixed Line Width specifies that each line is a fixed number of characters wide Fixed Line Width This value specifies the number of characters in each line when using the Fixed Line Width Line Delimiter Type Line Pre Processing Prior to organizing lines into pages you can specify to have characters removed and or blank spaces inserted into each line of text Line Post Processing After lines are organized into pages you can specify to have characters removed and or blank spaces inserted into each line of text You can also have the length of each line truncated to remove extraneous data from the ends of lines PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 246 a Chapter 9 Report Management Page Settings Page settings allow you to configure the page detection method and related page preamble settings Ne
84. ActiveX browser plugin Follow the steps below to disable the Browser Based Viewer option for your users 1 Browse to the location where PVE was installed e g c Program Files x86 Digitech Systems PaperVision PVEWeb Highlight web config right click and choose Properties Disable the Read only attribute for this file and save the change Edit the web config file in Notepad oe PR Browse to the lt appSettings gt section located near the end of the file and change the line that currently reads lt add key disableBBV value false gt to lt add key disableBBV value true gt 6 Save the file This disables the use of the Browser Based Viewer for all users accessing your web site If the disableBBV option is enabled set to True the Security Policy General Security gt Security Policy displays 1 additional option on the General tab Require web clients to use the browser plugin By default this option is automatically enabled which forces all users to use the ActiveX browser plugin regardless of which option they choose User Options gt System Settings gt Document Viewing tab Use Browser Based Viewer or Use PaperVision ActiveX Viewer If the disableBBV option is enabled set to True but the administrator disables the Security Policy option Require web clients to use the browser plugin any user who enables the Use Browser Based Viewer option in User Opt
85. Administration Data Group Encryption and Decryption PaperVision Enterprise supports encryption of data at rest As data groups are imported or documents are added to the system PaperVision Enterprise can optionally encrypt the data to secure access to its information while stored When a document is requested PaperVision Enterprise will automatically decrypt the data for display All data group types managed by PaperVision Enterprise can be encrypted with the following exceptions e In Line In Line data groups cannot be encrypted because they are not managed by PaperVision Enterprise In Line data groups are created by directory manager jobs that are not configured to copy the files to a data group e PVERM COLD PaperVision Enterprise Report Management COLD data groups do not support encryption at the data group level This is because the same powerful encryption can be applied to the data as it is being processed by selecting the File Set Encryption Key in the report management job configuration e Message Capture PaperVision Enterprise Message Capture data groups do not support encryption at the data group level This is because the same powerful encryption can be applied to the data as it is being processed by selecting the Message Encryption Key in the message capture policy set configuration e DataFlow COLD DataFlow COLD data groups cannot be encrypted because the DataFlow format does not lend itself to data group level encrypt
86. Administration Console PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 24 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Deleting Existing Global Administrators To delete existing global administrators 1 Highlight one or more accounts 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Setting a Global Administrator s Password In some scenarios it may be necessary to set or change a global administrator s password To set a global administrator s password 1 Highlight the global administrator in the list 2 Click the Set Password icon The Set Password dialog box appears A Set Password New Password Confirm Password Set Password 3 Enter the password in the New Password field passwords are case sensitive 4 Enter the password once again in the Confirm Password field 5 Click OK to set the new password PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 25 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Import Queue The Import Queue lists data groups that have been queued up to be imported by the PaperVision Enterprise Automation Service When an administrator manually imports a data group and submits the job rather than running it immediately the job is moved into the Import Queue When the automation service gets an opportunity to process automated imports it will look for any items in the import queue that have a Worksta
87. Breaks Settings Fields Breaks settings allow you to view the index fields that have been defined for extraction Additionally you can assign a maximum number of pages per document and configure the sample process settings s New Report Management Job General File Line Page f r Project Index Fields Field Name Defined Invoice Number No Invoice Date No Payee No Check_Number No Amount No Check Date No r Fixed Page Document Break Maximum Pages per Document jo m Sample Process Settings Output Path C ColdT empPath Blocks to Run fi Configure Fields Breaks Test Execution coed Report Management Job Fields Breaks Project Index Fields This list provides a quick view of the project index fields that have been defined for extraction PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 259 a Chapter 9 Report Management Maximum Pages per Document This value specifies that a new document will automatically be started when the document page count reaches this number A value of zero disables this feature Output Path Performing a Configure Fields Breaks or Test Execution runs the parser as it will run when automated In other words actual file sets are created This option specifies the temporary location where the file set will be placed while viewing the results The file set s is removed automatically when you close the resulti
88. Capture product 10 Click OK to save the new user Editing an Existing User To edit an existing user 1 Inthe System Users screen select the appropriate user and then click the Properties 8 icon The User Properties dialog box appears ACCOUNTING SUPERVISOR Properties User Name ACCOUNTING SUPERVISOR Full Name John Smith Email Address JJohnSmith abecorp com J User must change password at next logon J User can change password when desired m Administration Rights IV System Administrator Workflow Administrator V Capture Administrator User Properties PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 125 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration 2 Make the necessary modifications to the user account and then click OK The modifications will be saved and will take effect the next time the user logs into PaperVision Enterprise Deleting Users To delete existing users 1 Inthe System Users screen select one or more users 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Setting a User s Password In some scenarios it may be necessary to set or change a user s password To set a user s password 1 Inthe System Users screen select the user whose password should be set and then select the Set Password icon The Set Password dialog box appears f Set Password New Password Confirm Password Set Password 2 Ente
89. Click OK to save the new reason s 5 Alternatively you can copy the disclosure reasons from another project s list so you do not have to enter them multiple times by selecting Copy The Copy Reason List from Project dialog box appears s Copy Reason List from Project Select the project from which the Disclosure Reasons should be copied Copy Reason List from Project 6 Select the project from which to copy the disclosure reason list and then click OK Any reasons that already exist in the list will be ignored 7 Click OK to save the disclosure reason list PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 155 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Disclosure Recipient Lists Disclosure recipients can be configured by the administrator or if allowed can be entered by the users as they make disclosures To manually add disclosure recipients 1 Inthe Enhanced Auditing screen click the Disclosure Recipient List icon The Disclosure Recipient List dialog box appears E Disclosure Recipient List Project Name Accounts Receivable m Disclosure Recipients ABC Financial Services David Armando CP4 Richard Friday CFO i Remove Copy OK Cancel Disclosure Recipient List 2 Click Add The Add New Disclosure Recipient dialog box appears Add New Disclosure Recipient Enter the new Disclosure Recipient You may enter multiple items by separating
90. Click OK to save the new security access Any new users or groups who have access to the project will be listed in the Security Access screen PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 169 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Editing Existing Security Access Rights To edit existing security access rights 1 In the Security Access screen select the appropriate user or group 2 Click the Properties icon The Edit Security Access General tab appears e Edit Security Access General Rights Fields Project Name Sie E E Apply Rights to Edit Security Access General PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 170 3 Select the Rights tab The Edit Security Access Rights tab appears General Bighis Fields r Document Functions V View Documents V Tag for Migration IV View Outside Papervision V Delete Documents NV Export Open Documents V Modify Documents IV Print Fax Documents V Add Documents V Email Documents V Create Document Grants IV Workflow Instantiations IV View Workflow Status r Annotations IV View Annotations IV Create Modify Annotations Il Force Annotations On gt Audit Reviews IV For Individual Documents r Records Retention IV Apply Retention Locks V Remove Retention Locks JV Apply Destruction Dates V Approve Destruction Lists r Folders IV
91. Destruction Date Lock Date INSTALLSHIELD SOFTWARE Ar GRAPHICS PLUS 2011 06 09 00 00 00 Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 30 00 00 00 GREENLEAF DISTRIBUTION INC 2011 06 09 00 00 00 MATTICE LOCK AND SAFE 2011 06 09 00 00 00 STATE FARM INSURANCE COMPANIES 2011 07 01 00 00 00 Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 30 00 00 00 Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 30 00 00 00 2011 06 02 16 00 0C Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 30 00 00 00 Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 09 00 00 00 Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 30 00 00 00 Digitech Systems Inc 2011 06 30 00 00 00 Gi eA 12 Items Displayed Max Items 1o00 Close Records Retention Destruction Report Records Retention Destruction reports include the following information e Document ID e Document Index Fields e Retention Lock Date e Destruction Date You can navigate through groups of documents by using the Next gt and Previous e buttons PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 320 a Chapter 11 Reports Viewing a Document s Lock Destruction Information Within the Records Retention Destruction report you can view a document s lock and destruction information including who what applied the date and any comments made during the application Si To view the report select an item in the report and then click the Lock Destruction Info icon The Lock Destruction Info screen is displayed
92. Field Delimiter _ m Field Extraction Field Name Field Source Add Remove Import all files except the extensions listed below m File Extensions Import only files with the extensions listed below Output Data Group Copy files to a new data group Delete Original files after successful import C Use an in line data group located at the job path IV Active Cancel New Directory Manager Job 3 Enter the Name for the new job PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 181 W Chapter 5 Project Administration 4 Select the Path that will be monitored for incoming documents Note Do not set up jobs that could potentially import the same document more than once i e having multiple workstations monitor the same paths for the same file extensions 5 Select the Workstation that will perform the import of the documents Select Any to allow any automation server to perform the import of the documents If you want to assign a specific automation server or workstation proceed to the next step 6 Select Specific to either manually enter the workstation or browse to select the workstation that will import documents You can enter or select a specific server name i e Server or workstation instance in the ServerName _ Instance format i e assigning Server 13 would allow documents to be imported by instance 13 on
93. Flow Pre Conditions cceeeseeeeees 64 automation service Status cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 17 B backup job CdS oo ixeies nip ae eee 85 backup job types backup full tekt sereins 81 backup project full s e 81 backup projects incremental e 81 Backtip ods ereen ance 81 CTOAUING E E EA 82 84 backup processing cecceescesscesecetecseeeseeeseeees 61 C C A R data groups ccceccceseceseceteeseecneeeeeeseeees 94 CBC Cipher Block Chaining encryption 108 COLD data group settings load COLD data oe ee eiiiai 72 COM DEUS iciiccindeasten sin neeniainsdicaess 359 creating entities oo eeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeres 77 CUITENE SESSIONS sseceseceeeeeenseeeceeeeeeeeeteteneeneeeres 87 CURRENTDATETIME tag as general search Criteria eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 365 Records Retention Policy search criteria 192 WorkFlow pre condition criteria 298 customization of PaperVision Enterprise 360 D data files Report Management cee 232 data group Cole WAG 110 eneeestrerer eer tere serene E 10 data group path soiis 16 data group paths modifying seisine eee 102 data group settings apply object changes during reload 73 clear package workspace prior to each use 52 copy data groups during import 066 73 default import type oe ceeeesteereeteeeeeeeeneees 72 default imported data group state 72 delete orphaned docum
94. General Policies Max Messages per File Set 10000 Max File Set Size MB 100 Max Inactive Minutes 240 Message Encryption Key lt No Encryption gt Compress Messages E Full Text Import E mee New Message Capture Policy Set File Set Options 10 Modify the file set option settings as desired For descriptions of each setting see the section on File Set Options 11 Click Save 12 To make this new policy set the current Active Policy Set click Yes The new policy set will become the current Active Policy Set superseding any existing policy sets PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 217 w Chapter 7 Message Capture Editing an Existing Message Capture Policy Set When a policy set is edited and saved the original policy set is not overwritten it is superseded by the newly saved policy set This process is designed to provide an auditable list of policy sets To edit an existing policy set 1 Inthe Message Capture Policy Sets screen select the appropriate policy set 2 Click the Properties icon 3 Inthe Message Capture Policy Set Properties dialog box make the necessary modifications to the policy set properties For descriptions of each setting see the section on Message Capture Policies 4 Click Save 5 Click Yes to save the policy set and make it the current Active Policy Set superseding any existing policy sets Ac
95. Guide 251 i Chapter 9 Report Management 3 Configure the appropriate Control Code Settings described below e Start Column This value specifies the starting column position for each line that will be evaluated for custom codes e Column Width This value specifies the width from the Start Column that will be used to evaluate custom codes e g if Start Column is 5 and Column Width is 5 then the engine will look for codes that fall within columns 5 6 7 8 and 9 e Vertical Space on Undefined Code If a code is encountered that has not been defined a vertical space is inserted carriage return line feed e Strip Codes If enabled the columns specified by Start Column and Column Width will be removed from the output 4 Click Add or Edit The Custom Code Definition dialog box appears Custom Code Definition Decimal Hex Action lgnore No Action Value fi cae Custom Code Definition PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 252 a Chapter 9 Report Management 5 Configure the appropriate Custom Code Definition settings described below and then click OK e ASCII Specifies the ASCII character s of the custom code e Decimal Specifies the Decimal value s of the character s of the custom code e Hex Specifies the Hexadecimal value s of the character s of the custom code e Action Indicates the action to be taken when the code is encounter
96. ML document These records in effect become unsearchable from within the PaperVision Enterprise system but the data can be mined in a separate application As such it may be desirable to leave the most recent records in the database in order to review the import status Number of Security Log Entries to retain As security logs are archived database records are removed and placed into a textual XML document These records in effect become unsearchable from within the PaperVision Enterprise system but the data can be mined in a separate application As such it may be desirable to leave a certain number of records Your specified number of entries will be retained in the database PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 54 mz Chapter 2 Global Administration System Settings Replication PaperVision Enterprise can perform file replication on documents and full text data in the system Replication capabilities are included as a core component of PaperVision Enterprise File replication allows all changes to the document files and full text databases to be replicated to another server and or site for backup and high availability applications You can replicate your data to as many separate locations as necessary either locally or across WAN connections to separate sites PaperVision Enterprise performs replication through a journaling system When a system attaches a new document checks in
97. Max Documents per File Set As the Report Management engine creates file sets it can limit the number of documents contained in each This setting allows you to limit the number of documents that are processed before they are imported for retrieval In certain instances where detail field data is being extracted this number may be exceeded in order for all of a given document s detail information to be written to the same file set Delete Source on Success This setting causes the source file to be deleted when it is successfully parsed through the report management engine Otherwise it will be moved to the Local Output Destination Successfully Processed directory Require Submit File This setting specifies that the report management engine only process files containing a corresponding file name and a SUBMIT extension e g a file named test txt would also need a test txt submit file This allows the main file to be sent to the job s Input Path but it will not be parsed until after the submit file is also delivered keeping the main file from being processed before it has been completely transferred The contents of the SUBMIT file are irrelevant and the file can be empty PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 53 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Min Import Log entry age to retain hours As import logs are archived database records are removed and placed into a textual X
98. New Message Capture Policy Set 3 Enter a name for the new policy set 4 Enter any comments optional pga de aig Me Ope ep atten eo fica ee Pu pee eae ee aaa aa aaa ORS PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 214 5 Select the Policies tab The Message Capture Policy Set Policies dialog box appears f New Message Capture Policy Set New Message Capture Policy Set Policies Ee in we Oe a Bp ee ae fia ep eo AG LL ALA EEO PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 215 a Chapter 7 Message Capture 6 Click the Add button to add a new policy The Message Capture Policy General screen appears E New Policy General Message Sender Recipient Policy Name PO Effective Date 201 1 06 02 11 17 19 Capture Mode jae s Action Capture o YW Project ACCOUNTS PAYABLE v Classification oOo O AllMessages T V Active i i Cancel New Policy General 7 Configure the policy as desired and then click OK For a description of each setting see the section on Message Capture Policies 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for any additional policies PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 216 a Chapter 7 Message Capture 9 Select the File Set Options tab The New Message Capture Policy Set File Set Options dialog box appears El New Message Capture Policy Set
99. OTKTOUP essenin siiri iarri r aE 355 system groups Creat E koerast ances nechabiareanies 118 19 deleting resimini iien in 120 Editing resni erena iiaiai oneik anei tastes 120 System Operations Queries report eee 330 system requirements ceeeeeeeeeecneeeeceseeeeeseeatenes 8 system settings eeeceescesecesecetecsecseecseeeeeeseeses 15 data eree a aE 50 53 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 384 email notifications c ccc ceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeesees 57 58 PGNCl Al 244 sees yeaa 47 49 47 Lofer nee agence E neers e riers 59 60 PEP CAG ON seirce essenin Es 54 56 system users CLEANING merecente Aine ce dnne dite 121 23 deleting srein heated EREE 124 COMING iss eiennenn istra a 123 24 Ainaro OTO ni nt AAEE TE T TTT 125 T tags for client and automated workstep tasks 295 task GEMMINION fits REET E earucee ts 290 tasks VS worksteps 0 ceeeeeeceeeereneeereeneeeeeneees 292 terMINOlORY seeeeesesecesecseeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeenteaes 9 trigger on hot key 224 225 U unlocking Users 0 0 eee eeceseeseesecneeeecneeeeceneeeeeeeeaees 89 User Operation workstep task type 314 user passwords SEMTE sirine eni nn rR E a R E 124 users COAL D isesi nnna ae iE 121 23 deleting erriren terrne kr eerie reer 124 SAUNE skarer NRE E ees 123 24 IMPONE sisri kessens iaaii taiii Ehi 125 lockeda esene E 89 Utilization Repo
100. PVESearchURL aspx that allows for quick integration with third party applications This file accepts remote login requests user credentials project selection search query and determination as to what to do with the search results view the results or view the first document all via a URL Tip To redirect PVESearchURL requests to the PaperVision Authentication Gateway insert the query parameter searchURL true into the Default ASPX URL To view a list of optional PVESearchURL query parameters append PVESearchURL aspx to the end of your PaperVision URL address Customization The PaperVision Enterprise application can be customized by modifying the source code to meet your needs This provides you with the most flexibility in customization The PaperVision Enterprise Web application has been designed to ease the customization of its browser based interface PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 352 a Appendix D Customization and Integration Fonts and Colors The entire design is based around cascading style sheets The following style sheets can be modified to change the colors fonts and font sizes for the entire PaperVision Enterprise Web Client e Support Files default_style css contains the majority of the style sheet attributes for the entire application Note The contents of the Support_Files Grid css that contained the style sheet attributes fo
101. PaperFlow users to create multiple projects containing the same index field setup but have different scan process index location etc settings and have those projects imported into the same PaperVision Enterprise project As data groups are imported once the documents for a project are ingested the procedure attempts to apply document security levels and create WorkFlow instances per applicable pre conditions as well as import any full text data for those documents Any uncompleted process will be automatically added as a maintenance queue item therefore allowing the remainder of the data group to be imported successfully For more information on maintenance queue processing see the Maintenance section of the Global Administration chapter PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 99 To manually import a data group 1 Inthe Data Groups screen click the Import Data Group icon The Import Data Group dialog box appears a Import New Data Group T Apply object changes during reload W object version fastest but uses more database space ting object version retain annotations F Delete source data group after copy Import Data Group PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 100 4 Chapter 4 Entity Administration 2 Click the ellipsis button to locate the data group path from which to import The following extension ty
102. PaperVision Enterprise yN SYSTEMS Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide PaperVision Enterprise Release 77 January 2014 Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Digitech Systems Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license or nondisclosure agreement No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of Digitech Systems Inc Copyright 2014 Digitech Systems Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America PaperFlow DataFlow OCRFlow QCFlow and the Digitech Systems Inc logo are trademarks of Digitech Systems Inc PaperVision PaperVision net and PaperVision Capture are registered trademarks of Digitech Systems Inc Microsoft Windows Windows XP and Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners PaperVision Enterprise contains text search technology provided under license by dtSearch All rights reser
103. Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings H Entities gt 5 31 2011 11 45AM Import Logs PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 32 To view an import log entry 1 Double click the appropriate import log entry The Import Log Entry Properties screen appears S Import Log Entry Properties Workstation CHADGYVIRXP Final Status Success Started 2011 05 27 13 51 54 Ended 2011 05 27 13 51 55 Data Group DOA10004 Log ID 4 Path C Documents and Settings Administrator D esktop D ata Groups Message Imported Successfully Import Log Entry Properties 2 Click Close PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 33 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Exporting Import Log Entries You can export one or more import log entries to an XML file To export import log entries 1 Inthe Import Logs screen select one or more import logs 2 Click the Export Selected Item s icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the export The Export Log dialog box appears Export Log Save in E Exported_Import_Logs e m e a My Recent Documents Desktop My Computer aiti etwork File name AutolmportLogs XML aa laces Save as type XML Files X Cancel A Export Log 4 Locate the directory where the export will be written 5 Enter the file name for the export 6 Click Save A message will notify you where
104. Processing Me Report Management File Sets E Current Activity E General Security 1g Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors Reports 11 25 2009 10 36AM oy Data Storage PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 135 2 Double click on Report Management File Sets The Report Management File Sets screen appears Report Management File Sets alala ella Finish Date Time FileSetName JobName Workstation sf 2004 12 28 10 54 45 N A amp Imported DG CHADGYIRXP DG200 1 Item Displayed Max Items fi 000 Close Report Management File Sets La IMIM PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 136 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Filtering the Report Management File Set List When thousands of file sets exist you can filter the list to only display file sets meeting your specified criteria To filter the file set listing 1 Inthe Report Management File Sets screen click the Filter icon The Data Storage Filter dialog box appears Data Storage Filter Report Management File Set Filter File Set Name Finished to Job Name Data Group Imported lt Any gt k Clear Filter Cancel Data Storage Filter 2 Enter the desired filter criteria and then select OK Enter dates in the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format Note If the results
105. Records Retention Policy Set Properties In the General tab you can assign the unique name of the policy set You can also enter additional descriptive information pertaining to the new policy set E New Records Retention Policy Set General Policies Policy Set Name I m Comments Clear Nothing x Cancel Records Retention Policy Set General PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 186 In the Policies tab you can add a new policy set to the bottom of the list edit or remove existing policy sets and move the selected policy set up or down the evaluation list E New Records Retention Policy Set Policy Name Status Review Offset S O Clear Nothing Cancel Records Retention Policy Set Policies pepo aight ep atten fica ee oa poe eae ee Le aaa oo PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 187 W Chapter 6 Records Retention Records Retention Policies Each policy set must contain one or more policies Each document is evaluated against each policy in the order that the policies are displayed If a document meets a policy s criteria and is locked or marked for destruction then the document will no longer be evaluated against any further policies of that same type retention or destruction E New Policy General Criteria General Policy Name Status Active v Policy Type Dest
106. Send From Specifies the e mail address from which the email is sent this value is only used for automated Worksteps Send To Specifies the email recipient multiple recipients can be specified by separating them with commas pipe characters or semicolons Subject Specifies the value displayed in the email subject Body Specifies the contents of the email body Note Index field values are not formatted when sending emails in automated Worksteps only Causes a document index field value to be changed to a specified value This task type has the following options Field Specifies the document index field to be updated Value Specifies the value to be inserted into the document index field Note When forcing index values you can assign the CURRENTDATETIME tag to date fields automated Worksteps only Sign Document Requires the user to sign the document 6 After selecting the task type and configuring its settings click OK to save the task The new task will be added to the Workstep 7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for any additional tasks PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 311 Reorder Tasks 1 Click the Tasks option in the left panel of the WorkFlow Designer screen O O280 3 s PPORED B Pre Conditions The Precondition E OO WorkSteps Task 33 Sign Document e Get Invoice Number B Tracking Invoice E OO WorkSteps O A Get
107. Sender Address criteria You can click the Import button to import a line delimited list of addresses Sender Active Directory Group Names The list of Active Directory Group Names is not case sensitive When populated each message s sender email address is evaluated against an Active Directory lookup to determine whether the sender falls within a specified group If they are within at least one of the listed groups the message is considered to have met the Sender Active Directory Group Names criteria You can click the Import button to import a line delimited list of group names PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 211 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Recipient Settings Recipient settings allow you to add import and delete recipient addresses and Active Directory group names E New Policy m Recipient Addresses Add Import Delete l Recipient Active Directory Group Names Add Import Delete IV Active Message Capture Policy Recipient Recipient Addresses The Recipient Addresses display a list of regular expressions that are evaluated If the recipient email address meets one of the regular expressions the message is considered to have met the Recipient Address criteria You can click the Import button to import a line delimited list of addresses Recipient Active Directory Group Names The list of Active Directory Group Names is not case
108. Tf Lock Destruction Info Doc ID 6 Lock Information lt None Defined gt Destruction Information Date Time 2011 06 06 14 20 00 Applied By ADMIN Comments Changed destruction date per new policy Lock Destruction Info PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 321 System Operations Queries System operations queries reports provide detailed records of all system operations that have been performed including password changes access to projects and queries executed alal allal Date Time User Operation Informatio ProjectN Project N Project N Project N Project N Project N User Nang 278 Items Displayed Max Items 1000 Close System Operations Queries Report System operations queries reports include the following information e Date Time the operation was performed e User performing the operation e Operation being performed i e Search Logged In e Information pertaining to the operation e Source IP address or computer name the operation was performed from PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 322 Utilization Utilization reports provide summary totals for operations such as pages viewed printed and faxed which is grouped by user They also provide storage utilization reports as well as document page and storage totals per project Pe Utilization Report Entity ID 1 Entity Name Default Company
109. Type is Regular Expression or Regular Expression Position enter the Regular Expression For more information see Appendix F Regular Expressions 20 Click Configure The data is extracted from the application and displayed in the Configure Parsing dialog box Note Configuring parsing is not necessary for a Parse Type of Regular Expression Configure Parsing Keyboard Solutions Line 1 Column 1 Width 8 Configure Parsing 21 Highlight the data to extract for the index field search and then click OK The Line Column and Length fields are populated with the appropriate values Tip If your field length may be variable assign a greater Length value in the Configure Index Field dialog box 22 Click Test Parsing PaperVision Enterprise will get the data and parse it as defined displaying the text that was extracted for searching the index field PaperVision Integration Definition 1 Found Text Advanced Test Parsing 23 Click OK to save the index field configuration PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 228 W Chapter 8 Integration Definitions 24 Repeat steps 16 through 23 for any additional index field search criteria 25 Click OK 26 In the Integration Definitions dialog box select the Search Type and Sort By values 27 Select the Display Selection 28 Click Save Editing an Existing Integration Definition
110. Users screen appears a PaperVision Administration Console MA Action Help EA Global Administration User Name Full Name Type Entities i ACCOUNTING SUPERVISOR User System Admin lt Default Company gt 1 Default Administrator User System Admin E Backup Processing F SALES MANAGER User System Admin H Current Activity Accounting Admin User System Admin Data Storage HR Admin User System Admin General Security Operator 1 User es Encryption Keys Security Policy System Groups System Users g Message Capture Policy Sets ia Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors Reports ADMIN 11 25 2003 2 02PM y System Users PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 123 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration 2 Click the New icon The New User dialog box appears New User User Name Full Name Email Address Password Confirm Password MV User must change password at next logon J User can change password when desired Administration Rights Tl System Administrator F Workflow Administrator T Capture Administrator Cancel New User Enter the User Name that will be used to log in to PaperVision Enterprise 4 Enter the user s Full Name optional The user s full name is used for some of PaperVision Enterprise s reporting capabilities 5 Enter the user s Email Address optional that wil
111. View Folders V Move Folders IV Create Folders V Move Docs into Folders IV Delete Folders V Remove Does from Folders V Rename Folders F Signatures V View Signatures V Sign Documents Al Rights Cancel Edit Security Access Rights 4 Grant revoke the rights as necessary 5 Select OK to save the changes PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 171 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Deleting Security Access Rights Security access rights can be deleted in two ways First you can edit the security access rights for a user or group and then remove all rights The second more efficient manner is to delete the user or group possessing the security access rights To delete security access rights 1 Inthe Security Access screen select the appropriate user or group 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Document Security Levels PaperVision Enterprise provides extensive security measures beyond the project level security access rights described earlier in this chapter Project security access rights provide functionality based security at the project level Users are granted or denied access to specific projects and functionality within those projects Document security on the other hand provides much more fine grained tuning of the security all the way down to the individual document level Document security is performed in two s
112. Vision Enterprise extracts all of the information from the specified screen by listing the contents of all of the child windows Most items on a screen such as text boxes labels etc are considered child windows e Trigger on Hotkey Send Keys for Clipboard This method causes the integration to launch when a specific hot key sequence is pressed when a user is viewing an application that has the specified Window Title screen Once you have specified the Window Title PaperVision Enterprise sends a pre defined sequence of keystrokes to the screen to copy specific data to the clipboard PaperVision Enterprise then extracts the data from the clipboard This method is particularly useful for a number of terminal emulation applications that do not utilize child windows e Trigger on Clipboard This method causes the integration to launch when an application with your specified Window Title screen has copied data to the windows clipboard Once you have specified the Window Title PaperVision Enterprise extracts the data from the clipboard Note Data is copied to the Windows clipboard from within the third party application Window Title This setting specifies the title of the application screen that integrates with PaperVision Enterprise Triggers will only be passed to PaperVision Enterprise if your specified Window Title is found in the title of the application screen In other words your specified Window Title can in
113. Worksteps When a user accesses a Workstep instance that the user owns the following events occur 1 The Workstep is processed to see if any post conditions are already met If so the Workstep is completed and the server transitions to the next Workstep PaperVision Enterprise looks to see if there are any automated tasks such as firing a COM event or executing a command line operation listed as the next task If so that task is executed and then steps 1 and 2 are repeated until there are no automated tasks next in line The user will select a task to mark it as completed PaperVision Enterprise will evaluate the post conditions to see if any are met If so the Workstep is completed and the server transitions to the next Workstep PaperVision Enterprise looks to see if there are any more automated tasks such as firing the COM event or executing a command line operation listed as the next task If so that task is executed and then steps 4 and 5 are repeated until there are no automated tasks next in line Steps 3 through 5 are repeated until the workstep is completed Email Tags PaperVision Enterprise provides the Send Email task type that is available when you configure individual tasks within a workstep This task type allows you to configure the sender recipient subject and body components of the email PaperVision Enterprise also includes email tags that allow email fields to automatically be populated based on WorkFl
114. a A a eae ee LA o OO PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 96 2 Double click on Data Groups The Data Groups screen appears Data Groups i Image 5 6 iesources 7 Accounts Receivable 40 Sales 40 Bo fer Accounts Receivable 0 3 Items Displayed Marx Items fi 000 Close Data Groups Note In the Data Groups screen the last loaded document ID is shown in parentheses after the project name For example the first project is displayed as Human Resources 7 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide Chapter 4 Entity Administration Filtering the Data Groups List When thousands of data groups exist you can filter the list of data groups To filter the data groups listing 1 From the Data Groups screen click the Filter a icon The Data Storage Filter screen appears Data Storage Filter m Data Group Filter Name Type lt Any gt Last Imported 2009 1 0 12 00 00 00 to 2009 1 0 22 00 00 00 Project lt All Projects gt z Original Name Clear Filter i i Cancel Data Storage Filter 2 Enter the desired filter criteria and then click OK Enter dates in the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format The data groups meeting your specified filter criteria will appear Note At the bottom of the results screen PaperVision Enterprise specifies the number of it
115. a claim we take lightly Digitech Systems has provided document management and high volume image capture applications for a number of years In addition to providing software Digitech Systems offers an on demand SaaS service known as ImageSilo Being an on demand provider requires a great amount of expertise in offering scalable systems unparalleled security and high availability Digitech Systems has taken the expertise gained as an on demand provider and used that experience to design PaperVision Enterprise In addition to standard features and functionality there were three additional areas that were focused on e Scalability e Reliability e Security The manner in which PaperVision Enterprise addresses these issues is explained in detail in Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security IMPORTANT To support the ISO 8601 international date format many functions in PaperVision Enterprise may now display dates and times using the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format Licensing As stated in your End User License Agreement PaperVision Enterprise is licensed per concurrent user This allows you the greatest flexibility in licensing as a license is only used when a user is logged into the system no licenses are used for administration If all of the licenses are in use the user will be prompted that there are no licenses available for their session If you are hosting PaperVision Enterprise for multiple e
116. a for multiple companies and each company wants to be able to administrate itself and its users e Ina large enterprise that has different departments or cost centers that want the ability to administrate themselves separately from other departments without having to involve a central IT organization The only reason to create a separate entity would be to administrate the entities completely separate from each other This has nothing to do with limiting access to specific projects functionality or documents all of that can be done within a single entity To view the entity list select the Entities folder PaperVision Administration Console BAR Action Help xalla Global Administration Entity ID Name Start Date Parent E acia 1 lt Default Company gt 2011 05 27 5 31 2011 3 57 PM Entities PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 67 a Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Entity Properties Entity properties dictate how the server handles system level functions relating to that entity As such configuring entity properties as well as the ability to create edit and delete entities is limited to global administrators To view an entity s properties select the entity in the list and then click the Properties 8 icon Entity Properties General General entity properties include the entity name database settings entity paths and options to disable the ent
117. a new page is created and the engine advances to the specified line number before outputting the remainder of the input line AS400 Spool Page Dete Start Column fi Column Width 4 Strip Codes T AS400 Spool Page Detection Start Column This value specifies the starting column position for each line that will be evaluated for channel codes AS400 spool files generally use a Start Column of 1 Column Width This value specifies the width from the Start Column that will be used to evaluate spool codes For instance if Start Column is 5 and Column Width is 5 then the engine will look for codes that fall within columns 5 6 7 8 and 9 AS400 spool files generally use a Column Width of 4 Strip Codes If enabled the columns specified by Start Column and Column Width are removed from the output PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 256 w Chapter 9 Report Management Text Sequence Removal Page Text Sequence Removal provides a means to search for and remove replace textual values or regular expressions within a page s data This is useful for re purposing confidential data for use by third parties For additional information see Appendix F Regular Expressions Text Sequence Removal m Defined Text Sequences Text Sequence Reg Exp Min Col Min Line Max Line Disposition DJDE No 0 Strip Sequence from Output Edit Remove
118. aae stays 364 searching ULES E E E T 364 searching rules general eeseeseeeeseeeeeneees 364 Secret Key Generation encryption cee 108 SOCULILY ACCESS ee eesceeeceseceeeceeeceecseeeseeeeeeeeeees 161 security access rights GELS sis sccbsadeshestedeceesensaiessialensebenseineosatershs 170 ditin caiene creree n e aai Eeka enS erry Tt arevar 168 OEE EE E EEA 163 DIANNE 5 22 cesssndeshcotesecsenetsediscsesesteosesccaseds 164 67 SCttINGS E E EA 161 security levels GCOCUIMENE sirsie esiin erasian 171 security policy CHITI cess avates Aveeess aeseestaceistevesives dosteensacatvies cs 111 Send Email workstep task type 316 send keys configure Integration Definitions 225 sessions KINE iisas iin 87 ER E E A EAT 87 single user system design scenario 355 SMTP PASSWOT vs csc cascsacaicsaevescssteaseies iein EEr 58 Server name IP seiirt aieiaa 57 ITLS POLE E EET A E E 57 SCHIN GS sssrin eni eensenani shikin Ti anna asien 57 USEL MAME aerar irie rret net Nar arie EEES EEE EVERA Ee 58 Source Code senice aiino e 359 SQL database results per query s sessssseeeseee 47 submit files Report Management 232 summary files Report Management 232 system design scenarios cceceesceereeeeeeeeeeeees 355 department sessies oerni ene iins 356 large NLELPTiSe eee eee eeeesecseeeeceeeereeseeeeenes 357 SIN GIG USET seoor ara 355 W
119. ability to import a report management job that was created by exporting the configuration The import process will import the entire configuration except the Input Path s To import a report management job 1 Inthe Report Management Jobs screen click the Import icon 2 Inthe Export Report Management Job dialog box locate the directory containing the report management job Select the XML file and then click Open 4 When the notification indicates the import was successful click OK 5 Edit the imported job and assign the appropriate input paths PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 287 Chapter 10 WorkFlow PaperVision s Enterprise WorkFlow is an optional separately licensed component of the PaperVision Enterprise suite It allows users to automate business processes according to a set of procedural steps There are no separate components to install as PaperVision Enterprise and PaperVision net Enterprise include the WorkFlow components WorkFlow definition management and monitoring are accomplished through the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console Terminology PaperVision Enterprise WorkFlow adheres by the terms described in this section All of these terms are the standard terms prescribed by the WFMC WorkFlow Management Coalition or WFMC approved synonyms WorkFlow Definition A WorkFlow definition describes a series of activities workstep definitions and
120. accept both encrypted and unencrypted incoming lookups grants If this option is not selected the system will only allow retrieval of encrypted grants The options below can be configured in the PYVDMDOCVIEW section of the PVDM INI file If DOCGRANT NOPROMPT 1 is present the user will not be prompted for an expiration date and password before grant creation If DOCGRANT NOCOPYNOTICE 1 is present the user will not be prompted after the URL has been copied to the clipboard after selecting the Copy button Graphically sign image based documents Document validation occurs on all files within a document User should keep in mind that for optimal performance they should consider single file documents for signing to keep from having calculate SHA256 hashes for every page of the document It is important to note that the non repudiation that is performed in PVE absolutely ensures that neither the record of signature i e data base entry for the signature nor the document itself have been tampered with The green checkmark to the left of the signature indicates that the non repudiation validation for the signature and document have passed If either the signature entry in the database or the document itself is modified the validation checks will fail and will show an erroneous signature the green checkmark is replaced with a red X This is an important requirement for admissibility of legal documents signed electronically PaperVision En
121. accessing the system from any location in the world SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition Currently SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition is included as an optional component during the PaperVision Enterprise installation from the DVD This is an important component of Digitech Systems product offering because our customers need not purchase Microsoft SQL Server in order to gain the benefits of client server computing and scalability And in the event you someday decide to upgrade to the full version of Microsoft SQL Server the database transfers right over since SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition is Microsoft SQL Server scaled down SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition is much more scalable than a system based on Access or any other file based database such as FoxPro Since it can be installed on any current Microsoft operating system you can decide whether to dedicate a database server use a PaperVision workstation to also act as the database server for everyone or a group of users or install a stand alone workstation of PaperVision with SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition serving only the workstation it is installed on While SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition is a data engine built and based on core SQL Server technology there are some differences between it and full blown Microsoft SQL Server The following are some of the more notable differences e SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition when used for PaperVision does NOT require any
122. age You can add edit or remove individual sequences To add or edit text sequences 1 Inthe Page tab click the Configure button in the Page Detection section The Text Sequence Page Detection dialog box appears Text Sequence Page Detection Defined Text Sequences Text Sequence Feg Exp Min Col Max Col Effect Disposition Add Edit Remove caesl_ Test Sequence Page Detection PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 249 o Chapter 9 Report Management 2 Click Add or Edit The Text Sequence Definition dialog box appears Text Sequence Definition Sequence Regular Expression J Min Column Max Column Page Effect Page begins fo lines above C Pageends 0 lines below Disposition Leave Sequence Intact Text Sequence Definition 3 Configure the appropriate settings described below and then click OK e Sequence Specifies the textual value or regular expression to be sought e Regular Expression Treats sequence as a regular expression otherwise sequence is searched for as a standard textual value e Min Column Specifies the minimum column that the sequence must fall within e Max Column Specifies the maximum column that the sequence must fall within e Page Effect When the sequence is successfully located in the appropriate column s determines what effect it has Page Begins specifies that the p
123. age began X lines above the line where the sequence was found zero indicates the located line is the top line Page Ends specifies that the page will end X lines below the line where the sequence was found zero indicates that located line is the last line e Disposition Indicates what should be done with the sequence after it has been identified PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 250 w Chapter 9 Report Management Custom Control Codes This page detection method provides for the identification of a single character or a string of characters that are located within a defined column boundary Not only can this method be used to separate pages but it can also be used to format output i e insert blank lines place text on specific lines etc You can add edit or remove individual custom codes To add or edit custom codes 1 Inthe Page tab select the Custom Control Codes detection method 2 Click the Configure button in the Page Detection section The Custom Control Codes Page Detection dialog box appears Custom Control Codes Page Detection m Control Code Settings Start Column Column Width Vertical Space on Undefined Codes V Strip Codes E r Custom Codes Decimal Hex Action Action Value Add Edit Remove omes Custom Control Codes Page Detection PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference
124. al Administration To add a new license 1 Click the New icon and the New License dialog box appears e New License Your license code was included with your product documentation and media If you do not have a license code or would like a demo please contact Digitech Systems at 877 374 3569 or 402 484 7777 You may use your license code to enable only a single database License Code Web Authorization Bhone Authorization Cancel New License 2 Enter the License Code that was included with your product documentation and media 3 Click the Web Authorization button to obtain the license key online 4 If you do not have access to the internet click the Phone Authorization button The Obtain Authorization Code screen appears Obtain Authorization Code Please contact Digitech Systems at 877 374 3569 or 402 484 7777 to obtain your License Key You will be asked to provide the following pieces of information eae Serial Number Identifier 147R Please enter your Authorization Code below m Obtain Authorization Code 5 Contact Digitech Systems Technical Support toll free at 877 374 3569 or direct at 402 484 7777 to obtain your license key 6 Enter the authorization code provided to you by Digitech Systems Technical Support and then click OK The license will be added to the database PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 39 i
125. all entities Migration jobs are handled by global administrators in the exact same way that entity system administrators handle them For more information on working with migration jobs refer to the Migration Jobs section in the Entity Administration chapter Notifications Global administrators will receive automated notifications when any of the following events occurs e A migration job was submitted e A migration job has finished running e A purge failed Notifications are handled in the same way that they are handled for entities For more information on working with notifications refer to the Current Activity Notifications section in the Entity Administration chapter PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 45 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Process Locks Process locks prevent multiple systems from simultaneously processing the same task When a system attempts to run a process it creates a lock that prevents any other system from starting the same work For example when System A attempts to run a task that System B is currently processing System A verifies that a process lock has not been placed before it sets its own lock If a system encounters a failure during processing i e power failure the process lock may not be released In this case you may have to manually release or delete the lock To view all process locks select Global Administration gt Process Loc
126. ally Settings not marked as Local are globally distributed through the centralized database To view the system settings select Global Administration gt System Settings PaperVision Administration Console Action Help 3 Ba Global Administration Name oS Automation Service Status Configure System Settings ri Deletion Queue Configure Automation Service Scheduling Email Queue Global Administrators Import Licensing P Maintenance a Migration Jobs gt Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings Entities 11 19 2003 12 37 PM System Settings Configuring System Settings To configure system settings 1 Click the Configure System Settings 2 icon The System Settings dialog appears The following sections describe the settings available for configuration in each tab 2 Configure the system settings to your requirements and then click OK The system settings will take effect immediately PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 47 a Chapter 2 Global Administration System Settings General General System Settings allow you to configure the system s utilization limits WorkFlow processing options and the maximum number of reports notifications to display Additionally you can assign the server side encryption key and the client ping increment in the General tab EF System Settings General Data Replication E
127. an additional unencrypted file embedded in the root of the package file known as the package information file File Name lt PackageFileName gt pvpkginfo File Contents lt xml version 1 0 gt lt PVPACKAGEINFO gt lt ENTID gt EntityIDHere lt ENTID gt lt ENCRYPTKEYNAME gt Ke yNameHere lt ENCRYPTKEYNAME gt lt PVPACKAGEINFO gt As directory manager processes a package file it first extracts the package information file It uses the ENTID and ENCRYPTKEYNAME values to determine if the package contents are encrypted If the ENCRYPTKEYNAME value is not empty then it will retrieve the encryption key value for the encryption key name for the entity ID specified and use that value to decrypt the remaining contents of the package Then PaperVision Enterprise extracts the contents of the package file to the path specified in the Global System Settings Local Package Workspace Path Once the contents of the package file are fully extracted directory manager processes the extracted contents of the package file into a new data group regardless of the job s Copy Files to a new data group setting because they reside at a temporary location Furthermore processing of the contents of a package file also ignores the job s Minimum Modified Date setting because file dates can be modified by the package creation or package extraction process Once the contents are processed it removes the contents from the Local Package Workspac
128. and batch paths for example that a global administrator can assign WorkFlow Administrators WorkFlow administrators are able to design and configure WorkFlows within an entity They can configure WorkFlow definitions for any project and view WorkFlow history and WorkFlow status reports but they have no access to documents or functions in any projects unless a system administrator explicitly grants them access If they do have access to view documents within a project WorkFlow administrators can create WorkFlow instances for a particular document and view its WorkFlow status Capture Administrators Capture administrators can define Capture Jobs for use with the PaperVision Capture product Capture administrators have no administrative capabilities in PaperVision Enterprise PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 12 w Chapter 1 Introduction Logging into the Administration Console When the administration console is started you will be prompted to log into the system Administration Login User name ADMIN Password I Global Cancel Administration Login If this is your first time logging in the user name is ADMIN and the password is ADMIN Checking the Global checkbox determines whether you are logging in as a Global Administrator or an Entity Administrator Initially go ahead and log in as a Global Administrator Once you have logged into the administration cons
129. ant software will automatically be copied into any migrated data groups during the migration process If any errors occur when locating document files during the migration process the errors are written to a Migration Errors X txt file in the data group s directory PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 128 Running a Migration Job To run the migration job 1 Select the entity and then select Migration Jobs The Migration Jobs screen appears PaperVision Administration Console BEE Global Administration Entities 8 lt Default Company gt 1 lt Data Group 000000001 000000004 Migration for ADMIN Global Administrator lt N A amp Entire Date 6 Backup Processing lt Data Group 000000003 000000001 Migration for ADMIN Global Administrator lt N A Entire Date Current Activity jee Data Storage H 3 General Security 0 Message Capture Policy Sets i a Migration Jobs Projects i Report Management Errors Reports Migration Jobs epee hgh MO pe ep atten eo fio ee a bee eae ee aaa aa aaa oO PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 129 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration 2 Select the appropriate migration job and then click the Properties EJ icon The Migration Job Properties dialog box appears c Edit lt Data Group 000000002 000000001 Mig Name I lt Data Group O00000002 000000001 Migration fo Entity Nam
130. application server bottleneck in a high availability high scalability system Generally speaking the other external systems that are still an integral part of the PaperVision Enterprise system such as network and storage can be appropriately scaled using readily available technology However the database server can become a bottleneck when handling requests for thousands of simultaneous users and we need to scale to billions to meet our unlimited scalability claim Sure you can create clusters of database servers and even add processors however at the time of this writing Microsoft SQL Server does NOT offer active active clustering so adding machines to a SQL cluster only increases availability not scalability PaperVision Enterprise s solution lies in its ability to place entities in separate physical databases that may be spread out across separate servers You could place all of the entities in a single database on a single server split them across multiple databases on a single or multiple servers or you could even place each entity on its own database in its own database cluster PaperVision Enterprise s administration tools as well as the end user application handle all of the complexity of managing multiple databases All administration is handled in the Administration Console and other than telling the system to create the new entity in a different database you never have to worry about which entity is on which database
131. arch criteria needed to complete the post condition Click the Search Criteria field and then click the ellipse The Search Criteria popup displays Search Criteria x Company Name Zip Code Search Type Or Test Criteria Search Criteria Post Conditions 5 Enter the criteria that the document s index values will be required to meet and then click OK 6 Click the Test Criteria button to ensure the criteria entered is valid PaperVision Enterprise will notify you if there are any errors 7 Click OK to save the search criteria PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 313 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow Note Default post conditions have been created automatically for any links that have been defined to other Worksteps 8 Enabling the lt Document Signed gt post condition requires that the document be signed before the post condition will be met 9 Once a document has been signed enable the lt Document Signed gt post condition to complete 10 Select the Tasks field and then click the ellipse The Tasks dialog box displays Tasks x Tasks criteria that must be met yv Document Meets Search Criteria gt C Document Signed gt Task 1 Task 2 Post Conditions that have no tasks criteria options selected will be considered Filled Completed automatically Post Conditions Tasks 11 Select a Task t
132. are met by that page This is an important concept to keep in mind when configuring jobs that contain a large number of overlays as it increases system responsiveness to have the most commonly used forms listed first S New Overlay Overlay Name I Page Range fi to 399999 m Pages from Range to Include C EvenPages OddPages Both Even and Odd Pages Page Content Criteria Regular Expression pecena ienee OOO o I Case Sensitive Index Value Criteria Regular Expression lt Select an Index Field gt v l Case Sensitive Overlay Image File Setup Overlay Cancel New Overlay PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 273 a Chapter 9 Report Management Overlay Name This setting specifies the name of the overlay file Page Range You can specify the range of pages that the overlay form can be applied to Pages from Range to Include You can apply the form only to even odd or all pages within the specified Page Range Page Content Criteria Regular Expression If provided the system evaluates whether this regular expression can be located within the contents of the page s text Index Value Criteria Regular Expression If provided the system evaluates whether this regular expression can be located within the contents of the specified index field value Overlay Image File You can specify the overlay form file over which
133. art Time Time in WorkFlow mins Current Works lt u t 3 Items Displayed Max Items f ooo Close WorkFlow Status Report WorkFlow status reports include the following information e WorkFlow Instance ID e WorkFlow name e WorkFlow instance start time e Length of time the WorkFlow instance has been active uncompleted in minutes e Current workstep for the WorkFlow e Current workstep instance start time e Length of time the workstep instance has been active uncompleted in minutes e Owner of the current workstep instance When a specific WorkFlow or Workstep is used as a filter value the report will also include any available information pertaining to the document associated with each item in the report PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 327 i Chapter 11 Reports Viewing the History of a WorkFlow Instance WorkFlow Status reports allow you to view the compiled history of the entire WorkFlow up to the current active state Select an item in the report and then click the WorkFlow History icon The WorkFlow History dialog box appears wE WorkFlow History 1 06 07 09 27 51 WorkFlow Instance Initiated by lt SYSTEM AUTOMATION gt 2011 06 07 09 27 51 Transitioning to Update Status to Pending WorkFlow History Moving Transitioning a WorkFlow to a Specific Workstep System and WorkFlow administrators can take an active WorkFlow instance and transition it to a specific
134. atabase Workgroup In a small workgroup each system only installs PaperVision Enterprise with the exception of a single workstation also having the SQL Server database and Administration Console application installed All of the other systems connect to the database workstation and interact with any document stores directly PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 347 a Appendix C System Architecture Department In a department scenario with hundreds of users there may be users accessing the system via both the browser based PaperVision net Enterprise and the PaperVision Enterprise applications G amp O R User Station User Station User Station Web Spplication Server Document Store Department We recommend that in a departmental solution you seriously evaluate your need for Microsoft SQL Server rather than using SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition in order to meet your scalability needs The user stations interact with the web application server The web application server handles all of the necessary transactions with the database server and the document store PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 348 W Appendix C System Architecture Large Enterprise PaperVision Enterprise easily scales to handle the needs of an entire enterprise Intemal User Station Internal User Station Internal User Station
135. ation Service Schedule Select the desired Operation Start Time and Schedule Select OK To edit or remove an existing operation highlight the desired operation and select the corresponding Edit or Remove button When the automation service processes items it checks the current and compares it to the listed Next Run Time If the Next Run Time has been reached it performs the operation and then sets the time for the next run You can change the order that operations are evaluated by highlighting the desired operation s and selecting the corresponding up 4 or down Ekl buttons When the schedule is configured as desired select Save The new automation service schedule will take effect immediately PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 66 Chapter 3 Entity Configuration An entity is a body e g a corporation or organization that provides its own administration Only global and system administrators can configure an entity s properties Each entity contains its own projects groups of similarly categorized documents users groups WorkFlows security policies etc No information is shared among entities In general most PaperVision Enterprise installations including large enterprise installations will not need more than one entity The need for multiple entities can arise in specific circumstances e Ina hosting environment where an on demand provider is hosting dat
136. blResultsShowFirstDoc Defines whether the system will display the first document in the search results automatically default false e gblSecondaryTM Defines the Secondary Trademark Information that displays on the About page default empty string PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 354 a Appendix D Customization and Integration e gblSiteImage Defines an image to display in the top left corner of the interface default empty string If none is specified the gblSiteName value is displayed as text instead e gblSiteName Defines the name of the product to display throughout the application default PaperVision lt sup gt amp reg lt sup gt Enterprise e gbISLAHTML Defines the HTML formatted Service Level Agreement SLA text that displays on the About page default empty string e gblUseCompressedJSFiles Defines whether to reference the compressed pveCommon js file that improves the loading speed of the pages in the Web Client default false so compressed files will not be referenced Note When this attribute is enabled the contents of the pveCommon js file under the PVEWeb Javascript folder will be compressed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 355 Appendix E Search Criteria There are a number of occasions in using the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console when you
137. can enter ad hoc Disclosure Reasons This setting specifies that users can select an existing reason from the list or they can enter an unlisted reason Add ad hoc Disclosure Reason to list When a user enters an ad hoc reason that new reason will be added to the global list for others to select in the future 6 Click OK to save the changes PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 153 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Disclosure Reason List Disclosure reasons can be configured by the administrator or if allowed can be entered by the users as they make disclosures To manually add disclosure reasons 1 Inthe Enhanced Auditing screen click the Disclosure Reason List B icon The Disclosure Reason List dialog box appears E Disclosure Reason List Project Name Accounts Receivable Disclosure Reasons Billing Discrepancy Yearly audit i Remove Copy OK Cancel Disclosure Reason List PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 154 Chapter 5 Project Administration 2 Click Add The Add New Disclosure Reason dialog box appears Add New Disclosure Reason Enter the new Disclosure Reason You may enter multiple items by separating them with a ee comma mm Add New Disclosure Reason 3 Enter the new disclosure reason You can enter multiple reasons by separating them with a comma 4
138. capability to submit a project to have its full text indexes compressed This is useful if large amounts of information have been deleted from the full text database such as in purging data groups When data is deleted from the full text database it is removed but the space within the database is not reclaimed Full Text compression is submitted as a maintenance job to be processed by the automation service To compress full text for a project 1 Inthe Projects screen select one or more projects 2 Click the Submit for Full Text Compression icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the compression and submit the maintenance job PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 150 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Enhanced Auditing PaperVision Enterprise keeps an audit log entry for every document operation a user performs Administrators can also opt to take advantage of PaperVision Enterprise s Enhanced Auditing capabilities on a per project basis Enhanced auditing is designed to help users in certain industries fulfill regulatory compliance obligations When enabled users will be required to enter select the following information whenever they perform a document operation that could result in a disclosure to another party e Method of disclosure Print fax email etc e Disclosure recipient Party who is receiving the information e Disclosure reason Reason the disclosure was made to the rec
139. cel Region Properties Floating Anchor Floating Anchor Location Sequence For floating anchor types you can specify the textual value or regular expression to be sought in order to locate the anchor Case Sensitive This setting specifies whether the sequence is to be treated as case sensitive Regular Expression If this setting is enabled the sequence is treated as a regular expression Otherwise the sequence is searched for as a standard textual value PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 266 a Chapter 9 Report Management Floating Anchor Sequence Range These values specify the left top width and height of the column line range that the anchor sequence must be located within The range can be configured explicitly in this screen or drawn graphically using the mouse Validator Sequence This setting specifies the textual value or regular expression to be sought in order to validate the anchor on a page Once the engine thinks it has an anchor it will attempt to verify that the Validator Sequence can be located Validator Sequence Range These values specify the left top width and height of the column line range that the Validator Sequence must be located within The range can be configured explicitly in this screen or drawn graphically using the mouse PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 267 a Chapter 9
140. chiving MEPOTt TAN BES c isscccnecsassdodssesssscsensssesossssessvees 341 auditing COMMA CEM 2 3 sais psaisseessisctasennsssdvosesecdensnseceeesas 149 automatic selection critieria seeeeeteeeeeeeees 174 automation servers tasks performed by 353 automation service logging enable logging ce eeeeseeseeseceeeereneeeeceaeeneeees 60 automation service operations Starting and stopping 17 automation service scheduling CONFI QUIING ee eeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeceeereeeeeceaeenteaes 64 ojele mennt oTa ANENE 61 automation service scheduling operations Backup Processing c ccesccesecsseeseeseeeseeees 61 Deletion Queue ccccccscesseeceseceeseeesseeesseeens 61 Directory Manager Jobs 61 Email Queus sneonen iniaeeai 61 File Replication ci cceeeeeeccseerceeeeeceeeeeeees 61 Full Text Index Compression c0 62 Full Text Replication 62 Import Queue ssiri es gesn chvet ec veevee ecb eeseets 62 Maintenance Queue ccscecessseeseeesseeeeeeeens 62 Monitored Import Paths eeeceseeeeeteeneeees 62 Monitored Import Paths Submit 0 62 Records Retention 63 Report Archiving c cecceeseeseestecseeeseeeneeees 63 Report Management cece eeeeseeeeeeeeees 63 Session Grant Cleanup c cceccesseecteereeerees 63 Storage Utilization Snapshots seers 63 WorkFlow Automated eeeeeeeeeeeneeneeees 63 WorkFlow Max Times 63 Work
141. con 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 86 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Processing Logs The Processing Logs screen records each time a backup package file has been successfully created allowing administrators to review how much data is being backed up each time a job is processed To view backup processing logs select the entity and then select Backup Processing gt Processing Logs The Backup Processing Logs screen appears PaperVision Administration Console DES Action Help Global Administration Run Time Utilization MB Information 5 A Entities DG O00000001 000000004 DGA10004 2011 06 01 14 02 00 1 54 DG oo0000C lt Default Company gt 1 AP FullText Backup 2011 05 31 13 23 00 0 07 Project Acc Ei Backup Processing E Backup Jobs B By Current Activity Fj Current Sessions Document Grants Locked Users MP Notifications e Data Storage General Security 1a Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs H Projects Report Management Errors Reports P 6 1 2011 12 34PM oy Backup Processing Logs PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 87 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Current Sessions As users log into PaperVision Enterprise not the Administration Console a session is started Every time a user accesses the server PaperVision Enterprise
142. consume characters that is after a match occurs the search for the next match begins immediately following the last match not after the characters that comprised the lookahead xly Matches either x or y WoW For example z food matches z or food z f ood matches zood or food PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 360 a Appendix F Regular Expressions xyz A character set matches any one of the enclosed characters For example abc matches the a in plain xyz A negative character set matches any character not enclosed For example abc matches the p in plain a z A range of characters matches any character in the specified range For example a z matches any lowercase alphabetic character in the range a through z a z A negative range characters matches any character not in the specified range For example a z matches any character not in the range a through z b Matches a word boundary that is the position between a word and a space For example er b matches the er in never but not the er in verb Matches a nonword boundary er B matches the er in verb but not the er in never cx Matches the control character indicated by x For example cM matches a Control M or carriage return character The value of x must be in the range o
143. contains multiple pages the PVFULLTEXT file should use the Form Feed character ASCII character 12 to separate pages within the document Global administrators can require that a marker file called dirmgr submit be required in the job s path before the system will import any of the files by setting this option in the Global System Settings Data screen Directory manager jobs can also process PaperVision Enterprise Package Files which are compressed and optionally encrypted files that contain all of the files in the appropriate directory structure for the directory manager job and include a file extension of PVPKG Package files are particularly useful when you wish to transport files to be processed by directory manager but need to provide added security through encryption or increase file transfer speeds by transferring one large file rather than hundreds or thousands of small files Package files use compression that is 100 compatible with the existing PK Zip 2 04g format and optional WinZip 9 0 AES encryption As such package files can be created using most popular Zip compression tools However the PaperVision Enterprise Data Transfer Manager can be used to completely automate the creation and transport of package files PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 178 W Chapter 5 Project Administration In order to be processed by a directory manager job package files must include
144. cryption and Decryption earlier in this chapter for additional information Inter Process Communications Pass Phrase When automated external applications such as PaperVision Enterprise Message Capture Server connect to retrieve information i e Message Capture Policies this provides the mechanism for authentication of the remote application Entity Security Policy Account Lockout Settings The entity s Account Lockout settings allow you to determine whether accounts should be locked out or if they should lock out after a certain number of unsuccessful login attempts PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 115 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Entity Security Policy Authentication Passwords C Accounts never lockout Accounts lockout after 2 invalid attempts Reset locked accounts after jo minutes Tl Clear lockout counters after minutes Entity Security Policy Account Lockout Accounts never lockout Regardless of the number of unsuccessful login attempts the user account is never locked out Accounts lockout after X invalid attempts When a user attempts to log in X consecutive times with an invalid password without logging in successfully PaperVision Enterprise will automatically lock out that account Reset locked accounts after X minutes When an account has been locked out the account will automatically unlock after your specified nu
145. cs Policy 1 Active 2011 06 21 09 28 05 ADMIN H lt Default Company 1 83 AR Outdated Docs Policy 1 Superseded 2011 06 21 09 25 33 ADMIN E Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets gE Migration Jobs 4 Projects B FE Accounts Receivable ga Enhanced Auditing Document Associations D Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions a Security Access amp Directory Manager Jobs ig Records Destruction Lists Ea Records Retention Policy Sets oe Report Management Jobs a WorkFlow Definitions ic Sample Accounting Docs Report Management Errors Reports ADMIN 6 21 2011 1 52PM og Records Retention Policy Sets PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 193 a Chapter 6 Records Retention 2 Click the New icon The New Records Retention Policy Set General dialog box appears E New Records Retention Policy Set General Policies Policy Set Name I Comments Clear Nothing Cancel New Records Retention Policy Set General 3 Enter a name for the new policy set 4 Enter any comments as desired 5 To have document destruction or lock information cleared select the desired Clear setting e Nothing specifies that no destruction or retention information should be cleared e Destruction Information specifies that all destruction dates destruction information a
146. d information embedded within files File Preamble Discard Quantity to Discard Input files often have header information that should be stripped prior to processing These options allow you to specify how many lines words or characters should be stripped from the beginning of each file prior to processing File Preamble Insert Spaces Some instances require that spaces be inserted in order for the remainder of the data to line up properly This option allows you to specify how many blank spaces should be inserted at the beginning of each file s data PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 241 a Chapter 9 Report Management Character Replacement The Character Replacement File setting allows you to replace or remove any unwanted characters from the raw input block prior to any processing The Character Replacements dialog box lists any defined character replacements that have been configured To add or edit character replacements 1 In the File tab click the Configure button in the Character Replacement section The Character Replacements dialog box appears Character Replacements m Defined Character Replacements From ASCII From Decimal From Hes ToASCII To Decimal To Hex 0 48 Discard Discard Discard i Edit Remove OK Cancel Character Replacements PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 242
147. d Import Paths Submit This operation checks all of the items in the Monitored Import Paths list that have a Workstation value that matches the computer s name If any data groups are found in those paths they are submitted to be imported This is designed to minimize the network and storage system impact imposed by having a large number of automation servers searching paths for data groups to import PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 63 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Records Retention This operation processes the active records retention policy set for each project of each entity by properly applying the retention lock date time and or destruction deletion date time to the appropriate documents If a policy set exists for a project the document destruction deletion date times will be evaluated against the current date time deleting the appropriate documents which are not marked for retention locked Report Archiving This operation will automatically archive the Document Access and System Operations reports All entries from these reports will be archived unless the Leave the last X entries in the system value is set It will also archive the Import Log entries All entries older than the value specified in Leave entries for the last X hours in the system will be archived Report Management This operation processes the configured active Report Management jobs Sessi
148. d that this value be specified PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 49 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Client Ping Increment If during user login a client application specifies that it is capable of pinging the server the server will instruct the client application to send a keep alive ping at this specified interval This background ping is used to verify that the client application is still opened If a client has not sent the expected ping within the 20 seconds of the specified ping interval the session will be automatically terminated Ping validation is useful in freeing up licenses used by applications that were closed without logging out the user Without pinging the session will not terminate until the session times out Note Some mobile browsers do not support background operations as a result the Client Ping Increment setting is not applicable to iPad devices If you are using an iPad or Android device the length of your session depends on the Max Session Idle Time value the system administrator assigned for the entity PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 50 W Chapter 2 Global Administration System Settings Data Data settings allow you to configure data processing data size Report Management and log archiving options EE System Settings Replication Email Notifications Local
149. data groups e COLDGRP DAT for DataFlow data groups e CDSTAMP MDB for Docu ROM data groups e PROJECT MDB for ScanTRAX data groups e CARFILE TXT for C A R data e DATAGRP XML for XML data groups e ERMGROUP XML for Report Management data groups e MSGGROUP XML for Message Capture data groups e PVPKG for PaperVision Package Files The file does not have to exist in the root of the monitored import path In fact it can be placed in any location below the monitored import path If one of these files exists the automation service imports the data group For this reason it is recommended that these files be copied or FTP d etc absolutely last rather than copying the data group file and then all of the supporting image or document files Furthermore you will need to take care that the automation service does not begin to import a data group before the file is completely transmitted For instance if you are FTP ing the data group to a monitored import path you should send all of the supporting image and document files then send the file but name it something else e g DATAGRP TMP After the file is completely transferred rename the DATAGRP TMP file back to its original name At this point the automation service will start to process the new data group PaperVision Enterprise provides an easy way around this issue for automated imports of XML data groups Report Management Data Groups and PaperVision Enterprise Pac
150. de 55 a Chapter 2 Global Administration FE System Settings General Data iF Email Notifications Local m Replication Destination Path s Add Delete m Replication Journal Entry Path s Server Journal Entry Path Edit Delete System Settings Replication Replication Destination Path s When the replication process takes place on the PaperVision Enterprise automation server files are replicated to these specified locations Note It is highly recommended to specify UNC paths and ensure that the service account used on the automation server has full read write access to the shares PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 56 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Replication Journal Entry Path s Each server that will perform any operation that requires a replication journal entry will need a specified Replication Journal Entry Path Note It is highly recommended to specify UNC paths and ensure that the service account used on the automation server that will perform the replications has full read write access to the shares This location does not need to be unique to each server However using separate local shares on each server will not lose replication data if the server holding the replication journals becomes unavailable PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Gu
151. dentify the key 4 Select the Key Type which identifies the type of encryption that will be used for this key PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 110 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration 5 Enter the Pass Phrase that will be used to generate the key 6 Optionally provide a general description of the key 7 Click OK to save the new encryption key Editing an Existing Encryption Key In order to prevent any previously encrypted data from becoming unreadable only the description of the encryption key can be modified Note IIS must be restarted after the encryption key has been edited or changed to ensure the Browser Based Viewer will read all file types correctly To edit an existing encryption key 1 Inthe Encryption Keys screen select the appropriate encryption key and then click the Properties 8 icon 2 Inthe Encryption Key Properties dialog box make the necessary modifications to the description and then click OK The modifications will take effect the next time a process loads the key values Deleting Encryption Keys Important Data that has been encrypted with an encryption key becomes unreadable if that encryption key is deleted To delete existing encryption keys 1 Inthe Encryption Keys screen select one or more encryption keys 2 Click the Delete icon Note Any encrypted data using the key s will become inaccess
152. dicate a portion of the application screen s title e g you can specify Notepad for an application screen title of Test txt Notepad You can select lt Any Window Title gt to have the system process the trigger for any running window which is effective for applications that do not contain a constant value in their window titles PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 221 W Chapter 8 Integration Definitions Hotkey Setup This setting specifies the hot key sequence that must be pressed to trigger the integration Send Keys Configuration This setting allows you to define the keystroke sequence used in the Trigger on Hotkey Send Keys for Clipboard method Index Field Criteria This setting allows you to configure the index field search criteria based on the data extracted from the third party application Search Type This setting specifies the search type AND or OR that is used when multiple index fields are being searched Sort By This setting specifies how the search results are sorted Display Selection This setting specifies what is displayed once the search has been executed e Search Results Displays the results of the search e First Document Displays the first document located that meets the search criteria PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 222 Chapter 8 Integration Definitions Creating a N
153. document break fields this values specifies the number of pages after the current page that will be appended into the current document before a new document is started A value of zero indicates that the current page is the last page of the document Field Validation Regular Expression Once the field data has been extracted it can be compared with this sequence to verify that the located value is valid Case Sensitive If this setting is enabled the regular expression is to be treated as case sensitive Field Location Relative to Region These values specify the left top width and height of the column line range that the field value is extracted from The location can be configured explicitly in this screen or drawn graphically using the mouse If a field is located on multiple lines the lines are combined with spaces between their values PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 269 a Chapter 9 Report Management Test Execution The Test Execution operation performs a real world test of the job configuration displaying the resulting output complete with document index values Note Only the first file set s documents will appear up to 20 000 documents from that file set Test Execution Results mfx fa a B bh Helea 2 FMT 91 REPLACEMENT OF PRIOR CLAIM 12 01 1139 PATODAMOD OK Geet E DSIFLOWCOM REGIOHAL HOSP 123 ANYSTREET AVENUE PO BOX 123
154. e lt Default Company gt User Name Global Administrator Project lt NZ amp Entire Data Group gt Documents Entire Data Group OO0000002 000000001 Submitted 2011 05 31 13 26 00 Finished lt Not Run gt New Data Group 0o01 0001 New Project KNA Entire Data Group gt Max Size MB 600 Run Job Migration Job Properties Enter the new Name of the migration job Enter the New Data Group name Enter the name of the New Project that will be created DY ee Enter the Max Size MB of the new migration data group When the maximum size is reached a new data group will automatically be created incrementing the data group name 7 Click Run Job to perform the migration PaperVision Enterprise will extract the requested documents and perform the migration making no changes to the documents in the repository Once the migration is completed a notification will be sent to the global and entity administrators as well as the submitting user to notify them that the migration job has been completed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 130 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Deleting Migration Jobs When migration jobs are run they are not automatically deleted in case they need to be run again They must be explicitly deleted by the submitting user or the administrator To delete a migration job 1 Inthe Migration Jobs screen select one or more migra
155. e individual sequences To add or edit text sequences 1 In the File tab click the Configure button in the Text Removal Sequence Raw Buffer section The Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer dialog box appears Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer m Defined Text Sequences Regular Expression Text Sequence Add Edit Remove Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer 2 Click Add or Edit The Raw Buffer Text Sequence Removal Definition dialog box appears Raw Buffer Text Sequence Removal Definition fx Regular Expression canei Raw Buffer Text Sequence Removal Definition 3 Enter the regular expression and then click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 244 a Chapter 9 Report Management Line Settings Line settings allow you to configure the line delimiter type and line pre and post processing parameters New Report Management Job General File iL Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Line Delimiter Type CR LF 13 10 or x0D x04 Fixed Line Width po Line Pre Processing Leading Characters to Remove fo Leading Spaces to Insert fo m Line Post Processing Leading Characters to Remove fo Leading Spaces to Insert fo Maximum Line Width fo mee New Report Management Job Line Settings PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 245 a Chapter
156. e Path and always removes the package file from its original location regardless of job s Delete original files after successful import setting PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 179 Creating a New Directory Manager Job To create a new directory manager job 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Directory Manager Jobs The Directory Manager Jobs screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Ex Action Help Bale 5 Entities lt Default Company 1 Network Photocopier Active iledsil genera DM_Inbounds lt ANY gt Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage General Security a Message Capture Policy Sets a Migration Jobs Projects i 2 1B Accounts Receivable Enhanced Auditing Document Associations RA Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions a Security Access i Records Destruction Lists EB Records Retention Policy Sets amp Report Management Jobs a WorkFlow Definitions 1171372009 4 06PM 4 Directory Manager Jobs PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 180 a Chapter 5 Project Administration ab 2 Click the New icon The New Directory Manager Job dialog box appears New Directory Manager Job Job Name Path o m Workstation Any Specific ADGVIRXP m Minimum Modified Date C Disabled Enabled 1900 01 01 00 00 00
157. e Priority e Message Sensitivity e Message Importance e Message Source e Message Envelope Journaled e Classification e Capture Policy e Capture Date Time PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 202 a Chapter 7 Message Capture During the import process if some or all of the index fields do not exist within the project those index fields will simply be skipped The fields can be added at a later date and the file set re imported to populate the fields Additionally not every email message will contain all of the specified index fields Note The Subject field is always truncated to a maximum of 900 characters due to a Microsoft SQL Server limitation of 900 bytes characters in a database index Message Capture Policy Sets A policy set is used by a message capture agent to determine which messages should be retained and how those messages should be retained There can only be one active policy set at a time As such each time a policy set is saved the newly saved policy set is activated and any existing policy sets are superseded This maintains a fully auditable list of policy sets Each file set references the policy set name and policy set ID that was used to capture the messages contained within it The policy set includes file set options i e encryption and compression settings as well as one or more policies Each policy within the policy set is evaluated in t
158. e Replication This operation performs the replication for any journal entries in all of the Replication Journal Entry Paths to all of the specified Replication Destination Paths PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 62 o Chapter 2 Global Administration Full Text Index Compression When documents or data groups are deleted that have data in the full text database their information is also deleted from the full text database When that information is removed however the disk space used by those documents in the full text database is not recovered This operation compresses the full text database indexes regaining the lost space Note It is not recommended to perform this operation regularly as it places a significant processing load on the server Full Text Replication This operation automatically replicates all full text databases to all specified Replication Destination Paths Import Queue This operation imports data groups listed in the Import Queue that have a Workstation value that matches the computer s name Maintenance Queue This operation processes any maintenance jobs listed in the Maintenance Queue Monitored Import Paths This operation checks all of the items in the Monitored Import Paths list that have a Workstation value that matches the computer s name If any data groups are found in those paths they are automatically imported Monitore
159. e appropriate policy set 2 Click the Export icon 3 In the Export Message Capture Policy Set dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 4 Enter the file name for the export 5 Click Save A message will notify you where the export was written Importing a Message Capture Policy Set PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to import a message capture policy set that was created by exporting the policy set The import process will import the entire configuration To import a message capture policy set 1 Inthe Message Capture Policy Sets screen click the Import icon 2 Select the XML file and then click Open 3 Click OK The imported message capture policy set will become the active policy set PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 219 Chapter 8 Integration Definitions In addition to the extensive API and customization capabilities PaperVision Enterprise s Integration Definitions can document enable any Windows based application eliminating the need for administrators to write additional code or use APIs Integration Definitions are project level definitions that allow administrators to configure what triggers PaperVision Enterprise to launch which data to extract when calling the third party application which index field values to search and what to do with the search results i e display a document When a user logs into the PaperVisi
160. e been idle for too long e Removes document grants that have expired e Runs automated WorkFlow workstep instances e Processes any workstep instances that have exceeded their Maximum Time restrictions e Imports data groups e Deletes data groups e Takes storage utilization snapshots e Compresses the full text database This service can be installed on either a single computer or on multiple computers Each of the operations can be handled by multiple servers i e have multiple servers importing data groups or processing automated workstep instances Additionally the service supports the execution of multiple automation service processes on a single computer In this scenario each automation server process is specified in the MACHINENAME INSTANCE format With this feature you can schedule one or multiple automated operations per server or instance You can modify the number of automation services that can be run simultaneously by launching the PaperVision Configuration Utility and changing the value in the Simultaneous Processes field For more information on the PaperVision Configuration Utility see the accompanying PaperVision Enterprise Installation and Getting Started Guide PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 345 Appendix C System Architecture Web vs Application Servers This section explains the difference between web servers and application servers e Web Servers provide
161. e file set limits message encryption key type and whether to compress messages and process imports through the full text indexing engine El New Message Capture Policy Set Max Messages per File Set 10000 Max File Set Size MB 100 Max Inactive Minutes 240 Message Encryption Key lt No Encryption gt hd Compress Messages E Full Text Import E mee Message Capture Policy Set File Set Options Max Messages per File Set When the agent has inserted the specified number of messages into the file set a new file set is created Max File Set Size MB If the file set reaches the specified maximum size a new file set is created Max Inactive Minutes If the agent sits idle waiting for new messages past this number of minutes a new file set is created PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 205 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Message Encryption Key This setting specifies the encryption key to be used to encrypt messages as they are stored in the file set Compress Messages This setting specifies that messages are to be compressed prior to being saved to the file set Full Text Import This setting instructs the import procedure to process the messages through the PaperVision Enterprise full text indexing engine for full text search capabilities PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 206 w Chapter
162. e icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 80 Entity administration can be performed by global administrators and system entity administrators Entity WorkFlow administrators can perform administrative functions specifically related to WorkFlow e g configure WorkFlow definitions for any project and view WorkFlow history and WorkFlow status reports To view the settings available for configuration within an entity expand the Entities folder and then select the appropriate entity from the list PaperVision Administration Console E mfx Entities Ga Backup Processing Set 4 lt Default Company gt 1 E Current Activity H Backup Processing Data Storage e Current Activity Ya General Security Data Storage g Message Capture Policy Sets H General Security Migration Jobs G Message Capture Policy Sets Projects gf Migration Jobs Report Management Errors E Projects 42 Reports A Report Management Errors eA Reports 1171972009 1 42PM_ 4 Entity Administration PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 81 4 Chapter 4 Entity Administration Backup Jobs PaperVision Enterprise allows administrators to specify that certain information should be periodically backed up This backup process consists of creating a package file which contains the information that needs to be backed up The
163. e income review stage of processing If you would like to review your loan application simply select the link below https login imagesilo com DocGrant ASP GrantID A BEFKJDEWEFJ Your password to access the document is AppleCore Best Regards ABC Loan Company PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 296 iz Chapter 10 WorkFlow WorkFlow Definitions PaperVision s Enterprise WorkFlow allows administrators to define WorkFlows graphically without any programming or scripting Before defining your WorkFlows ensure that the user groups who will act as workstep participants have already been created in General Security To view the WorkFlow Definitions for a specific project select Projects gt Project Name gt WorkFlow Definitions PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Eaka FE lt Default Company 1 Name Active 6 Backup Processing AR WORKFLOW Active Current Activity g Data Storage General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets ge Migration Jobs Projects E Accounts Receivable B Enhanced Auditing A Document Associations D Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions a Security Access amp Directory Manager Jobs 5 Records Destruction Lists EB Records Retention Policy Sets Oe Report Management Jobs WorkFlow Definitions 11 10 2009 10 43 AM 4 WorkFlow Definitions Note WorkFlow Administrators do not have access to doc
164. e is passed all checks are performed The CheckType value can contain multiple checks by using a binary or operation i e PVESystemHealth ASPX CheckType 7 performs all checks PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 377 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions To define the list of document stores directories create a file called CHECK DIR in the C Program Files Digitech Systems Common Files directory Enter the full path to the directory that you want to verify one path per line Below is a sample CHECK DIR file storage1 pvdmstore storage2 pvdmstore Z document storage directory Q How can I ensure the Add New Documents and Scan New operations are available for use in the PVESearchURL aspx page even when no results are returned by the original query A To ensure these operations are available for use when you execute searches via PVESearchURL aspx the ResultsType List parameter must be included in your URL If the ResultsType Docs parameter is used the Add New Documents and Scan New operations will not be available if no results are returned Q Is there any way to disable the use of the Browser Based Viewer option for my users and force them to continue to use the ActiveX plugin A With the PaperVision Enterprise R75 release the Document Display Method has been changed to allow users to view documents using the Browser Based Viewer instead of having to install the
165. e or a backreference If n is preceded by at least n captured subexpressions n is a backreference Otherwise n is an octal escape value ifn is an octal digit 0 7 nm Identifies either an octal escape value or a backreference If nm is preceded by at least nm captured subexpressions nm is a backreference If nm is preceded by at least n captures n is a backreference followed by literal m If neither of the preceding conditions exist nm matches octal escape value nm when n and m are octal digits 0 7 nml Matches octal escape value nml when n is an octal digit 0 3 and m and are octal digits 0 7 un Matches n where n is a Unicode character expressed as four hexadecimal digits For example u00A9 matches the copyright symbol PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 362 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions This section provides supplemental information on certain features of PaperVision Enterprise Q When are idle user sessions killed logged out from PaperVision Enterprise and PaperVision net Enterprise A PaperVision includes two mechanisms to enforce the Max Session Idle Time configured in the System Settings e Ifthe Session Grant Cleanup as defined in the System Settings is enabled the PaperVision Automation Service will automatically remove old sessions e Whenever a user logs into PaperVision Enterprise all user sessions that ha
166. e text left and top values by selecting the red alignment tool in the top left corner of the text with your mouse You can adjust the text line height by using your mouse to increase or decrease the distance between the two green line height adjustment tools located to right of the text alignment tool You can resize the blank form s width and height by moving the blue image width and height adjustment tools located to the right and bottom of the image You can navigate through the documents and pages by clicking the appropriate toolbar buttons selecting the corresponding menu items or using hot keys You can also select specific documents by double clicking on the document in the list PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 275 w Chapter 9 Report Management Setup Overlay Operations fal Home Displays the first page of the current document Displays the last page of the current document Displays the first page of the first document Ctrl Page Up Displays the first page of the previous document Ctrl Page Down Displays the first page of the next document Ctrl End Displays the first page of the last document S Reverts the displayed form back to the original form as it was when you first selected the Setup Overlay button PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 276 w Chapter 9 Report Management Modifying Overlay Text Display Pro
167. e web All of the functionality contained in the PaperVision Administration Console is also available through PaperVision s COM DLLs ActiveX Controls OCX PaperVision includes a number of OCX controls that can be embedded into any application capable of working with ActiveX OCX s PaperVision s OCX s include a document viewing control search criteria control WorkFlow viewing control and WorkFlow definition control PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 351 H Appendix D Customization and Integration Source Code PaperVision Enterprise PaperVision Enterprise includes full source code for the PaperVision Enterprise application source code is not provided for PaperVision APIs Rather than offer sample applications that only provide a glimpse into how to utilize the APIs Digitech Systems feels it is necessary to show you how we use the APIs This allows you to make modifications or additions to the PaperVision Enterprise application or to see how Digitech Systems does it so you can implement similar functionality into your own applications PaperVision Enterprise Web The PaperVision Enterprise Web is comprised of a series of ASPX and ASP pages ASP pages are kept for backwards compatibility These provide significant insight into utilizing the PaperVision APIs in a web server application or browser based environment PaperVision Enterprise Web also includes a file called
168. e when a user retrieves a document 1 The PaperVision Enterprise server caches the first page of that document to a temporary location and then passes that information to the PaperVision Enterprise document viewer 2 The PaperVision Enterprise document viewer retrieves the file from the temporary location on the server and stores it in a temporary location on the client machine 3 The PaperVision Enterprise document viewer notifies the PaperVision Enterprise server that the cached file can be removed 4 The PaperVision Enterprise server removes the cached file Steps 1 through 4 are repeated for any additional documents or pages 6 When the PaperVision Enterprise document viewer is closed it clears out the cached files on the local machine What is the PVESystemHealth ASPX page that gets installed when I install PaperVision net Enterprise The PVESystemHealth ASPX page is designed to verify the following information e The web server itself is working correctly and properly executing ASPX scripts always on e The primary system database is accessible by the web application server CheckType 1 e All of the databases for all of the entities are writable by the web application server CheckType 2 e A user defined list of document stores is accessible by the server CheckType 4 When accessing the PVESystemHealth ASPX you can pass the CheckType value to specify which checks you wish to perform If no CheckType valu
169. eceive notifications in one of three manners e Publish Notification Notifications are published into the PaperVision Enterprise database and accessed via the Administration Console or a PaperVision Enterprise client application e Send Email Notifications are sent via email to the user s email address e Publish Notification and Send Email Both of the previous options are used for each notification Entity Properties Import Import settings allow you to configure how data groups are imported into PaperVision Enterprise i lt Default Company gt 1 Properties General Contacts Notification Display m Default Imported Data Group State Read Only C Read write Files can be Deleted V Load COLD data and External documents into full text engine V Keep data group database archives after import m Default Import Type Append Full Reload T Delete Orphaned Documents J Apply object changes during reload CA new object version fastest but uses more database space As existing object version retain annotations m Default Import Copy Settings Copy data groups during import Delete source data group after copy Entity Properties Import PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 72 a Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Default Imported Data Group State This setting determines whether an imported data group will be marked as read
170. ect one or more policy sets 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Exporting a Records Retention Policy Set PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to export policy sets The export creates an XML document describing the policy set so it can be imported into another PaperVision Enterprise system Each of the policy set properties is included in the XML document To export a policy set 1 Inthe Records Retention Policy Sets screen select the appropriate policy set 2 Click the Export icon In the Export Records Retention Policy Set dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 4 Enter the file name for the export Click Save A message will notify you where the export was written PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 197 W Chapter 6 Records Retention Editing an Existing Records Retention Policy Set When you edit or save a policy set the original policy set is not overwritten it is superseded by the newly saved policy set This is designed to provide an auditable list of policy sets To edit an existing policy set 1 Inthe Records Retention Policy Sets screen select the appropriate policy set 2 Click the Properties 8 icon 3 Make the necessary modifications to the policy set properties For descriptions of each policy setting see the section on Records Retention Policies 4 To clear document destruction or
171. ed Ignore No Action The code is defined but no action is to be taken when encountered Move to Line Moves to the line number specified in the Value property and then outputs the remainder of the input line If the specified line number is below the current line of the page it simply moves to the specified line of the current page However if the specified line number is above the current line of the page a new page is created and then it moves to the specified line of the new page to output Vertical Space Inserts the number of vertical spaces carriage return line feed as specified by the Value property before writing out the remainder of the input line End Page Then Move to Line Immediately writes out the remainder of the input line to the current page then creates a new page and moves to the line number specified by the Value property e Value Specifies the value used for the particular Action taken ASA ANSI with Channel Commands This page detection method provides a set of 16 codes used for line printers Each code dictates the carriage control line movement PRIOR to writing to output the remainder of the line When the remainder of the line is written the carriage control remains on the current output line does NOT automatically go to a new output line The first four codes are Static e plus sign Does not move the carriage control Simply outputs the remainder of the input line Effectively combines the cur
172. ed the word Filtered will appear at the bottom of the screen Rolling Back a File Set You can roll back a file set to have the file set s data removed from the system making its data no longer available for retrieval Additionally if the file set is in a Read Write data group its files will be removed from the data group To roll back a file set 1 From the Message Capture File Sets screen select one or more file sets 2 Click the Roll Back icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the roll back and complete the operation PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 142 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Exporting File Set Information You can export file set information into an XML file for further analysis To export file set information 1 From the Message Capture File Sets screen select one or more file sets 2 Click the Export icon Select Yes to confirm the export 4 In the Export File Set Entries dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written Enter the file name for the export 6 Click Save A message will notify you where the export was written Viewing File Set Properties To view file set properties 1 Inthe Message Capture File Sets screen select the appropriate file set 2 Click the Properties icon The Message Capture File Set Properties dialog box appears IE Message Capture File Set Properties Start Time 2008 05 2
173. ed they will be truncated to 255 characters since migration databases do not support this field type 9 Ifthe selected index field type allows formatting select the format in which to display the index field s data Boolean Currency Date and Double Number field types support custom field formats To create a new custom field format type directly in the Field Format combo box e You must enter custom Boolean field formats with a slash mark forward slash between the two options Boolean values e g True False are represented as positive negative values So the server passes True positive False negative values as True 0 False e Valid currency symbols include the Dollar Pound Euro Comma Period etc 10 Under normal circumstances PaperVision Enterprise requires the user to manually add any wildcard characters to search criteria Select an Automatically Add Wildcards value which causes PaperVision Enterprise to automatically add wildcard characters in the designated position of the field if it is used during a search 11 PaperVision Enterprise can optionally limit or provide suggestions for index field values during searching manually adding new documents and altering document index fields e To force the user to select a value from a specific list of possible values select Users must select Index Field Values from list e To allow users to select from a pre defined list o
174. ed to be unique nor do they need to be unique amongst multiple entities However when PaperVision Enterprise takes a storage utilization snapshot it will evaluate the size of the entire contents of the Data Group Batch and Full Text Paths separately If any of these paths are identical incorrect utilization calculations may result as the contents of the same directory are evaluated multiple times PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 70 ee Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Entity Properties Contacts Notification You can specify the technical and billing contacts for the entity and select the method in which notifications are sent to users tt lt Default Company gt 1 Properties General Contacts Notification Import Display gt Technical Contact Name Phone Email r Billing Contact Name FO O O O Phone P Email CO m Notification Method Publish Notification Send Email Publish Notification and Send Email Entity Properties Contacts Notification Technical and Billing Contacts Name Phone and Email For informational purposes only you can enter the technical and billing contacts names phone numbers and email addresses for this entity PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 71 wW Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Notification Method Users can r
175. edule Next Run Time 5 Entities ig AP FullText Backup Backup Full Text No Schedule Run 2011 05 31 13 23 FE lt Default Company gt 1 DG 000000001 000000003 Backup Data Group Full No Schedule Run 2011 06 01 10 26 Backup Processing tga DG 000000001 000000004 Backup Data Group Full No Schedule Run 2011 06 01 10 26 ta Backup Jobs g Processing Logs Current Activity Data Storage General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets g6 Migration Jobs H E Projects Report Management Errors Reports gt 6 1 2011 10 28 AM a Backup Jobs PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 83 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration 2 Click the New icon The New Backup Job General screen appears T New Backup Job General Schedule Job Name Backup Type Backup Project s Full v m Projects to Backup C Human Resources C Sales m Package File Max Package Contents MB i00 m Package File Encryption Key lt No Encryption Used gt v New Backup Job General Enter the Job Name Select the Backup Type Select the Projects to Backup OV aN ee gt Enter the Max Package Contents MB This value specifies the maximum size in MB of the content data that is placed into a backup package when performing a project level backup Once this size is reached a new package file will be created Note Th
176. eee eeceeeceeeeecneeeeceeeeteaetateeeeneeeres 25 deleting items sisine aikins 26 viewing properties se ceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 26 import settings data OroupS ii eini 71 importing data groups eneret 98 document associations 159 Integration Definitions ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 230 Message Capture Policy Sets cesses 219 Records Retention policy sets cecee 197 Report Management jobs sses 287 DE 55563 E A 125 WorkFlow definitions seeeeeeeeeeeereeee 325 index values denion seine a ews 10 info files Report Management eee 232 installation and configuration 9 Integration Definitions CCGG cisterns since 223 29 Ge let sss nsiescastees itera veces 229 Editing peeso aina wis EE EEEa 229 EXPOMING diorenn EEEE EEEE 229 TMP OPH keiseren aneren E EEEE Eae 230 WMO CUCHON siae 220 SCUUINOS aaa E 220 22 J jobs O E E es eats Sa 126 K key sequences adding Integration Definitions 00 225 key sequences Integration Definitions 226 keystrokes inserting delays between Integration Definitions jeier 226 L Lauch Application Shell workstep task type 314 licensiera cio wshactiectisused Risin aise 6 15 locked USCIS eeesseeeseceeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeseeateneeneeeres 89 NO gatas igiene ceiien oia aeee stceshesteadieusss 60 POS EINE Weds essescedendnsbincenasscassanegneasansssnesdaccterses 12 LOGGING OU eee eee ceeeteceeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeaetaeeeeeaeeeees 1
177. ems and it will include the word Filtered if the results have a filter applied PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 98 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Importing a Data Group When a data group is imported with the exception of C A R data groups PaperVision Enterprise checks whether the necessary projects already exist and creates them if they are not present The system then compares the index field names in the data group with the index field names in the existing PaperVision Enterprise project For example the following PaperVision Enterprise project fields already exist e Account Number e Customer Name e Invoice Date The following Data Group fields are imported into PaperVision Enterprise e Customer Name will be populated into the second index field in the existing Customer Name project e Account Number will be populated into the first index field in the existing Account Number project e PO Number will be ignored since this field does not exist but could be added manually in the existing project Since the data group does not contain an Invoice Date field it will be populated with an invoice date value of Blank Note When PaperVision Enterprise imports PaperFlow data groups whose projects contain the tilde character PaperVision Enterprise only recognizes the portion of the project name to the left of the tilde This procedure allows
178. en click OK The system displays the Login prompt once again PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 14 Chapter 2 Global Administration Global administration functions encompass functionality that affect the PaperVision Enterprise system as a whole separate from individual entities All global administration can only be performed by a global administrator To view the global administration settings log into the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console with the appropriate global administrator credentials and select the Global check box Once logged in as a global administrator you can view global administration settings for all entities To view the global administration settings in the Administration Console expand the Global Administration directory PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Automation Service Status By Automation Service Status k Deletion Queue DA Deletion Queue A Email Queue Ksi Global Administrators Import Licensing ef Maintenance ef Maintenance SE Migration Jobs SE Migration Jobs gt Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors A Report Management Errors System Settings Ral System Settings H Entities 12 11 2009 10 16 AM A Global Administration The following global administration settings can be configured in PaperVision Enterprise e Automation Service Status displays
179. ence Guide 199 a Chapter 6 Records Retention Cleaning Up Records Destruction Lists To cleanup records destruction lists 1 In the Records Destruction Lists screen select one or more items 2 Click the Cleanup Lists icon 3 Click Yes to confirm and perform the cleanup Each list s document count will be recalculated and any empty lists will automatically be deleted PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 200 Chapter 7 Message Capture PaperVision Enterprise s Message Capture allows organizations to process and archive email messages through the PaperVision Enterprise system When coupled with PaperVision Enterprise WorkFlow it can provide comprehensive customer service solutions Message Capture can process email messages from Microsoft Exchange as well as most Linux Unix email systems Message Capture policies are configured in the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console The policies can be executed enforced by the PaperVision Message Manager agents e PaperVision Message Capture Harvester This stand alone desktop application can process messages directly from Outlook PST files or Exchange mailboxes Harvester never removes messages from the PST files or Exchange mailboxes e PaperVision Message Capture Server This Windows service processes messages from directories containing journaled messages Any messages that exist in the monitored directories are rem
180. ended with the letter T n e PaperVision Enterprise allows you to utilize the underscore _ wildcard to specify a single unknown character For example searching for S_N would locate SON but it would not locate SOON Additionally searching for _ would locate any non blank value e PaperVision Enterprise allows you to search for a single character within a range or list by using the bracket characters For example searching for A 456 TEST would locate AATEST ASTEST and A6TEST The same result occurs from searching for A 4 6 TEST You can also utilize letters within the brackets to search for a range or list of letters e g a f e You can perform multiple searches within a single index field by using and amp and or operators To perform a search on a name field for names that begin with an A or Z you could simply enter A Z To perform a search on a name field for names that begin with A and end with P you could enter A P e To search for a document whose index field contains an ampersand simply use two ampersands in your search For example to find Johnson amp Johnson you would search for Johnson amp amp Johnson PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 356 E Appendix E Search Criteria e You can perform searches on multiple fields at once Simply enter the search criteria into the desired fields and select the appropriate
181. ent Job Form Overlays dialog box appears New Report Management Job eesenenssessssssnsenssessnsenseen General Fie Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Form Overlays Overlay Name Page Range Criteria Add Edt Remove New Report Management Job Form Overlays Settings 15 Configure the Form Overlays settings as desired For descriptions of each setting see the section on Form Overlays 16 Click Save PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 285 mz Chapter 9 Report Management Editing an Existing Report Management Job Any modifications that you make in a report management job will take effect immediately upon saving the job To edit an existing report management job 1 Inthe Report Management Jobs screen select the appropriate report management job and then click the Properties EJ icon The Report Management Job General tab appears 2 Make any necessary changes to the job 3 Click Save to update the report management job Deactivating a Report Management Job Deactivating a report management job simply prevents the job from running as an automated process You can easily reactivate a report management job by repeating this procedure and selecting the Active check box instead To deactivate a report management job 1 Inthe Report Management Jobs screen select the appropriate report management job a
182. ents eeeeeee 72 delete source data group after copy 0 73 delete source ON SUCCESS 52 force purged data group deletion 0 51 forcing copy and delete of imported 51 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 380 E os aoe eee eects eee 51 keep database archives after impott 72 max backup package content SiZe eee 52 max attachment data group size 52 max documents per file set ee leeeeeeeeeeeee 52 min import log entry age 53 purge data groups during entity deletion 51 require dirmgr submit files 51 require Submit file 00 eee ceeeeseesteeseeneeees 52 security log entries to retaiN ee eeeeteeeeee 53 data groups backing Upsiiscsces seiiieins aondhinaninniense 105 creating new attachment cesses 105 DataFlow COLD eee ceeecneeeceeeeeeeeeees 106 encryption Of seniai Wi ied hese ies 106 filten E onni eens ennai 97 IMPONE o e R a s 98 OE E E E 106 manually iMmporting essseeeseeseeseeseeeee eee 99 101 Message Capture iurc serieei 106 TOUS TAIN e ANa ROA EE 105 THO VUNG see scivenscaseesesanseeasecusbecrsjacrtvnienoeeresausneny 104 PULEING juices Gauche EE N 103 PVERM COLD iieiaeie 106 WOSIZAN P perre r E ENE 104 submitting for decryption esseeeeeee 107 submitting for encryption eseeeeeeee 106 data Storages rene areia ea EEEn 95 decrypting data group
183. eps e What signifies that a step is completed and ready for the next step Is there a decision that must be made to determine the next step decision routing Are there tasks that must be finished completion routing Are there document index criteria that must be met calculated value routing e What should initiate a new WorkFlow Are all documents coming into a project supposed to be processed or only specific documents Worksteps vs Tasks One point of confusion in defining WorkFlow definitions is determining whether an operation is simply a task in a workstep or whether it should be a separate workstep When you are designing WorkFlow definitions you can use the following guidelines e If operations must be completed in a specific order the operations should be separated into separate Worksteps since multiple tasks in a Workstep can be performed in any order e Ifthe operations must be completed by separate groups of users those operations need to be split into multiple Worksteps e If there is a benefit processing time cost etc for splitting multiple operations across multiple users you may want to consider separating them into separate Worksteps since only a single user can perform all of the tasks in a specific Workstep instance WorkFlow Engine In order to best optimize your WorkFlow definitions this section explains what occurs under the hood as the WorkFlow engine processes WorkFlow and Workstep instances
184. eria that you defined for the projects Document Associations can be viewed When you configure an index field or index value or wildcard for a Document Association the following search methods are used when the user executes the Document Association operation in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client e When you configure an index field the index value in the configured field for the current document will be used to search the index field configured in the associated project to find any documents with the same index value e When you configure an index value or a wildcard the index value configured in the Document Association will be used to search the index field configured in the associated project to find any documents with the same index value When entering date search criteria for a Document Association the CURRENTDATETIME tag can be used to represent the current date and time that the search is run This is particularly useful in situations where documents need to be identified that are of a certain age A specified number of years Y months M days D hours H minutes N or seconds S can be added to or subtracted from the current date and time Possible uses for the CURRENTDATETIME tag are as follows e CURRENTDATETIME Current Date Time e CURRENTDATETIME 1 Y Current Date Time plus 1 year e CURRENTDATETIME 12M Current Date Time minus 12 months e CURRENTDATETIME 2D Current Date Time plus 2 day
185. ersions through 6 0 Truevision Targa version 2 WBMP Windows Animated Cursor Windows Bitmap Windows Icon Cursor Windows Metafile version 3 WordPerfect Graphics 1 version 1 WordPerfect Graphics 2 version 2 and 7 WSQ a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions Note PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 365 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions Graphic rendering for AutoCAD Drawing R13 R14 and R15 files is supported Mail Formats Documentum EMCMF Domino XML Language includes support for non encrypted embedded files and embedded images in DXL files Legato Extender Lotus Notes Database versions 4 5 6 0 6 5 7 0 8 0 Mailbox MBX created by Eudora 6 2 and Thunderbird 1 0 Microsoft Entourage Database 2004 Microsoft Outlook DBX 5 0 and 6 0 Microsoft Outlook Express EML versions 5 Mac and 6 Windows Microsoft Outlook Message MSG versions 97 2000 2002 2003 2007 Text Mail MIME Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format Multimedia Formats Note Multimedia files are played using the Windows Media Control Interface Audio Interchange File Format AIFF Microsoft Wave Sound WAV MIDI MPEG 1 Audio layer 3 versions ID3 v1 and v2 MPEG 1 Video version 2 and 3 MPEG 2 Audio NeXT Sun Audio QuickTime Movie version 2 3 4 Windows Video AVI version 2 1 PDF Formats Adobe PDF versions through1 1 1 7
186. eseceseceseceecseeeseeseecaeeeseeesesseeeeesseenseceaeesaeceaecseecneeeeeeneeaes 347 Appendix D Customization and Integration cccccssssscsscsssscssssssssssssesssceeoees 351 PaperVision Enterprise APIS cssssssscsseesceseeecesecseesecaeesecnevseceaeeeeaecaeesecneeseesaeerceasentaeeas 351 DOULCS COG E E A E T E E vesdebes visndves vbesevesvocgivas sosdetes he 352 CUSTOM ZAU OI T stags coesatas cvstexd susdutes slesdens chegaeas tusw dead sdssuies Sleaiensoyeaneas suenleatoneanes he 352 Appendix E Search Criteria ccsccsscssscssscsscssscssccescsessessecssssssesscssssesssessseesoes 356 Appendix F Regular Expressions scsscssssscssscessssssscssscsssssscsssssscsssssssssenesenes 358 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions csscsssssssssscssscssssssssncssssssssssesesones 363 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide v Chapter 1 Introduction PaperVision Enterprise represents a new breed of software for managing corporate information of any kind and the flow of that information within your organization What is unique about PaperVision Enterprise is that it was designed to provide full features and functionality for any number of users from the single user workstation to literally an unlimited number of users Now that s a bold statement Unlimited Scalability When was the last time you heard that about any software product This is not
187. essing the scalability reliability and security needs of the largest of enterprises as well as Application Service Providers who are hosting PaperVision Enterprise for thousands of enterprises Scalability and Reliability PaperVision Enterprise uses a number of techniques in order to provide an unprecedented level of reliability and to allow PaperVision Enterprise to scale to an unlimited number of simultaneous users Load Balancing PaperVision Enterprise servers both web and application can sit behind load balancers with little if any configuration specific to PaperVision Enterprise In fact PaperVision Enterprise can also be used with Microsoft Windows built in NLB network load balancing Load balancing allows an application to run on multiple servers that share the load providing scalability and reliability The scalability comes from being able to run on multiple servers at the same time and share information amongst the servers If a server gets bogged down the other servers can take up the slack The reliability comes from the ability of a user to hit a different server if one goes down quite often without the user even knowing they were redirected to another server Now many applications can be load balanced across multiple servers PaperVision Enterprise is unique in the way that it handles its operations allowing it to be scaled to an unlimited number of servers Each new server can incrementally add more processing p
188. ession ID cannot be simply guessed to hijack another user s session Support for SSL and Non Standard Ports PaperVision Enterprise provides support for SSL secure socket layers and non standard ports at both the web server and the application server levels The use of SSL enables full encryption of ALL traffic including documents between the client applications and the servers and even if desired the web servers and the application servers The ability to use non standard ports allows administrators to host multiple web applications under a single IP address It also allows an administrator to make the communication between certain segments i e between the web server and the application server a little more obscure although we never advocate security through obscurity Function Level Verification Every call that is made to PaperVision Enterprise that has anything to do with your account or information is verified for security access This is even enforced at the lowest level APIs that are included with PaperVision Enterprise This ensures that a hacker could NOT write an application using the PaperVision APIs that could access your information Session Source Persistence PaperVision Enterprise offers administrators the ability to require all session activity to originate from the source of the original login This ensures that someone cannot take over your session to gain access to your documents When you log into PaperVision E
189. etting allows users to view and approve or deny scheduled document destruction lists for records retention View Folders This setting allows users to view all folders in the Folders tab Create Folders This setting allows users to create new folders in the Folders tab Delete Folders This setting allows users to delete folders in the Folders tab Rename Folders This setting allows users to rename folders in the Folders tab Move Folders This setting allows users to move folders in the Folders tab Move Docs into Folders This setting allows users to move documents into folders in the Folders tab Remove Docs from Folders This setting allows users to remove documents from folders in the Folders tab PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 165 Chapter 5 Project Administration View Signatures This setting allows users to view signatures that have been applied to documents Sign Documents This options allows users to electronically sign documents Granting Security Access Rights To grant security access rights to a project 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Security Access The Security Access screen appears PaperVision Administration Console SEE Action Help H Entities lt Default Company gt 1 Ya ACCOUNTING SUPERVISOR H Backup Processing 3 ACCOUNTING Group El Current Activity Data Storage El General Security g Message
190. ew Integration Definition Within the Integration Definitions screen you can add edit delete import and export definitions To create a new integration definition 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Integration Definitions The Integration Definitions screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Bakal Entities Key Combination lt Default Company gt 1 AR Integration Definition Ctrl A Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage i General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets 5f Migration Jobs 5 4 Projects B GE Accounts Receivable Enhanced Auditing Document Associations BA Document Security Levels Integration Definitions Sp Security Access Directory Manager Jobs 3 Records Destruction Lists 59 Records Retention Policy Sets Sp Report Management Jobs eS WorkFlow Definitions 11 17 2003 S1SAM Integration Definitions PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 223 a Chapter 8 Integration Definitions 2 Click the New icon The New Integration Definition dialog box appears New Integration Definition Project Accounts Receivable Name CO Method Trigger on Hotkey Enumerate Child Windows x Window Tite 0 r Hotkey Setup T Ctl M Alt J Shift lA m Send Keys Configuration Sequences Defined 0 r Index Field Criteria Criteria Defined 0 Configure Search Type
191. ewing a report click the Filter Report m icon The Filter Report dialog box appears Filter Report m Document Access Filter Date Time to User lt All Users gt X Operation Doc Info Recipient Reason Source Clear Filter Document Access Report Filter Note The available filters depend on the type of report you are filtering 2 Enter the values to search for or click Clear Filter to remove all filters Note If you enter values for multiple items the filter will locate only items that meet all of your criteria 3 Click OK to run the report PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 331 Printing Reports Reports are printed exactly as they appear on the screen To print a report 1 While viewing a report select the Print Entire Report SI icon The Windows Print dialog box appears Papervision Black amp White Properties Ready zvprtl Papervision Comment Papervision Black amp White I Print to file Copies Number of copies fi Pages fror tor F Col ollate C Selection cHe Print 2 Select the printing parameters and then click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 332 iz Chapter 11 Reports Exporting Reports Exporting reports creates an XML representation of the report This is useful for data analysis task
192. f A Z or a z If not c is assumed to be a literal c character Matches a digit character Equivalent to 0 9 Matches a nondigit character Equivalent to 0 9 Matches a form feed character Equivalent to xOc and cL Matches a newline character Equivalent to x0a and cJ Matches a carriage return character Equivalent to x0d and cM Matches any white space character including space tab form feed and so on Equivalent to f n r t v S Matches any non white space character Equivalent to f n r t v t Matches a tab character Equivalent to x09 and cl v Matches a vertical tab character Equivalent to x0b and cK w Matches any word character including underscore Equivalent to A Za z0 9_ PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 361 a Appendix F Regular Expressions Character Description W Matches any nonword character Equivalent to A Za z0 9_ xn Matches n where n is a hexadecimal escape value Hexadecimal escape values must be exactly two digits long For example x41 matches A x041 is equivalent to x04 amp 1 Allows ASCII codes to be used in regular expressions num Matches num where num is a positive integer A reference back to captured matches For example 1 matches two consecutive identical characters n Identifies either an octal escape valu
193. file contains the document index values as well as the file set page numbers for the start and end pages of the document It is named with a PVERMDOC extension e Info File This file contains the XML document describing the project configuration It is named with a PVERMINFO extension e Submit File This file contains internal information pertaining to the parsing engine It is named with a PVERMSUBMIT extension e Summary File This file contains the XML document describing which files were processed into the file set the date and time the file set was started and finished as well as the total number of documents pages bytes and time It is named with a PVERMSUM M extension If the report management job includes form overlays the file set will also include e Overlay Definition File This file contains the XML document describing the form overlay configurations and application rules It is named with the PVERMOLDEF extension e Overlay Image File s These files are the actual image files used as blank overlays when rendering a form overlay They are named with a PVERMOLx extension PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 232 a Chapter 9 Report Management Document Indexing PaperVision Enterprise Report Management offers extensive document index value extraction capabilities In order to configure document indexing it is beneficial to understand a few key concepts Regions
194. file extensions by separating them with the pipe character IMPORTANT SECURITY NOTE Any files opened in these applications will be subject to the functions available in those applications For example if users open a PDF file in Adobe Acrobat they will be able to print those files regardless of their security rights assigned within that project PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 76 w Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Utilization Reports Include Project Page Counts This setting specifies that the utilization reports calculate the number of pages in each project and include this data in the report Note Enabling this option may cause utilization reports to take much longer to run Utilization Reports Include User Usage Statistics This setting specifies that the utilization reports should calculate usage statistics for each user and include this data in the report Note Enabling this option may cause utilization reports to take much longer to run PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 77 wW Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Working with Entities Only global administrators can create new entities edit existing entities or delete existing entities Creating a New Entity Creating a new entity involves assigning the SQL Server database connection parameters entity pat
195. fined fields automatically added to the project You can remove any undesired fields afterwards PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 145 6 Click Add to add a new index field The Insert New Field dialog box appears s Insert New Field Add Remove J Get Index Field Value List from Data Group Insert New Field 7 Enter the name of the new index field a in ee Oe a ecie a a a a aaa a a a ALLA aa PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 146 W Chapter 5 Project Administration 8 Select the type of index field e Boolean Stores boolean values such as yes no true false etc e Currency Stores currency monetary values e Date Stores date time values between Jan 1 1753 and Dec 31 9999 e Double Number Stores numbers too large for using a Number field or numbers that require decimal places e Long Text Stores textual data that is greater than 255 characters in length Long text values are not indexed by the database server and as such can take a significant amount of time to search when there are a large number of records e Number Stores whole number values between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 e Text Stores textual data that does not exceed 255 characters in length e Text 900 Stores textual data that does not exceed 900 characters in length Important When documents containing this field type are migrat
196. from these IP addresses subnets This setting limits PaperVision Enterprise access to specific IP addresses or address ranges This is helpful in ensuring that access can only be gained from specific locations To specify a particular address enter the exact address To specify a specific subnet enter only the first X octets of the network e g entering 10 1 or 10 1 0 0 will specify the entire 10 1 class B address space Remote Authentication Gateway Encryption Key Name This setting specifies the encryption key whose value matches the Encryption Key Value specified in the PaperVision Gateway Settings application located on the installed PaperVision Authentication Gateway Server For additional information see Appendix G Remote Authentication in the accompanying PaperVision Enterprise Installation and Getting Started Guide Entity Security Policy Passwords Settings The Passwords tab contains entity level password settings including expiration length and complexity settings Entity Security Policy General Account Lockout Authentication m Password Expiration User passwords never expire C User passwords expire in fo days Expire All Passwords m Password Length No minimum password length C Minimum password length 0 characters r Password Complexity l Passwords must contain upper case letters 4 8 C Z I Passwords must contain lower case letters a b c 2 Passwords must contain
197. gnoreLocateMsg is the number one 1 no message will be displayed in the event that the workstep is already owned or couldn t be located otherwise a message is displayed BaseURL specifies the URL to the site where the link is created i e https Mogin imagesilo com This tag is only valid in the email body IgnoreLocateMsg lt WF DOCPAGES Includes attachments of the specified page range x y If the document consists of images the images are converted into a single multi page TIF or PDF file as specified by the Format value Format and page range are required otherwise an error occurs Automated WorkFlow email creation attaches the single PDF file since all pages are within the single PDF regardless of the specified page range This tag is only valid in the email body DataFlow PVERM documents are converted to one of the following Format x y gt e A single text file if no pages have overlays A single multi page TIF or PDF file if all pages have overlays A single text file containing all of the pages of the document AND a single TIF or PDF file containing all of the pages that PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 294 Chapter 10 WorkFlow Description have overlays if only some of the pages have overlays Note The temporary email attachment path must be specified in Global Administration s System Settings For more information see the secti
198. have a filter applied the word Filtered will appear at the bottom of the screen Rolling Back a File Set You can roll back a file set to remove the file set s data from the system making the data no longer available for retrieval Additionally if the file set is in a Read Write data group its files will be removed from the data group To roll back a file set 1 Inthe Report Management File Sets screen select one or more file sets 2 Click the Roll Back icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the roll back operation PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 137 Chapter 4 Entity Administration Exporting File Set Information You can export file set information into an XML file for further analysis To export file set information 1 From the Report Management File Sets screen select the file set s to export 2 Click the Export icon Select Yes to confirm the export 4 Inthe Export File Set Entries dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 5 Enter the file name for the export 6 Click Save A message will notify you where the export was written PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 138 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Viewing File Set Properties To view file set properties 1 From the Report Management File Sets screen select the file set to view 2 Click the Properties
199. he Attachment Path PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 21 w Chapter 2 Global Administration Viewing Properties of Email Queue Items To view the properties for an email queue item double click on the appropriate email queue item The Email Queue Properties screen appears Email Queue B250C73C A3E4 43C8 8FEE 0C7083B2E3AA Properties x Date Time 2011 05 27 14 24 20 Entity ID 1 From QA DSI com lt G4 DS1 com gt To dana trancoso digitechsystems com Body The case dated lt WF DOCINDEX DATE REVIEWED gt has been Reviewed and Approved and is now closed http 7 10 150 10 30 RedirT ype ShowWF amp EntlID 1 amp W S DeflD 0 E xtendedParams WFINS TID 6 IGNORELOCATEMSG 0 Attachments Email Queue Item Properties PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 22 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Global Administrators Global administrators can control every aspect of configuration for the PaperVision Enterprise system including configurations for all entities However global administrators cannot access the documents in a project as system entity administrators can To view the list of global administrators select Global Administration gt Global Administrators PaperVision Administration Console Action Help E Global Administration UserName Full Name Automation Service Status ADMIN Default Global Admin
200. he order in which it is displayed General Settings General settings include the policy set name and additional comments about the policy set El New Message Capture Policy Set Policies File Set Options Policy Set Name Comments mee New Message Capture Policy Set General PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 203 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Policy Set Name This setting specifies the unique name of the policy set Comments Comments include descriptive information pertaining to the policy set Policies The Policies tab allows you to add edit and remove message capture policies El New Message Capture Policy Set r Policies Policy Name Status Mode Effective Date Action Add Edit Remove A Cancel Message Capture Policy Set Policies Add This operation allows you to add a new policy to the bottom of the policy set list Edit This operation allows you edit the selected policy Remove This operation allows you remove delete the selected policies PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 204 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Up This operation allows you move the selected policy up in the evaluation list Down This operation allows you move the selected policy down in the evaluation list File Set Options File Set Options allow you to configur
201. his action inserts the number of vertical spaces carriage return line feed as specified by the Action Value property before writing out the remainder of the input line Action Value This value is used for the selected action PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 255 i Chapter 9 Report Management AS400 Spool 3 1 Digit Commands This page detection method provides a means of interpreting standard control codes that appear in AS400 spool files The common theme behind this type of control scenario is that a 3 digit number a 1 digit number or nothing is located within the code columns The command is carried out inserting the appropriate number of vertical spaces carriage returns line feeds and then the remainder of the input line is appended When the remainder of the line is written the carriage control remains on the current output line does not automatically go to a new output line e blank space A single vertical space carriage return line feed is inserted and then outputs the remainder of the input line e digit number The specified number of vertical spaces carriage returns line feeds is inserted and then outputs the remainder of the input line e 3 digit number A 3 digit number advances to the specified line number on the page and then outputs the remainder of the input line If the specified line number is less than the current line number of the current page
202. hs and properties described in the previous chapter To create a new entity 1 Select the Entities folder and then click the New icon The New Entity General dialog box appears i New Entity General Contacts Natification Import Display Entity Name m Database Settings Server P Name lt Not Set gt Database lt Not Set gt User Name lt Not Set gt Password lt Not Set gt Connection Type lt Not Seb TCP IP Port lt Not Set gt Attach to Existing Database Tables Configure gt Entity Paths Data Group Path PO Ea Migration B ackup Path O E Full Text Path CU Batch Path PO E I Disable Entity I Disable Utilization Tracking Entity Properties General 2 Enter the name in the Entity Name field PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 78 iz Chapter 3 Entity Configuration 3 To configure the database settings click the Configure button The SQL Data Source Information dialog box appears wE SOL Data Source Information m Connection Parameters Server IP Name CHADGYIRXP Database PAPERYISION User Name s Password e Connection Type TCP IP Default v ICPF Port fi 433 Close SQL Data Source Information 4 If you have previously configured a SQL Data Source click the Last Used button to populate the screen with the most recent database connection parameters 5
203. i ACCOUNTING Group C ACCOUNTING SUPERVISOR ADMIN OSALES MANAGEMENT C USER_1 C USER_2 C USER_3 New Document Security Level General Enter the name of the new document security level 4 Select the users and groups who will have access to any document with this security level PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 174 Chapter 5 Project Administration 5 To define specific criteria optional select the Criteria tab The New Document Security Level Criteria dialog box appears When documents are imported or added to the system PaperVision Enterprise automatically compares new documents index values to all of the defined criteria for all of the document security levels within that project Any security levels whose criteria matches the documents index values will automatically be applied to the documents WW New Document Security Level m Automatic Selection Criteria Invoice Number pa o Invoice Date pe o Amount miooo Check Number pam ooo Check Date Payee Search Type Or Automatic Selection Criteria Application MV Apply when new document index values meet criteria I Apply when altered index values meet criteria l Remove when altered index values no longer meet criteria Test Criteria New Document Security Level Criteria 6 Inthe Automatic Selection Criteria section enter the criteria that wil
204. iately throughout the system To edit an existing WorkFlow definition 1 In the WorkFlow Designer screen select the appropriate WorkFlow definition 2 Click the Active field and then select True from the drop down list 3 Click the Save icon 4 Click Save 5 Click Finish Deactivating a WorkFlow Definition Deactivating a WorkFlow definition stops any new WorkFlow instances from being created All existing WorkFlow instances will continue to be processed You can easily reactivate a WorkFlow definition by repeating this procedure and selecting the Active from the drop down list To deactivate a WorkFlow definition 1 Inthe WorkFlow Designer screen select the appropriate WorkFlow definition PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 315 i Chapter 10 WorkFlow 2 Click the Active field and then select False from the drop down list 3 Click the Save icon 4 Click Save 5 Click Finish Deleting a WorkFlow Definition Deleting WorkFlow definitions immediately deletes not only the definition but all WorkFlow instances completed and in progress and all Workstep instances associated with the WorkFlow definition WorkFlow history and status for the deleted WorkFlow will no longer be available however archived WorkFlow history reports will still exist if they were created To delete a WorkFlow definition 1 In the WorkFlow Definitions screen highlight the appropriate WorkFlow def
205. ible 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 111 Security Policy PaperVision Enterprise s entity level security policy allows system entity administrators to define system wide security settings To view the entity s security policy 1 Select General Security gt Security Policy The Security Policy screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration a Entities S8 Configure Security Policy lt Default Company 1 J Backup Processing Current Activity Data Storage a General Security FE K gi System Users 1g Message Capture Policy Sets i g Migration Jobs E Projects dA Report Management Errors 485 Reports 1172572009 1211PM A Security Policy 2 Select Configure Security Policy and then click the Configure Security Policy 2 icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 112 z Chapter 4 Entity Administration Entity Security Policy General Settings The entity s General Security Policy setting allows you to configure user session settings encryption configurations and other security settings for the entire entity zt Entity Security Policy General Account Lockout Authentication Passwords goegeeceescesogoscecesosszeoesesecesoogesecocsosseseososesesosoccessesesososoesosospescosse
206. ication attachment and other related settings E New Policy General i Sender Recipient Subject Content Body Content Message Sensitivity Message Priority Message Importance Message Type Attachment Name Attachment Exists Message Size Bytes gt fo Message is Encrypted V Active Message Capture Policy Message Subject Content This regular expression specifies the subject content that must be met to meet the policy s criteria Body Content This regular expression specifies the body content that must be met to meet the policy s criteria Message Sensitivity This setting specifies the message sensitivity that must be reached to meet the policy s criteria This is not a regular expression nor is it case sensitive PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 209 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Message Priority This setting specifies the message priority that must meet the policy s criteria This is not a regular expression nor is it case sensitive Message Importance This setting specifies the message importance that must meet the policy s criteria This is not a regular expression nor is it case sensitive Message Type This setting specifies the message type that must meet the policy s criteria This is not a regular expression nor is it case sensitive Attachment Name This setting is a regular express
207. ide 57 a Chapter 2 Global Administration System Settings Email Notifications These settings allow you to configure email settings and how notifications are relayed to the global administrator ES System Settings Local m Email Settings SMTP Server Name IP SMTP Server Port SMTP User Name SMTP Password Send Email From Attachment Path Send Test Message Global Administrator Notification Method Publish Notification C Send Email Publish Notification and Send Email System Settings Email Notifications SMTP Server Name IP This setting specifies the SMTP server name or IP address that is to be used when sending emails from within the system SMTP Server Port This setting specifies the port number to be used to communicate with the specified SMTP server default is 25 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 58 a Chapter 2 Global Administration SMTP User Name If the specified SMTP server requires authentication prior to sending an email provide a valid user name SMTP Password If the specified SMTP server requires authentication prior to sending an email provide the appropriate password Send Email From This setting specifies the email address from which automated emails are sent Examples of valid addresses include e Friendly Name lt address company com gt e address company com Send Tes
208. ime is set either by the automated policy processing or by the document review process Automatically destroy documents This setting specifies that documents will have their destruction date time set without any review process Require document review prior to destruction This setting specifies that documents will have to be authorized for destruction This is accomplished by the creation of a destruction list which allows authorized users to authorize or deny the setting of the destruction date time Destruction lists are accessible through both the administration and web user interfaces Only authorized users based on project security rights can perform the destruction authorization process in the web user interface Require document review prior to destruction Email Address es This setting specifies that an email will be sent to the specified addresses notifying the recipients of a new group of documents that need to be reviewed for destruction PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 189 a Chapter 6 Records Retention Require document review prior to destruction List Link URL When an email is sent notifying the recipients of a new group of documents that need to be reviewed a URL can be included with a link to the review list This URL specifies the base URL to the web interface e g https login imagesilo com Reviewer specifies destruction schedule This setti
209. ing Data Groups Data groups can be purged from PaperVision Enterprise to delete all of the documents related to those data groups from the system If the data group is marked as Read Write PaperVision Enterprise will also physically delete all of the files for the data group from the system A WARNING Use caution when purging a Read Write In Line data group These are simply directories that were imported via the directory manager Since the directory manager may not have imported all of the files in these in line data groups or the directories may be used for other purposes purging them may cause undesired results To purge data groups E 1 Inthe Data Groups screen select the data groups and then click the Purge icon The Purge Data Group dialog box appears amp Purge Data Group Warning Purging Data Groups that are marked as Read Write will permanently delete their contents from their source media This operation cannot be undone If a data group is marked as Read Write in the data group properties selecting Purge will not only remove the data group s documents from the Papervision database but will also delete ALL FILES in the data group s directory from storage Read Only data groups may also be purged if your global administrator has set the Force purged data group deletion global setting m Purge Method for Read Write Data Groups Purge Immediately Purge Cancel Purge Data Group 2
210. inition and then click the Delete con 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The WorkFlow definition and all associated WorkFlow and Workstep instances will be deleted Exporting a WorkFlow Definition PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to export WorkFlow definitions The export creates an XML document describing the WorkFlow definition including pre conditions tasks and post conditions To export a WorkFlow definition In the WorkFlow Designer screen open the appropriate WorkFlow definition Click the Export icon and then select the type of export to perform Navigate to the directory in which the WorkFlow Definition will be saved Click Save i Importing a WorkFlow Definition PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to import a WorkFlow definition that was previously exported The import process will import all of the WorkFlow definition except any notification groups or workstep participants The reason for this is that the assigned group ID on the system that exported the definition will not necessarily match the group ID on the system importing the definition To import a WorkFlow definition 1 Inthe WorkFlow Defintions screen click the Import icon 2 Inthe Import WorkFlow Definition dialog box locate the directory containing the WorkFlow definition PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 316 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow 3 Select the XML file and then c
211. instances and all of their associated workstep instances individually f WorkF low Histo ry Feree Time in Work 19 ji 19 19 2 2 2 2 3 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 13 45 2011 05 27 14 15 26 2 3 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 13 45 2011 05 27 14 15 26 2 4 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 18 38 2011 05 27 14 19 39 1 4 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 18 38 2011 05 27 14 19 39 1 4 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 18 38 2011 05 27 14 19 39 1 5 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 18 53 2011 05 27 14 19 39 1 5 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 18 53 2011 05 27 14 19 39 1 5 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 18 53 2011 05 27 14 19 39 1 6 APPROVED 2011 05 27 14 23 32 2011 05 27 14 24 20 1 Eee 1 18 Items Displayed Max Items fi 000 m WorkFlow History Report PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 325 a Chapter 11 Reports WorkFlow history reports include the following information e WorkFlow instance ID e WorkFlow name e WorkFlow instance start time e WorkFlow instance end time e Length of time it took the WorkFlow instance to be completed in minutes e Workstep instance ID e Workstep name e Workstep instance start time e Workstep instance end time e Length of time it took the workstep instance to be completed in minutes e Name of the owner who completed the workstep instance e When a specific WorkFlow or Workstep is used as a filter value the report will also include a
212. ion 2 As existing object version updates the existing version of the object with the new page and pointer information from the data group Then it shuffles any annotations that may have been moved due to page insertions or deletions into the appropriate location within the document Keep in mind that annotations cannot be shuffled and hence may be on incorrect pages when using this option during the import of ScanTRAX data groups multi page TIFFs and DataFlow COLD data groups Use of this option may increase the amount of time needed to perform the import if a significant number of documents being imported have already been annotated within PaperVision Enterprise Copy data groups during import If you enable this setting PaperVision Enterprise copies the entire contents of the data group to a location in the Data Group Path as described earlier and subsequently retrieves all documents from that copied location Delete source data group after copy If you enable this setting PaperVision Enterprise deletes the imported data group from its source location after a data group is copied and the entire import is performed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 74 a Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Entity Properties Display Display properties allow you to configure how characters and documents appear in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client You can also select how web documents are disp
213. ion Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 264 w Chapter 9 Report Management Anchor Properties Each region s Anchor Properties allow you to specify the anchor type fixed or floating and its corresponding settings Region Properties General Anchor Anchor Type Fixed Anchor v m Fixed Anchor Page Position Top lines E Left colurnns 3 Region Properties Fixed Anchor Anchor Type This setting specifies whether the anchor is fixed a specific location from the top left corner of the page or floating located by finding a textual sequence on the page Fixed Anchor Page Position These values specify the anchor location from the top left corner of the page The position can be configured explicitly in this screen or drawn graphically using the mouse PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 265 w Chapter 9 Report Management Region Properties Anchor Type Floating Anchor Sequence Based sd Floating Anchor Location Sequence ee ooo I Case Sensitive 7 Regular Expression r Floating Anchor Sequence Range Left columns width columns Top lines Height lines m Validator Sequence I Case Sensitive Regular Expression m Validator Sequence Range Left columns Width columns Top lines Height lines Can
214. ion If the data group were to be encrypted when a user requests a single page out of a very large report file the entire report file would need to be decrypted just to access the single page Data groups can be encrypted during import if the Data Group Encryption Key Name is selected in the entity s security policy prior to importing the data group Data groups that have already been imported can be submitted for encryption and data groups that have been encrypted can subsequently be submitted for decryption When a data group is submitted for encryption or decryption a maintenance job is created in the Maintenance Queue When the automation service processes an encryption maintenance job the data group is copied in its encrypted state to a secondary location enabling users to continue to access the data group during the encryption process Once the encryption process is completed the reference to the data group is updated to point to the newly encrypted location The old unencrypted directory is submitted as a deletion job to be processed by the automation service To submit data groups for encryption 1 Ensure that the Data Group Encryption Key Name has been specified in the entity security policy 2 Ensure the data groups to encrypt are marked as Read Write Highlight the data groups 4 Click the Submit for Encryption icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 107 a Chapter
215. ion net Enterprise application If blank PaperVision Enterprise will use the URL of the incoming request However if you are using non standard ports or placing the web servers behind a load balancer it is required that you specify a value in this field Package Workspace As PaperVision Enterprise creates backup packages for backup jobs or imports package files it needs a temporary location where the package file can be placed and if necessary the contents can be extracted This allows you to specify that location This location should contain ample space to temporarily hold any package file that is being worked on and all of the extracted contents of any package file that is being imported Report Management Path As files are parsed in the report management engine the file sets that are created along with temporary cache files are written to this path Once the file set is completed it is copied into a data group and removed from this location Furthermore files that have been processed are copied to their Successfully Processed or Failed to Process directories under this path Automation Service Logging Enable Logging This setting enables the automation service logging which provides data used in troubleshooting processes carried out by the automation service IMPORTANT To support the ISO 8601 international date format many functions in PaperVision Enterprise may now display dates and times using the yyyy mm dd hh n
216. ion that specifies an attachment name that must exist in order to meet the policy s criteria Attachment Exists This setting specifies whether an attachment s existence is used in order to meet the policy s criteria e lt blank gt The attachment is not evaluated e True The message must have an attachment e False The message must not have an attachment e Message Size This value specifies that the message must be greater than or equal to or less than or equal to a specific size in order to meet the policy s criteria Message is Encrypted This setting specifies whether a message s encryption is used in order to meet the policy s criteria e lt blank gt Message encryption is not evaluated e True The message must be encrypted e False The message must not be encrypted PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 210 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Sender Settings Sender settings allow you to add import and delete sender addresses and Active Directory group names E New Policy m Sender Addresses Add Import Delete m Sender Active Directory Group Names Add Import Delete IV Active Message Capture Policy Sender Sender Addresses The Sender Addresses display a list of regular expressions that are evaluated If the sender email address meets one of the regular expressions the message is considered to have met the
217. ions will automatically view PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 378 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions all documents in their respective application e g doc files will prompt to open in Microsoft Word If the disableBBV option is left disabled set to False default setting the Security Policy does not display the option Require web clients to use the browser plugin and users can choose to view documents in either the Browser Based Viewer or the PaperVision ActiveX Viewer PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 379 A Active X Controls OCX ceceseecseereereeerees 359 administrators PloDal sessing cana eae ee 11 SVSLEM a ae E E ccxspecsesuenteees 11 WoOtkPlOW cision ara 11 anchors Report Management 234 APIS aiaa oe tienes 359 Appendix A Additional Help Resources 345 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and SOCUMMEY ieena rias 346 Appendix C System Architecture 352 58 Appendix D Customization and Integration 359 Appendix E Search Criteria eee 364 Appendix F Regular Expressions 366 70 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions 371 applying document security levels sseeseeseeseeseeee 176 archives restoring report oo eeceecceesceeeeeeeceeeeeteeeseesees 343 VIEWING TOPOTt 0 eee eeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeneeeees 342 ar
218. ipient e Notes Any additional information about the disclosure Enabling Enhanced Auditing To enable enhanced auditing for a project 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Enhanced Auditing The Enhanced Auditing screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Action Help EEE H Entities FE lt Default Company gt 1 53 General Settings H E Backup Processing 2 Disclosure Reason List g Current Activity Disclosure Recipient List Data Storage General Security 1g Message Capture Policy Sets B Migration Jobs H 4 Projects a Accounts Receivable Z Document Associations D Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions Security Access Directory Manager Jobs EA Records Destruction Lists Ez Records Retention Policy Sets Report Management Jobs a WorkFlow Definitions 11 13 2003 10 05 AM Enhanced Auditing PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 151 a Chapter 5 Project Administration 2 Click the General Settings icon The Enhanced Auditing dialog box appears FE Enhanced Auditing Project Name Accounts Receivable Disclosure Recipients Users must select Disclosure Recipients from list Users can enter ad hoc Disclosure Recipients Add ad hoe Disclosure Recit Viewing Disclosure Reason m Disclosure Reasons Users must select Disclosure Reasons from list C Users can enter ad hoc Disclosure
219. iption for the Document Selection Methods 16 Select OK to save the new index field 17 Repeat steps 6 through 15 for any additional index fields 18 You can modify the order that the index fields are listed by using the Move Field Up and Move Field Down icons 19 Click OK to create the project PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 148 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Editing an Existing Project Index fields can be added or removed at any time even after the project contains documents If a new index field is added all of the existing documents in that project will have that index field value filled with Blank values If an index field is removed all of the existing index field data for that particular field will be deleted To edit an existing project 1 Inthe Projects screen select the appropriate project 2 Click the Properties icon The Project Properties dialog box appears s Accounts Receivable Properties Project Name Accounts Receivable Max Revisions fo ort JH m Document Index Fields Field Name Field Type Field Format COMPANY NAME Text DATE Date mmm d yyyy AMOUNT Currency Currency CHECK NUMBER Number Add Edi Remove i A Cancel Project Properties 3 Make the necessary changes to the project and then click OK Note When you add or remove an index field the changes take place immediately
220. is setting can be particularly useful in situations where the data groups are being imported from an FTP site Full reload imports compare last modified dates If this setting is enabled full reload imports compare a data group s main database XML i e DATAGRP MDB file s last modified date to the last modified date from the same data group s previous import If the file has not been modified then import is skipped Disabling this setting causes the modification date comparison to only be used when performing an append import Note Performing a manual full reload import of a data group with the Import Immediately option selected will ignore this setting and force the data group to be imported regardless of the file modification date Force purged data group deletion When a data group is purged from PaperVision Enterprise depending on its Read Write state its files may or may not be physically removed from the source media This option ensures that the files are always removed from the source media regardless of the Read Write state of the data group Purge data groups during entity deletion When an entity is deleted this option will cause any data groups with the Read Write state enabled to be automatically submitted for purging Require dirmgr submit files for directory manager job processing When a directory manager job runs it typically will attempt to import files that meet the job requirements Thi
221. is value does not specify the size of the package file itself but the size of its contents Also this value can be overridden by the global system settings 7 To encrypt the package files that are generated select the name of the Package File Encryption Key PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 84 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration 8 Select the Schedule tab The New Backup Job Schedule screen appears T New Backup Job Start Time 201 1 06 01 10 29 Schedule kNo Schedule Run Once gt Repetition Schedule No Schedule Run Once New Backup Job Schedule 9 Provide the Start Time of the backup job 10 Select the desired schedule interval and repetition schedule 11 Click OK to save the new backup job PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 85 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Editing an Existing Backup Job To edit an existing backup job 1 Inthe Backup Jobs screen select the appropriate backup job and then click the Properties EJ icon 2 Inthe Backup Job Properties dialog box make the necessary modifications Click OK to save your changes The modifications will take effect the next time the automation service processes the backup job Deleting Backup Jobs To delete existing backup jobs 1 Inthe Backup Jobs screen select one or more backup jobs 2 Click the Delete i
222. ise and the PaperVision Authentication Gateway PaperVision Enterprise Terminology To fully understand PaperVision Enterprise the following key terms are used throughout the application Entity An entity is a body such as a corporation or organization Each entity is autonomous and administers its own projects users groups WorkFlows security policies etc An entity never shares elements with other entities and you cannot switch between entity IDs after PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 9 ie Chapter 1 Introduction you log in You or your administrator can limit access to specific projects functionality and documents within your entity In general most users including users in large enterprise installations use only a single entity Only a few special circumstances require more than one entity For example you might see more than one entity in a hosting environment where an on demand provider is hosting data for multiple companies and each company wants to be able to administrate itself and its users You might also see more than one entity in a large enterprise consisting of different departments that want the ability to administrate themselves separately from other departments without involving a central IT organization Entity ID An entity ID is a unique number that identifies each entity Each entity is autonomous you cannot change your entity ID after you log in a
223. ision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 333 w Chapter 11 Reports Archives As described earlier archives are available for all reports except the WorkFlow Status report and the Records Retention Destruction report as both of these reports represent live data System operations queries and document access archives can be restored back into the database To view a report s archives 1 Select the appropriate entity and then expand Reports 2 Inthe Reports screen select the appropriate report and then click the Archives icon The report s Archives dialog box appears i Document Access Archives r Available Archives Run Date Time Start Date Time End Date Time 2011 06 07 10 05 27 2011 05 27 13 54 19 2011 05 27 14 23 29 View Restore Document Access Archives 3 Select the archive and then click the View button The archive will be extracted to your local hard disk and then displayed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 334 w Chapter 11 Reports Restoring Archives Archives from the system operations queries and document access reports can be restored back into the database as desired To restore report archives 1 Select the appropriate entity and then expand Reports 2 Inthe Reports screen select the report whose archives should be restored and then click the Archives icon The report s Archives sc
224. ision Tools is licensed as a component of PaperVision Enterprise Users with current PaperVision Enterprise maintenance contracts may install and use PaperVision Tools e PaperVision Message Manager is comprised of the PaperVision Message Capture Server and PaperVision Message Capture Harvester components PaperVision Message Manager is an included component of PaperVision Enterprise e Web servers application servers and automation servers are all included with the standard PaperVision Enterprise concurrent licenses You can install an unlimited number of these servers for even a single concurrent license PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 7 fe Chapter 1 Introduction System Requirements The following table outlines the minimum system requirements for PaperVision Enterprise and its optional components Minimum System Requirements Operating Systems Windows XP Pro SP3 or later both 32 and 64 bit operating systems supported required for the following components PaperVision Administration Console PaperVision Enterprise PaperVision Automation Service not required PaperVision net Enterprise Browser Plug Ins not required PaperVision Web Application or Authentication Gateway Server not required Both components require Internet Information Server IIS 5 0 or later Hard Disk Space 250 MB Windows Installer Version 4 5 or later Windows PowerShell Version 1 0
225. istrator E Deletion Queue A Email Queue Global Administrators Import Licensing P Maintenance ge Migration Jobs gt Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings Entities 11 9 2003 3 58PM oy Global Administrators PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 23 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Creating a New Global Administrator To create a new global administrator 1 Click the New icon The New Global Administrator dialog box appears New Global Administrator User Name Full Name Email Address Password Confirm Password omen New Global Administrator 2 Enter the user name that will be used to log into PaperVision Enterprise Enter the user s Full Name optional The full name is used for some of PaperVision Enterprise reporting capabilities 4 Enter the user s Email Address optional This is used to send notifications via email to the global administrator Enter the initial Password to access the system Enter the password again to confirm it 7 Click OK Editing the Properties of a Global Administrator To edit the properties of a global administrator 1 Double click the global administrator in the list 2 Make the necessary modifications to the account 3 Click OK Note Modifications take effect the next time the global administrator logs into the PaperVision Enterprise
226. itech Systems DataFlow COLD ERM Data Group Format e Digitech Systems PaperVision Enterprise Report Management PVERM Data Group Format e Digitech Systems PaperVision Message Capture PVMSG Data Group Format e Digitech Systems PaperVision Package File Format e ImageMax s Docu ROM Image Data Group Format e ImageMax s ScanTRAX Image Data Group Format e C A R Film based formatted text file e XML Formatted Data Group Other than C A R and XML formatted data groups all other data groups are produced by their respective applications PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 93 Chapter 4 Entity Administration PaperVision Package Files PaperVision Package Files are compressed and optionally encrypted files that contain all of the files in the appropriate directory structure for one of the other data group types supported and include a file extension of PVPKG Package files are particularly useful when you wish to transport another data group but need to provide added security through encryption or increase file transfer speeds by transferring one large file rather than hundreds or thousands of small files Package files use compression that is 100 compatible with the existing PKZip 2 04g format and optional WinZip 9 0 AES encryption As such package files can be created using most popular Zip compression tools However the PaperVision Data Transfer Manager can
227. ition is evaluated in order In other words if a workstep contains multiple post conditions each post condition will be evaluated in order the first post condition that is met will initiate the workstep transition and the workstep will be completed Workstep Owner As workstep instances are created they are made available for any of the defined workstep participants to take ownership of At this point the specific user or system that maintains ownership of the workstep instance is known as the Workstep Owner Once ownership has been gained no other participants can perform any of the tasks for that particular workstep instance Ownership of a workstep instance can only be revoked by an administrator Planning Your WorkFlow PaperVision Enterprise WorkFlow can support complex WorkFlows For best results fully plan and define the business process that you are automating before you attempt to define it in the Administration Console Ensure you know the answers to the following basic questions before you begin to tailor your definition to fit your specific organization e What is the scope of the business process Exactly what are you trying to accomplish e What steps must be performed to complete the entire business process e Who needs to perform those steps PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 290 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow e What are all of the tasks that must be performed in those st
228. ity and utilization tracking 6 lt Default Company gt 1 Properties General Contacts Natification Import Display Entity Name I lt Default Company gt r Database Settings Server IP Name CHADGVIRXP Database PAPERYVISION User Name a Password lt Hidden Password gt Connection Type TCP IP TCP IP Pott 1433 Attach to Existing Dat Tables Configure r Entity Paths Data Group Path CApve_datas Bi Migration Backup Path CApve_datas cS Eull Text Path CXpve datas Batch Path CXpve datas I Disable Entity I Disable Utilization Tracking Cancel Entity Properties General Entity Name The Entity Name specifies the name of your company or organization PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 68 a Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Database Settings These settings display the configuration settings for the database where the entity resides Only under special circumstances i e moved the database to a different server should these settings ever be changed once the entity is created Changing these settings to another database or server for an existing entity will not create new entity tables The server will expect them to already exist Attach to Existing Database Tables This setting specifies to prompt for the new Entity ID rather than have it automatically generated so that existing database tables with the pr
229. kage Files When it locates one of these data groups it checks to see if a SUBMIT file also exists in the directory DATAGRP SUBMIT ERMGROUP SUBMIT MSGGROUP SUBMIT lt packagefilename gt SUBMIT If not it leaves that data group unprocessed until the SUBMIT file has been copied or created in the same directory as the data group file The contents of the SUBMIT file are not important in fact it can be an empty file PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 28 To view the monitored import paths select Global Administration gt Import gt Monitored Import Paths PaperVision Administration Console Global Administration i i Automation Service Status Deletion Queue Email Queue i ic 1 Global Administrators aA Bi Import i Import Queue i Monitored Import Paths L g Import Logs i amp Licensing H a Maintenance gS Migration Jobs i Notifications i Process Locks be Report Management Errors System Settings E Entities Lox lt ANY gt Active server PVE_Import_Path 12711 2009 11 33AM Monitored Import Paths Creating a New Monitored Import Path To create a new monitored import path l New Monitored Import Path 2 Manually enter the path or click the ellipsis button to browse to the path PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 29 i Chapter 2 Global Administration 3 Select the Works
230. ks a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Workstation Process ID Date Time Locked Automation Service Status CHADGVIRXP_O RECRET PROC ENTID 1 2011 05 31 13 34 16 Deletion Queue A Email Queue iC gi Global Administrators Import Licensing H P Maintenance Q Maintenance Queue a Maintenance Logs S Migration Jobs Notifications Report Management Errors System Settings H Entities 5 31 2011 229PM og Process Locks Deleting a Process Lock To delete a process lock 1 Inthe Process Locks screen select the appropriate lock 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 46 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Report Management Errors Global administrators can view report management errors for all report management jobs for all entities They are handled in the same way that they are handled for entities For more information on working with report management errors refer to the Report Management Errors section in the Entity Administration chapter System Settings System Settings configure certain aspects of the system s operation that are not specific to any particular entity Local settings are specific to the computer they are set up on In other words if you are using multiple web or application servers you would need to set up these settings on each server individu
231. kstep icon when the designer is in graphical mode PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 305 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow Process A D lap Process Troi Grid and Graphical Designer views 6 In the Initial workstep field choose from the following e If this is the first Workstep in the definition select True from the drop down list e If this is not the first Workstep in the definition select False from the drop down list 7 Enter a name for the new Workstep 8 Select a participant for the new Workstep from the drop down list 9 Optionally select a notification group from the drop down list 10 Enter the maximum number of minutes the Workstep waits in queue before it transitions to another Workstep Max time minutes before transition and or before it sends a notification Max time minutes before notification 11 If you are defining a maximum time before transition select the Transition Workstep if it exists otherwise you may want to change this at a later time where the old Workstep instance should automatically transition to 12 If you are defining a maximum time before notification select the Notification Group users who will receive the automated notification 13 Repeat steps 8 10 to define time limits for the maximum number of minutes an owned Workstep instance can remain uncompleted PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Archi
232. ksteps and their flow you can define workstep tasks To define workstep tasks 1 Inthe WorkFlow Designer screen select the appropriate Workstep 2 Click the Add 7 icon and then select Add Task from the drop down list The WorkFlow Definitions Properties screen displays the task in Grid view Note Alternatively right click a Workstep in the column on the left and select Add Task from the popup menu PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 308 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow 3 Tracking Index Pre Conditions OO WorkSteps Eri a Post Cond Defaul Process Invoice 5 Tracking Invoice A General Description Graphic Initial workstep Name Workstep ID Workstep Participant gt Notification Group The maximum time minutes before notification 2 The maximum time minutes before transition 5 Transition Workstep A Time Limitfor Worksteps Waiting in Queue Notification Group Time Limit for Uncompleted Worksteps Owned Workstep 1 Information True Get 1 lt Automated gt lt None gt lt None gt lt None gt WorkFlow Designer Add Task 3 Optionally enter a description for the task 4 Enter a name for the task 5 Select a Task Type The following table describes each available option Task Type User Operations Launch Application Shell Desc
233. kup File e Microsoft Cabinet format version 1 3 e PKZIP versions through 9 0 e Tape Archive e UNIX Compress e UUEncoding all versions e WinZip versions through 10 Note You can extract files from password protected RAR and 7 Zip files In addition the ZIP reader supports LZMA BZIP2 and Deflate64 compression methods Binary Formats e Executable e Link Library Computer Aided Design Formats e AutoCAD drawing DWF DWG and DXF files versions 2 5 through 2009 e Microsoft Visio versions 5 2000 2002 2003 2007 2010 Note Graphic rendering for AutoCAD Drawing R13 R14 and R15 files is supported Database Formats e dBase III and IV e Microsoft Access versions 95 97 2000 2002 2003 e Microsoft Project 2000 2002 2003 2007 Graphic Formats e Computer Graphics Metafile e CorelDRAW versions through 9 0 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 364 DCX Fax System EMF Encapsulated Postscript raster TIFF header Enhanced Metafile GIF versions 87 and 89 HD Photo JPEG XR with HDP or WDP extensions JBIG2 JPEG JPEG LS with JLS extension JPEG2000 includes J2K JP2 and JPX Lossless JPEG with LJP extension Lotus AMIDraw Graphics Lotus Pic Macintosh Raster version 2 MacPaint Microsoft Office Drawing PC PaintBrush version 3 Portable Network Graphics PNG RAW SGI RGB Image Sun Raster Image Tagged Image File TIFF v
234. l be automatically applied to this document security level to documents as they are imported or added to the system or when the level is applied to existing documents For more information about defining this criteria refer to Appendix E Search Criteria PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 175 w Chapter 5 Project Administration 7 Inthe Automatic Selection Criteria Application section you can specify when the selection criteria are evaluated automatically Selection criteria can be applied when manual changes are made to index fields or when index fields are forcibly changed i e automated via WorkFlow Select one or more of the following options e Apply when new document index values meet criteria As documents are added to the project and if any Automatic Selection Criteria has been defined PaperVision Enterprise will automatically apply the document security levels whose criteria matches the document s index values e Apply when altered index values meet criteria As index field values are changed and if any Automatic Selection Criteria has been defined PaperVision Enterprise will automatically apply the document security levels whose criteria matches the document s index values e Remove when altered index values no longer meet criteria As index field values are changed such that the updated value no longer meets the Automatic Selection Criteria the document security le
235. l be used to send notifications via email if configured to do so 6 Enter and confirm the initial Password that will be used to access the system If you want the user to change the password upon the next login select the option User must change password at next logon 8 If you want the user to change the password at will rather than only when forced select the option User can change password when desired PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 124 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration 9 Ifthe user is an administrator select the Administration Rights System Administrators can completely administrate a single entity and have access to all functionality in all projects for that entity WorkFlow Administrators are designed to provide users with access to configure WorkFlows without giving them the keys to the kingdom as a system administrator WorkFlow administrators do not have access to documents or functions in any projects by default and must be granted access to those projects explicitly They can however configure WorkFlow definitions for any project as well as view WorkFlow history and WorkFlow status reports If they are granted access to view documents within a project a WorkFlow administrator can create new WorkFlow instances for a particular document as well as view the WorkFlow status for a document Capture Administrators can define Capture Jobs in the PaperVision
236. layed and whether to display available upgrades for the PaperVision ActiveX Document Viewer Lastly you can select the type of information that appears in utilization reports ic lt Default Company gt 1 Properties Character Case Display Upper Case Only Mixed Upper and Lower Case Default Document Grouping None Oldest First C Most Recent First Default Web Document Display Method Use Papervision Viewer C Use Browser Based Viewer V Display Document Viewer Upgrade Availability File Types to Display in Registered Application oo Note Separate multiple file types with a pipe I i e PDFIDOC Utilization Reports T Include Project Page Counts I Include User Usage Statistics Entity Properties Display Character Case Display This setting determines whether PaperVision Enterprise will display all project names index fields and index values in upper case or mixed case PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 75 a Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Default Document Grouping PaperVision Enterprise offers users the ability to view multiple documents that have the same index values as a single document This is particularly useful in cases where additional information may be added to the system at a date later than the original information Default Document Grouping specifies the default value the user
237. le Cache Path 0 ha Web File Cache URL Primary Web Server URL PO Package Workspace o OS E Report Management Path af Automation Service Logging Log Path E System Settings Local Web File Cache Path This setting specifies the full path to the location that files are to be physically cached to when retrieved If you are using multiple web servers it is not necessary to specify unique cache settings for each you can use identical cache settings all pointing at the same network share PaperVision Enterprise also provides additional high availability features for this setting which allow you to enter multiple paths separated by a pipe character If the first location specified is not accessible the server moves the inaccessible path to the end of the list and tries the next path listed This process is repeated until either the server can cache the file to one of the specified cache paths or the server determines that none of the cache paths are accessible PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 60 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Web File Cache URL This setting identifies the URL to the physical location specified by the Web File Cache Path value If you are using multiple paths you must specify the exact same number of URLs separated by a pipe character Primary Web Server URL This setting specifies the URL that is used to access the PaperVis
238. lick Open 4 When the notification indicates the import was successful click OK 5 Edit the imported WorkFlow definition and assign the appropriate notification groups and participants for the worksteps PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 317 PaperVision Enterprise provides extensive reporting features to allow administrators to perform detailed security audits track user productivity and utilization view the history of WorkFlows manage the status of WorkFlows and view records retention and destruction information Document Access Document access reports provide detailed records of all documents that are accessed by a user including which pages are accessed and what operation the user performed while accessing those documents i e print fax email etc ffs Document Access amp 8 e Date Time User __ Operation Project Document Information 2011 09 13 14 29 08 ADMIN _ Export Accounts Receivable STATE FARM INSURAN STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 07 Export Accounts Receivable STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 07 ADMI STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 07 ADMIN STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 07 ADM iew STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 06 AD STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 06 ADMIN View STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 29 05 AD STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 28 45 ADMIN View STATE FARM INSURAN 011 09 13 14 28
239. lized by the Message Capture Server e Harvester The policy will only be utilized by the Message Capture Harvester Action The Action is what occurs in the event that the message meets the specified criteria e Capture This action writes the message to the file set for the specified project The message will not be evaluated against any additional policies e Capture and Continue This action writes the message to the file set for the specified project The message will continue to be evaluated against any additional policies e Drop The message is not written and will not be evaluated against any additional policies Project The Project is where the message is to be written into when the message is captured Classification This setting provides a hard coded index field value Classification which will contain the specified index field value when the message is captured All Messages When selected all messages evaluated by this policy will meet the policy s requirements No message criteria are evaluated the message automatically meets the criteria Selecting this option negates the need to define any Message Sender or Recipient selection criteria Active When selected the policy is active Inactive policies are not evaluated PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 208 a Chapter 7 Message Capture Message Settings Message settings include message content classif
240. lock information select the desired Clear setting in the Records Retention Policy Set Properties dialog box 5 Click Save 6 Select Yes to save the policy set and make it the current Active Policy Set This new policy set will supercede any existing policy sets Any information that was selected to be cleared will be cleared immediately Activating a Superseded Records Retention Policy Set When you activate a superseded policy set the existing active policy set will become superseded To activate a superseded policy set 1 Inthe Records Retention Policy Sets screen select the superceded policy set 2 Click the Properties EJ icon 3 To clear document destruction or lock information select the desired Clear setting in the Records Retention Policy Set Properties screen 4 Click Save to activate the policy set 5 Click Yes to save the policy set and make it the current Active Policy Set This new policy set will supersede any existing policy sets Any information that was selected to be cleared will be cleared immediately PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 198 a Chapter 6 Records Retention Records Destruction Lists Records destruction lists are created when documents are identified by a destruction policy whose Require document review prior to destruction option has been selected These lists are then made available for authorized users to either approve or deny the
241. logs the user out of the system Each entity can have a customized setting for this setting in its general security policy However this global value in General System Settings determines the maximum value for each entity Max WorkFlow History Size characters This setting specifies the maximum WorkFlow history size in characters that a WorkFlow instance history can reach before an alert is generated This setting helps you identify WorkFlows that erroneously loop through the same set of worksteps before they cause performance issues i e on the database server Disregard WorkFlow Task Server Operations When the server performs automated WorkFlow steps certain types of tasks namely Launch Application Shell and Raise COM Events could potentially pose security problems for instance a Launch operation that deletes files For this reason global administrators may want to prevent these types of operations from running on automation servers Max Report Notification items to display This setting specifies the maximum number of records that can be returned in a report or notification listing allowing you to ensure that a larger report or notification list does not overburden the database server Server Side Encryption Key This setting specifies the encryption key used to encrypt all server side communications i e Session ID s If you do not specify an encryption key a default key is used As such it is strongly recommende
242. lt in the file set size exceeding this value in some instances File Set Encryption Key This setting specifies the encryption key to be used when the file set is created If a file set is encrypted when documents are retrieved from the file set they will automatically be decrypted for viewing Compress Output Data This setting specifies whether page contents are to be compressed prior to being written to the file set s data file Compressing the output increases system overhead during processing importing data groups and retrieving documents but significantly decreases the size of the resulting file set PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 237 a Chapter 9 Report Management Import During Processing Once a file set has been created and appended to the appropriate data group the file set can be immediately imported into the PaperVision Enterprise system for retrieval if this option is selected Active This setting specifies whether or not the job is to be processed during automated processing Analyze File This operation allows you to perform an analysis on a sample input file For more information see the next section PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 238 W Chapter 9 Report Management File Analysis The Analyze File operation performs a file analysis on a portion of the sample file that gives clues as to the c
243. luated h Page is written to the output file set 10 Repeats step 9 for the lines that remain in the line array 11 When a file set has been created the file set is moved into the output data group and optionally made available for retrieval 12 Repeats steps 1 through 11 for any remaining blocks of data 13 Once a file has been successfully processed it is either moved to the specified Local Output Destination in System Settings into a directory called Successfully Processed or deleted based on your System Settings If a file fails to process it is moved to a directory called Failed to Process The contents of the source files are not modified in any manner PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 235 w Chapter 9 Report Management Report Management Jobs PaperVision Enterprise Report Management allows administrators to define jobs graphically without any programming or scripting General Settings General settings allow you to customize the report management job name input path default font and other parameters affecting the report management job New Report Management Job General Eile Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Project Accounts Receivable Name m Input Path s Add Remove m Default Font Font Name Courier New Bold False Font Size 8 Italics False Select Max Data Group Size MB e00 Max File Set Si
244. m Results per Query and sorting by the Document ID value 4 For each document returned from that database query PaperVision Enterprise checks to ensure the requesting user has document level access to it 5 If after stripping out documents there are fewer than the specified Maximum Results per Query PaperVision Enterprise will repeat steps 3 and 4 for the next group of documents When the correct number of documents are found or no more meet the criteria PaperVision Enterprise will continue to step 6 6 PaperVision Enterprise sorts the final set of documents based on the user s requested sort order and field PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 376 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions 7 PaperVision Enterprise cycles through the documents queuing them up to be returned to the client Since a full text search was issued no document grouping is used Q How does PaperVision s file caching scheme work A PaperVision Enterprise searches for documents excluding full text search criteria by following the steps below PaperVision Enterprise implements advanced caching processes to minimize the chance of an unauthorized party accessing a document When using an application server in your PaperVision Enterprise installation the document store is never exposed to outside users nor is it exposed to the PaperVision Enterprise users The following caching process takes plac
245. mail Notifications Local Utilization Limits Max SOL database results per query 100 Max Full Text database results per query 500 Max Global Session idle time minutes 20 Max Workflow History Size characters fi nooo Workflow Processing l Disregard Workflow Task Server Operations r Reports Notifications Max Report Notification items to display j1000 m Encryption Server Side Encryption Key ees m Communication Client Ping Increment secs e0 System Settings General Max SQL database results per query This setting specifies the maximum number of results individual documents returned to a user during a search As such if a user has document grouping enabled fewer documents may be returned since some of those documents may have been grouped together to appear as one For more information see Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 48 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Max Full Text database results per query This setting specifies the maximum number of full text search items returned by the full text search engine For more information see Appendix E Frequently Asked Questions Max Global Session idle time minutes This setting specifies the number of minutes that a user can sit idle before the automation service automatically kills the user session
246. map e PCD Kodak Photo CD e PCX PC Paintbrush e PGM Portable Graymap e PNG Portable Network Graphics e PNM Portable Any Map e PPM Portable Pixmap e PSB Adobe Photoshop Big e PSD Adobe Photoshop e PTOCA PTO MOD Presentation Text Object Content Architecture e RAS Sun Raster Data e SGI Silicon Graphics Image e TGA Truevision Targa e TIF TIFF Tagged Image File Format version 3 0 6 0 e U3D Universal 3D version 1 0 e WBMP Wireless Bit Map e WPG WordPerfect Graphics Metafile e XBM X BitMap e XPM X PixMap e XWD WD XZ Windows Dump Informational Formats e CAR PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 371 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions PDF Postscript Formats PDF Adobe PDF version 1 1 1 7 PS EPS Adobe PS v3 Message Formats EML MSG Microsoft Visio Files VDX VSD VSS VST VSX VTX VZW Multi Part Files GZIP TAR ZIP Non Converted Files HTML TXT XHTML Presentation Formats PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide ODP PPT PPTX 372 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions XLSB XML Spreadsheet Formats CSV FODS ODS XLS XLSM XLSX XLTX XML Textual Formats DOC DOCX MHT MHTML ODT RTF XML Q What document file formats are supported by PaperVision s full text database engine A In addition to PaperFlow data groups that have been
247. may be required to enter a document search or selection criteria document security levels WorkFlow pre conditions etc This section provides guidelines for entering search criteria PaperVision Enterprise offers the ability to easily perform either extremely detailed or very broad searches within a project You can perform multiple searches across multiple index fields at the same time as well as perform limiting searches allowing you to specify ranges of values on dates and numbers General Searching Rules PaperVision Enterprise provides flexible searching features to enable fast and accurate document retrieval To maximize your search results you can follow the following general searching rules e All numeric and date fields allow you to perform limiting searches to limit the results to a specific range of values If both range limits are not filled for a particular index field the system will search for the value that you entered e Index field searches are not case sensitive e g a search for smith will find Smith e PaperVision Enterprise allows you to utilize the asterisk wildcard to specify any number of unknown characters For example searching for T in a name field would locate any document that had a name beginning with the letter T Furthermore searching for T would locate any document that included a letter T anywhere in the name Finally searching for T would locate any document whose name
248. mber of minutes Otherwise the administrator will have to manually unlock the account Clear lockout counters after X minutes Every time a user attempts to log in to PaperVision Enterprise with an incorrect password a counter is incremented to designate the number of failed attempts since the last successful login Normally the counter is only reset back to zero when the user PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 116 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration successfully logs in However you can have the counter reset after a specified period of time when the user has not attempted to login with an incorrect password Entity Security Policy Authentication The entity s authentication settings allow you to determine the login restrictions for PaperVision Enterprise and the type of Remote Authentication Gateway Encryption Entity Security Policy m Login Restrictions Allow logins from any source C Allow logins from only these IP addresses subnets gt Remote Authentication Gateway Encryption Key Name kNo Remote Authentication gt v Cancel Entity Security Policy Authentication Allow logins from any source This setting specifies that a user can log into PaperVision Enterprise from any IP address PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 117 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Allow logins only
249. ment Replacements Defined 0 Configure m Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer Items Defined 0 Configure File Preamble Discard None v Quantity to Discard fo File Preamble Insert Spaces fo mee Report Management Job File Settings Block Size As the parser reads the incoming files it grabs chunks of data called blocks This setting allows you to fine tune the size of the block that is imported Larger block sizes are generally faster as fewer file reading operations are required but could bog down a server with little available memory PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 240 a Chapter 9 Report Management Translation PaperVision Enterprise can translate different variations of EBCDIC during processing including e CP037 US Canada 3270 Superset e CP500 International Latin 1 e Base 3270 ASCII Superset Character Replacement Once the raw block of data has been read the engine can perform character removal or replacement before any further processing This is particularly useful for removing hidden characters such as null characters Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer Once any character replacement has been completed the engine can search for and remove regular expressions before any further processing This option is useful when reports have embedded printer codes which cannot be processed or include mainframe job relate
250. ment Indexing ce cceccecccseesseeseeesceseceeeesecaecaecaeceaecaeecaeeeaeseaeeneeseeeseeeseenseseaeenaeeeaeenaes 233 Report Management Jods ccccccceessescesscesseesecesecesecaeceaecseecaeeeaeseaeeneeeeeseeeaeseeeeeaeenseenaeentes 236 Bile Settings keraent lagi canvsededdeetdedeys ven E AE E SEER ESERE 240 Line Setting S253 ses cdacesscenactrs ozandcsntesbests oti tdesseeatccdectad conven beddeetl eieys E e AE E E R 245 Fields Breaks Settings cccccccccsseessesscessceseceecesecesecaeceaecseecaeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeaeenaeenaeenaeenaes 259 Form OVer lays siecscissccsscedsiasccancesaueahesssctdcdeas ccadestesiagsvaavsceesdestdvseus cee dedtescegicasisedid testi gdersecebactaess 272 Chapter 10 WorkFlow scccscssscsssccsscssssssssnsseneseesssesssessscssscscscssscessssssceeseoesees 288 Terminology anaieri al iustiadnpadlesisiiniiienusialanitinosh SEEE PERET ETEA ETES 288 Planning Your WorkFloW cccccesseesscesseesecesecssecaeceaeceaecseecaeeeaeeeseeeaeseeeseseseenaeeeaeeneenaeenaes 290 WorkFlow Engine 0c cccccscccsccesscssncessccescesscesseuseccaceesaesaasensceseseuseossnssccssadecdagusesseseaeesensuansaens 291 Email Tag Sreser nanea seandesd Ra E N vee pleai SE EE E R E 292 WorkFlow Definitions 0 0 0 ec ecesesccesecseeseceeerceseeecenecaeesecaeesecneeseeeaeeecsaecaeesecaevseeeasencaeeateaeeas 297 Chapter 11 Reports cccccccscsssscsssccsscssssssssssssnsssscsssssessssesssessscssssssscssscssssee
251. ment grants default of empty string e gblDefaultTabSetting Defines whether the System tab or Folders tab opens by default when users first log into the Web Client default empty string indicating the System tab Note If the user selects a different tab after initially logging into the Web Client a cookie is set which overrides the gbIDefaultTabSetting e gblHideBrowserMenus Defines the default setting that determines if the browser s menu bar location bar etc should be hidden Note that if set to true users must change their IE security setting for the site to Medium Low default false e gblLoginInfoHTML Defines additional text in HTML format that displays in the login prompt below the login button default empty string e gblLoginInfoLegendTitle Defines the header title of the legend that contains the gblLoginInfoHTML text if the gblLoginInfoHTML value is populated default empty string e gblLoginShowEntID Defines the default setting that determines if the Entity ID will display in the application default false e gblMaintenanceMsg Defines an HTML formatted maintenance message that will display to all users rather than presenting a login prompt default empty string e gblMaxUploadSize Defines the maximum number of bytes that a file upload can contain This setting must be smaller than IIS s MaxRequestLength parameter to be evaluated default empty string e g
252. mes the files reside in the name of the file a delimited segment of the name of the file or the file modification date This functionality not only provides a manner of pulling in an organization s ad hoc document management system using directories and file names or importing documents scanned by a third party application but also allows deep integration with fax server software and network attached scanners and photocopiers The process of running the directory manager job is handled as an automated process by the PaperVision Enterprise Automation Service As the automation service runs the job it compares the modification date of the files to the job s defined minimum modification date Only files that fall on or after the minimum modification date if enabled will be imported After the import is complete the minimum modification date that is stored for the job is automatically updated with the most recent modification date of any of the files imported As files are imported they can be imported into a new data group copied from their source location or simply referenced at their source location Directory manager jobs can also import the full text contents of image files If a file with the same name but a PVFULLTEXT extension e g document TIF and document PVFULLTEXT exists in the same directory as the imported file it will automatically be used to populate the full text data for that document If the imported document
253. n 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Deleting a Range of Error Log Entries You can also delete a range of error log entries To delete a range of error log entries 1 Select the entity and then select Report Management Errors 2 Select the Delete Range icon The Delete Error Log Range dialog box appears 4 Delete Error Log Range Select the From and To date time values to define the range you would like to delete From Date Time To Date Time i Cancel Delete Error Log Range 3 Enter the date range of the log entries to delete and then click OK Enter dates in the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format 4 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 134 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Report Management File Sets Report Management file sets are created as the PaperVision Enterprise Report Management processing engine parses COLD ERM files For more information on file sets and their contents see the creates file sets section in the Report Management chapter Viewing Available Report Management File Sets To view the available report management file sets 1 Select the entity and then select Data Storage The Data Storage screen appears a PaperVision Administration Console mE Action Help e Global Administration Entities E Data Groups lt Default Company gt 1 g Message Capture File Sets Backup
254. n The New Report Management Job General dialog box appears New Report Management Job General Eile Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Project Accounts Receivable Name m Input Path s Add Remove m Default Font Font Name Courier New Bold False Font Size 8 Italics False Select Max Data Group Size MB e00 Max File Set Size MB fio File Set Encryption Key lt No Encryption gt v Compress Output Data D Import During Processing M Active Iv Analyze File mee New Report Management Job General Settings Enter a name for the new job 4 Select the Input Path s where the data files are located for the job Alter any general settings as desired For descriptions of each setting see the section on General settings PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 280 a Chapter 9 Report Management 6 Select the File tab The Report Management Job File dialog box appears New Report Management Job General F Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Block Size KB 1024 x Translation asc No Translation m Character Replacement Replacements Defined 0 Configure m Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer Items Defined 0 Configure File Preamble Discard None Quantity to Discard fo File Preamble Insert Spaces fo men New Repor
255. n be used to represent the current date and time that the search is run This is particularly useful in situations where documents need to be identified that are of a certain age A specified number of years Y months M days D hours H minutes N or seconds S can be added to or subtracted from the current date and time Possible uses for the CURRENTDATETIME tag are as follows e CURRENTDATETIME Current Date Time e CURRENTDATETIME 1 Y Current Date Time plus 1 year e CURRENTDATETIME 12M Current Date Time minus 12 months e CURRENTDATETIME 2D Current Date Time plus 2 days e CURRENTDATETIME 96H Current Date Time minus 96 hours e CURRENTDATETIME 900N Current Date Time plus 900 minutes e CURRENTDATETIME 120S Current Date Time plus 120 seconds For more information on entering criteria please refer to Appendix E Search Criteria PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 192 Chapter 6 Records Retention Records Retention Policy Set Configuration You can add new records retention policy sets for any project in your entity To create a new policy set 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Records Retention Policy Sets The Records Retention Policy Sets screen appears PaperVision Administration Console mfx Action Help Bak Global Administration Policies Status Creation Date Time Created By 5 Entities EB 4 AR Outdated Do
256. n ss format Log Path This setting specifies the path where the log files are written PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 61 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Automation Service Scheduling PaperVision Enterprise provides automation services that automate the execution of a number of operations Operations can be scheduled to repeat in any of the following manners e every x minutes e every x hours e every x days e every x weeks on specific days of the week e on specific days of the month IMPORTANT To support the ISO 8601 international date format many functions in PaperVision Enterprise may now display dates and times using the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format Below is a list of the operations that are available for execution Backup Processing This operation performs any backup jobs whose Next Run Time value is less than or equal to the current date and time Deletion Queue This operation performs deletions specified in the Deletion Queue that were submitted by data group purges Directory Manager Jobs This operation processes any defined Directory Manager Jobs that are marked as Active Email Queue When email notifications are sent they are placed into a holding queue and then processed by the automation service to perform the actual sending of the email This operation causes the email holding queue to be processed sent Fil
257. n to a number of APIs PaperVision Enterprise offers extensive customization and integration capabilities Terms of use of PaperVision s APIs and source code as well as restrictions are specified in the PaperVision Enterprise EULA End User License Agreement you received with the product PaperVision Enterprise APIs PaperVision includes a number of APIs designed to allow PaperVision s functionality to be extended or integrated into third party applications Full documentation for these APIs is provided in a separate manual which is included with PaperVision Web Services PaperVision s web service API provides the necessary functionality to integrate PaperVision s client server communications For instance a developer could integrate PaperVision s document searching and retrieval capabilities into an existing web application COM DLLs PaperVision s COM DLLs provide an ActiveX COM interface to the same functionality that is available via PaperVision s web services These interfaces support both local the computer interacts directly with the database server and document store and remote the computer communicates with a PaperVision server via web services capabilities without having to make any modifications to your code to switch between the two communication methods In other words you could use the COM DLLs to write an application that retrieves documents from a local document store or via a remote server i e over th
258. nagement jobs for all entities System Settings contains PaperVision Enterprise Automation Service Scheduling that automates the execution of certain operations on timed intervals System Settings also contains the Maximum Global Session Idle Time and Maximum Maintenance Log Age setting for all entities PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 16 w Chapter 2 Global Administration Changing Data Group Paths for All Entities In some scenarios you might need to modify the Data Group Path setting for all entities in a single operation This is helpful when new storage is to be utilized for all newly imported data groups so you do not have to individually modify each entity This operation has no effect on existing data groups only newly imported or created data groups To change the data group paths for all entities 1 Inthe PaperVision Administration Console highlight the Entities folder and then click the Change Data Group Paths for All Entities Lal icon The Select New Data Group Path for all entities dialog box appears Select New Data Group Path for all entities Save in lo Papervision gt e ex Ee Does PveEClient My Recent Pveweb Documents pvewebauthcw Samples O WORKFLOW _ DEFINITIONS APVDALic exe BPvDMAC exe Shy PvGatewaySet exe 4 File name DGPATH My Network Save as type all Files X Cancel Places Select Data Group Pa
259. nce Guide 94 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration C A R Data Groups Computer Aided Retrieval C A R allows users to search through both film based images as well as digital documents located in data groups When a user selects a document that is located on film the user is notified accordingly and given the roll and frame number in which the desired image can be located PaperVision Enterprise imports C A R files that are Pipe Delimited Text Files These text files contain the index information as well as the roll and frame number on which to locate a document The following sample C A R File can be loaded into PaperVision Enterprise CAR DGNAME 99990001 DEPTNAME ABC Corporation PROJNAMF Accounts Payable ACME CORP 12 31 98 19421 1 B SQUARE 12 30 98 19421 4 The first four lines of the C A R file should always be formatted as shown above The DGNAME value specifies the unique identifier given to this C A R data group No other C A R data group should ever have the same DGNAME value unless you are adding data to an existing one The DEPTNAME value should contain the department or company name that the data group belongs to The PROJNAME field contains the name of an existing project in PaperVision Enterprise into which the documents will be imported Unlike all of the other import data group formats supported by PaperVision Enterprise C A R data groups are the only types that require that the project already
260. nd cannot work across entities Project A project is a logical grouping of documents based on a common indexing schema For example ABC Company has three projects Human Resources Accounts Receivable and Sales e The Human Resources project contains Human Resources records such as employee records and health insurance information e The Accounts Receivable project contains billing purchase order and invoice information e The Sales project contains prospect and client information PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 10 ie Chapter 1 Introduction Each of these projects is a separate logical grouping within the ABC Company entity Projects support up to 200 named index fields Project names must be unique within an entity but you can create an unlimited number of projects Data Group A data group is a set of documents and their index values A data group can contain one or more documents and those documents can be grouped into one or many projects A data group holds information for only a single client but it can contain an unlimited number of projects Typically a data group only contains documents for one project as this makes organization easier Index Values Document index fields contain values that enable you to identify key elements of documents within a project during the capture process You then use these index field values to search for and retrieve documen
261. nd destruction lists for all documents in this project will be cleared no destruction scheduled for any documents e Lock Information specifies that all lock dates and lock information for all documents in this project will be cleared no locks maintained for any documents e Destruction and Lock Information specifies that all destruction dates destruction information destruction lists lock dates and lock information for all documents in this project will be cleared no destruction scheduled or locks maintained for any documents PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 194 6 Select the Policies tab The New Records Retention Policy Set Policies dialog box appears E New Records Retention Policy Set New Records Retention Policy Set Policies PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 195 W Chapter 6 Records Retention 7 Click Add to add a new policy The Records Retention Policy General dialog box appears E New Policy General Criteria r General Policy Name Status Active v Policy Type Destruction m Notifications 7 Send email notification when documents are scheduled for destruction m Destruction Review Automatically destroy documents C Require document review prior to destruction List Link URL F Reviewer specifies destruction schedule m Destruction Off
262. nd the document is marked so that WorkFlow definitions will no longer be processed against the document The mark on the document is removed when an index field marked as a WorkFlow Trigger is modified This feature allows an index field to serve as a date that triggers a WorkFlow instance for a document e New Documents Note If you select the New Documents method and you run a full reload import of a data group whose documents are already involved in an existing WorkFlow instance duplicate documents may result e New Versions of existing documents when a user checks in a new version 10 Select the Search Criteria field and then click the ellipse The Search Criteria dialog displays Search Criteria x Company Name Acme Inc Zip Code 60634 Search Type Or X Test Criteria Cancel Search Criteria dialog 11 Enter the criteria that define the documents that will automatically instantiate new WorkFlow instances when they are imported or added to the system You can enter an asterisk in a single field to indicate that all documents that are loaded for the WorkFlow s project should be processed 12 Click the Test Criteria button to validate the criteria You will be notified if any errors exist 13 Click OK to save your criteria The new pre condition will be listed in the WorkFlow definition PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architectu
263. nd then click the Properties 8 icon The Report Management Job General tab appears 2 Remove the check mark from the Active check box and then click Save Deleting a Report Management Job To delete a report management job 1 Expand the appropriate project that and then select Report Management Jobs 2 Inthe Report Management Job screen select the report management job and then click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 286 mz Chapter 9 Report Management Exporting a Report Management Job PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to export report management jobs The export creates an XML document describing the job so it can be imported into another PaperVision Enterprise system All of the job properties are included in the job definition except for the Input Paths which must be configured separately For ease of transport the XML document also includes the form overlay image files To export a report management job 1 Inthe Report Management Job screen select the appropriate report management job 2 Click the Export icon 3 Inthe Export Report Management Job dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 4 Enter the file name for the export 5 Click Save A message will notify you where the export was written Importing a Report Management Job PaperVision Enterprise includes the
264. ng indicates that the destruction date time will not automatically be calculated but will be explicitly specified by the reviewer Destruction Lock Offset This setting indicates how destruction or lock dates are determined e After documents are identified indicates the time that the policy evaluation located documents that meet the criteria e After destruction is approved indicates the time that the reviewer approves destruction of the documents e From document creation date time indicates the time that the document first entered the system PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 190 W Chapter 6 Records Retention Criteria Settings In the Criteria tab document selection criteria must be specified to determine which documents will be locked or marked for destruction Index fields defined for the project are displayed in addition to the Document Creation Date Time E New Policy General C 5 Selection Criteria Invoice Number pa mmm Invoice Date pee oo Payee ao Check Date pe Check_Number pass Amount mooo Doc Creation Date Time E ae Search Type Or Test Criteria Records Retention Policy Criteria PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 191 a Chapter 6 Records Retention When searching for dates in Records Retention Policy Criteria the CURRENTDATETIME tag ca
265. ng viewer Blocks to Run This value specifies the number of blocks whose Block Size was specified in the File tab that will be run for the Configure Fields Breaks or Test Execution operation This allows you to limit how much data is run through the parser prior to displaying the results It is useful when configuring a job for large reports as it is seldom necessary to parse an entire report to configure the job Setting a value of zero will run all of the files data through the parser Configure Fields Breaks This operation allows you to define regions anchors and fields Test Execution This operation allows you to execute real world test of the job configuration displaying the resulting output complete with document index values PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 260 w Chapter 9 Report Management Configuring Fields and Breaks PaperVision Enterprise Report Management provides a graphical configuration of document index fields and breaks When the Configure Fields Breaks button is selected the engine parses the sample document s into pages These pages are then displayed in the Configure Fields Breaks screen lt Configure Fields Breaks Navigation View Items Bi Ba g FMT 91 REPLACEMENT OF PRIOR CLAIM 12 01 1119 PAY Itemized Charges DSIFLOWCOM REGIONAL HOSP SOFTWARE T Anchor 123 ANYSTREET AVENUE PO BOX 1234 L Float Range DSIFLOWCOM NE 69506 123
266. nistration Automation Server State Current Operation Automation Service Status CHADGVIRXP_O Started lt Idle gt 2011 05 27 16 54 11 Deletion Queue Eo Email Queue g Global Administrators Import Licensing H a Maintenance oe E Migration Jobs gt Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings Entities sa 5 27 2011 10 54AM Automation Service Status IMPORTANT To support the ISO 8601 international date format many functions in PaperVision Enterprise may now display dates and times using the yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 18 w Chapter 2 Global Administration Deletion Queue When you purge a data group you can submit the purge to be processed automatically by the system The Deletion Queue provides a list of directories that have been submitted to be deleted based on the purging of a data group and have not yet been processed by the automation service PaperVision Administration Console max Action Help Global Administration Submitted Path Automation Service Status ADMIN 0 2011 05 27 11 07 07 C pve_dataX ENT1 ATTACH201105274 Deletion Queue A Email Queue M Global Administrators j d Import Ei Import Queue EN Monitored Import Paths g Import Logs Licensing P Maintenance G Migration Jobs Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors
267. nly provides a significant performance improvement over user IIS sessions for individual web and application servers but it also allows a load balanced system to completely disregard any need for persistence For example Tom logs into PaperVision using Web Server A executes a query using Web Server B and retrieves a document from Web Server C all the while never being aware that he is hitting multiple servers other than of course the blazingly fast response time If any of the servers actually went down Tom would not be aware of it as the load balancing automatically redirected him to another server Another benefit is that adding additional servers does not increase overhead for the existing systems since there is no session or state communication which must take place between the web and application servers PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 339 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security Web Services PaperVision makes extensive use of web services This allows communications between the web server and application servers if using Process Redirection or client workstations and the web application servers to be handled over standard http or https traffic Using this you can implement load balancing for second tier application servers that are being accessed by the web servers or the client workstations to provide additional scalability and reliability if
268. ns 1 02 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 1 e Corel WordPerfect Windows versions 5 5 1 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 X3 e DisplayWrite version 4 e Folio Flat File version 3 1 e Fujitsu Oasys version 7 e Health Level7 version 2 0 e IBM DCA RFT version SC23 0758 1 e IBM Lotus Symphony Documents 3 0 e JustSystems Ichitaro versions 8 through 2010 e Lotus AMI Pro versions 2 3 Word Processing Formats continued e Lotus AMI Professional Write Plus version 2 1 e Lotus SmartMaster versions 96 97 e Lotus Word Pro versions 96 97 R9 e Microsoft Windows Write versions 1 2 3 e Microsoft Word Macintosh versions 4 5 6 98 2001 v X 2004 e Microsoft Word PC versions 4 5 5 5 6 e Microsoft Word Windows versions 1 0 2 0 6 7 8 95 97 2000 2003 e Microsoft Word Windows XML versions 2007 2010 Note WordArt text in Microsoft Word 2007 is supported e Microsoft Works versions 1 2 3 4 6 2000 e Oasis Open Document Format versions 1 2 e OmniOutliner versions v3 OPML and OOutline e OpenOffice Writer versions 1 1 1 2 0 e OpenPublication Structure eBook version 2 0 e Skype Log version 3 e StarOffice Writer versions 6 7 8 e WordPad versions through 2003 e XML Paper Specification e XyWrite version 4 12 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 369 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions e Yahoo Instant Messenger Miscellaneous Supported Files and Items e OpenOffice 3 tables in presenta
269. nterprise it tracks the IP address or computer name that was used to gain access Every time you request information from the server it checks to verify that your request originated from the same IP address or computer name If not PaperVision Enterprise denies the request PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 342 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security IP Address Limiting PaperVision Enterprise offers administrators the ability to limit access to the repository to specific IP addresses or address ranges This is helpful in ensuring that access can only be gained from specific locations Automatic Session Termination PaperVision Enterprise offers the ability to have user sessions that have sat idle for too long to be automatically logged out of the system This helps free up user licenses as well as assists in securing the system when somebody gets up and walks away from their desk while still logged in Web Services As stated previously PaperVision Enterprise makes extensive use of its own web services This greatly enhances the security of the traffic that is used between web servers and application servers By using web services all traffic is handled using standard http https communication Unlike many other communication methods such as RPC DCOM etc web services traffic running over http can be secured using SSL to fully encrypt all of that traffic Fu
270. ntities such as in an on demand model it is important to keep in mind that concurrent licenses either individual in groups or unlimited are assigned to a specific entity PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 6 E Chapter 1 Introduction e PaperVision Enterprise WorkFlow is licensed on a per entity basis An unlimited license allows an unlimited number of users for a single entity of course still limited to the number of concurrent PaperVision licenses to access WorkFlow functionality If concurrent WorkFlow licenses are purchased any user who logs into PaperVision Enterprise who has access to WorkFlow functionality that is they are a member of a group that is a WorkFlow participant will be required to have both a WorkFlow license as well as a PaperVision license available in order to login e PaperVision Enterprise Report Management is licensed on a per entity basis This allows an unlimited number of report management jobs to be defined and processed for a single entity e PaperVision Distribution Assistant is licensed once for a single database unlimited entities PaperVision Distribution Assistant provides an application that is automatically placed on migrated data groups to facilitate easy retrieval view and print of documents from those data groups e PaperVision Tools is suite of tools which integrate PaperVision functionality into third party applications PaperV
271. nts 2011 05 27 13 50 24 ADMIN P Import ImportD ataGroup ADMIN amp Locked Users 2011 05 27 11 00 32 ADMIN P Import ImportD ataGroup ADMIN Notifications 2011 05 27 11 00 02 ADMIN P Import ImportD ataGroup ADMIN e Data Storage El General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets af Migration Jobs H E Projects Report Management Errors Reports 6 1 2011 2 54PM oy Notifications PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 91 T Chapter 4 Entity Administration To view a notification select the appropriate notification and then click the Properties EJ icon The Notification Properties dialog box appears t Notification Properties Date Time 2011 06 01 15 02 53 Source ADMIN Default Global Administrator Recipient USERI v Message Your account has been locked Notification Properties To delete notifications select one or more notifications and then click the Delete icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 92 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Data Groups A data group is a set of documents and their index values A data group may contain one document or it may contain thousands of documents and those documents may be grouped into one or many projects PaperVision supports importing data groups from a number of different sources e Digitech Systems PaperFlow Image Data Group Format e Dig
272. numeric characters 0 1 2 9 Passwords must contain special characters etc Entity Security Policy Passwords PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 118 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration User passwords never expire If this setting is enabled user passwords will never expire for the entity User passwords expire in X days Passwords will automatically expire after your specified number of days without being changed When users with expired passwords log into PaperVision Enterprise they will be required to change their passwords Expire All Passwords This setting causes all user passwords for the entity to expire When any user logs in to PaperVision Enterprise the user will have to change the current password No minimum password length Users passwords can be any length including blank Minimum password length When a user resets a password the new password must contain your specified minimum number of characters Passwords Complexity When a user resets a password the new password must conform to the selected Password Complexity options Modifying the Security Policy To change your entity security policy 1 Select the entity and then select General Security gt Security Policy 2 Double click on Configure Security Policy 3 Modify the entity s security policy and then click OK to save the changes PaperVision Enterprise
273. ny available information pertaining to the document associated with each item in the report e Document ID Viewing the WorkFlow History of a WorkFlow Instance Within WorkFlow History reports you can view the compiled history of the entire WorkFlow Select an item in the report and click the WorkFlow History icon The WorkFlow History dialog box appears wE WorkFlow History 2011 05 27 13 56 34 WorkFlow Instance Initiated by ADMIN 2011 05 27 13 56 34 Transitioning to Force Status to Reviewed Approved 2011 05 27 14 15 25 Task FORCE STATUS to REVIEWED APPROVED Completed Skipped Field STATUS could not be located in this project 2011 05 27 14 15 25 Force Status to Reviewed Approved Post condition met Send Email notifying GA_Member a 2011 05 27 14 15 25 Transitioning to Workstep Send Email notifying Q4_ Member 2011 05 27 14 15 25 T ask Send Email to QA Member LINKWFINST Completed Email Queue Entry 739489D4 B663 430F BB54 B2448F44E 6FF created 2011 06 27 14 15 25 Send F mail notifuinn NA Member Prst WorkFlow History PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 326 a Chapter 11 Reports WorkFlow Status WorkFlow status reports provide information pertaining to the state of active WorkFlow instances Archiving is not available as WorkFlow status is a representation of live data not historical data YA WorkF low Status alal Ss al Instance ID WorkFlow Name St
274. o be completed before the post condition can be started 12 Once all of your Worksteps are completed click OK to save your Workstep definitions to the WorkFlow definition The WorkFlow Designer appears once again a WorkFlow Designer O PODOR S FP APOHHH Geom AA eg Tracking Index E Pre Conditions The Precondition E pP WorkSteps 2 Get Invoice Nu I GP WorkSteps E A Get Post Condit t Tasks Process 2 E g Process Invoice B Post Condit E Default B Tasks Process InvoiGeyy 1 Task 1 l fe Task 2 test m 4 M gt PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 314 a Chapter 10 WorkFlow WorkFlow Definition Properties 13 Click the Save bel icon to save the WorkFlow The Save WorkF low s dialog displays Save WorkFlow s x Select WorkfFlow Name Action Status Iv Tracking Invoice Save Save WorkFlow s dialog 14 Select the WorkFlows to save and then click Save 15 Click Finish to close the Save WorkFlow s dialog Editing an Existing WorkFlow Definition Modifications to WorkFlow definitions take effect immediately When you delete a Workstep definition it is immediately removed Existing workstep instances can be processed but no new Workstep instances for the deleted Workstep definition will be created Modifications to Workstep tasks and post conditions also propagate immed
275. obal Administration H Entities 2 lt Default Company gt 1 EB Records Retention Destruction H Backup Processing System Operations Queries 8 Current Activity Utilization Data Storage WorkFlow History General Security a WorkFlow Status g Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors 12 9 2009 314PM 4 Reports To view a report double click on the appropriate report and it will be created and displayed By default reports are limited to the first 1000 items You can increase or decrease this limit by changing the Max Items value in the report view To view utilization reports In the Reports screen double click on Utilization The Create Utilization Report dialog box appears 4 Create Utilization Report Select the From and To date time values to define the range for which you would like to check utilization From Date Time 2011 05 01 00 00 00 To Date Time 201 1 05 31 23 59 59 i Cancel Create Utilization Report 2 Enter the date time range and then click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 330 w Chapter 11 Reports Filtering Reports You can filter most reports to quickly locate data based on specific criteria Filtering is available on all reports except utilization reports since filtering is not applicable to utilization reports To filter a report 1 While vi
276. ocuments there are fewer than Maximum Results per Query PaperVision Enterprise will repeat steps 1 and 2 for the next group of documents When the correct number of documents are found or no more meet the criteria PaperVision Enterprise will continue to step 4 4 PaperVision Enterprise sorts the final set of documents based on the user s requested sort order and field 5 PaperVision Enterprise cycles through the documents queuing them up to be returned to the client As it does this if the user has document grouping enabled PaperVision Enterprise will compare document index values to see if any document groups should be created PaperVision Enterprise searches for documents including full text search criteria by following the steps below 1 PaperVision Enterprise submits the full text search criteria to the full text database engine instructing it to return at most the number of documents specified by Maximum Full Text Items configured by the system administrator The engine returns the Document ID values and additional information of any documents that the full text engine finds 2 PaperVision Enterprise appends the submitted index value query if any to also require the resulting documents to have Document ID values that are in the list of those found by the full text engine 3 PaperVision Enterprise executes the submitted index value query against the SQL database limiting the results to the value specified by Maximu
277. od Text Sequence Removal With the page of data assembled the engine can search for and remove replace textual values or regular expressions This is useful for re purposing confidential data for use by third parties For more information see the section on Text sequence removal Page Preamble Insert Type Quantity to Insert This value specifies the number of blank lines or characters spaces that should be inserted at the beginning of each page Delete Blank Pages If this setting is enabled pages containing only empty lines will be removed from the output PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 248 i Chapter 9 Report Management Page Detection Methods PaperVision Enterprise Report Management offers several methods to detect and organize lines into pages Max Lines per Page This detection method simply places the specified number of lines into a page Once the maximum value Max Lines per Page has been reached a new page is created Form Feed Characters This is by far the simplest and fastest detection method Many systems insert a form feed character decimal 12 where new pages should begin Use of this detection method will cause the system to identify the form feeds and break the pages appropriately Text Sequences This method provides for the definition of one or more text sequences which once located designate a specified distance from the top or bottom of a p
278. of the region PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 234 nz Chapter 9 Report Management Parsing Engine The PaperVision Enterprise Report Management parsing engine processes information as outlined below 1 Grabs a block of data to parse If necessary converts EBCDIC to ASCII Performs any defined Character Replacement operations Performs any defined Text Sequence Removal Raw Buffer operations If this is the first block of a file performs any File Preamble Discard operations If this is the first block of a file performs any File Preamble Insert Spaces operations oe oe ae a Using the specified Line Delimiter Type parses the incoming block of data into an array of lines i e these are the same lines as lines on a page oo Performs any Line Pre Processing operations 9 Using the defined Page Detection method a Page is assembled from the lines With the assembled page a Performs any Line Post Processing operations b Performs any Page Preamble Discard operations c Performs any Page Preamble Insert operations d Performs any Text Sequence Removal operations Performs any page length adjustments i e Expand to Max Lines f Document index values are extracted from the page g Document break rules are evaluated Once a document break has been identified using ANY of the configured methods the new document is assembled and no additional document break rules are eva
279. ogin imagesilo com This tag is only valid in the email body Note that in order for a client non automated workstep to be able to perform this the user must have the security right to create document grants Also document security tracking for creating the grant is only performed if this is performed as a client operation Expiration lt WF LINKDOC This tag creates a link similar to document NewWi grants that will force the user to log in Once ee logged in user will be taken directly to the BaseURL gt document referenced by the WorkFlow instance that generated the email If NewWin is the number one 1 the document will be displayed PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 293 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow Description in a new browser window Otherwise the document will be displayed in the same window as the user login occurs BaseURL specifies the URL to the site where the link is created i e https login imagesilo com This tag is only valid in the email body lt WF LINKWFINST This tag creates a link similar to document grants that will force the user to log in Once logged in user will be taken directly to the BaseURL gt WorkFlow instance that generated the email The user will automatically take ownership of the workstep for the WorkFlow instance If the instance is already owned by another user the appropriate WorkFlow instance list will be displayed If I
280. ole the main Administration Console screen appears a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Entities ee f Licensing ef Maintenance S Migration Jobs Ma Notifications Process Locks i Report Management Errors Hal System Settings 11 9 2003 344PM 4 PaperVision Administration Console Tip In addition to the toolbar commands and menu options available for each Administration Console screen you can also right click on the appropriate node and select the operation from the context menu PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide i Chapter 1 Introduction Obtaining Online Help To obtain help from any page within PaperVision Enterprise click the Help 9 button or press the F2 key to open a topic related to the screen you are currently viewing Additionally every screen in PaperVision Enterprise contains the Help menu which contains the following items e Help gt Help Topics opens the Online Help file e Help gt User s Manual opens a PDF of the PaperVision Enterprise User Guide e Help gt About PaperVision Enterprise displays a splash screen with the copyright and version information for your version of PaperVision Enterprise Logging Out It is recommended to log out of PaperVision Enterprise once you are finished with your current session To log out of the application click the Logout a icon and th
281. on on the Attachment Path setting in Chapter 2 Global Administration Using the CURRENTDATETIME Tag in Date Fields In some scenarios you can use the CURRENTDATETIME tag to represent the current date and time in date fields First you can use the tag when you assign dates as criteria that define WorkFlow pre conditions This is particularly useful in situations where WorkFlow pre conditions need to be defined that are of an exact age Additionally if you create document grants as part of a WorkFlow email task you can assign expiration dates with the CURRENTDATETIME tag In this scenario you can use the tag to offset the expiration date from the date when the document grant was executed You can also use the CURRENTDATETIME tag in date fields automated worksteps only when forcing index values in a WorkFlow task A specified number of years Y months M days D hours H minutes N or seconds S can be added to or subtracted from the current date and time Possible uses for the CURRENTDATETIME tag are as follows e CURRENTDATETIME Current Date Time e CURRENTDATETIME 1Y Current Date Time plus 1 year e CURRENTDATETIME 12M Current Date Time minus 12 months e CURRENTDATETIME 2D Current Date Time plus 2 days e CURRENTDATETIME 96H Current Date Time minus 96 hours e CURRENTDATETIME 900N Current Date Time plus 900 minutes e CURRENTDATETIME 120S Current Date Time plus 120 seconds For more
282. on Enterprise Web Client running in Integration Mode the system automatically retrieves the latest integration definitions Integration Definition Settings The following section describes the settings available for configuration in PaperVision Enterprise s Integration Definitions New Integration Definition Project Accounts Receivable Name I Method Trigger on Hotkey Enumerate Child Windows window Title lt m Hotkey Setup O oc Far osht fa m Send Keys Configuration Sequences Defined 0 m Indes Field Criteria Criteria Defined 0 Configure Search Type Or X Sort By Amount v m Display Selection Search Results First Document mee Integration Definition PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 220 Chapter 8 Integration Definitions Project This setting specifies the name of the associated project Name This setting specifies the unique name of the integration definition Method This setting specifies the action that triggers PaperVision Enterprise to launch as well as the method to extract data from the third party application e Trigger on Hotkey Enumerate Child Windows This method causes the integration to launch when a specific hot key sequence is pressed when a user is viewing an application with your specified Window Title screen Once you have specified the Window Title Paper
283. on Enterprise WorkFlow engine Once a WorkFlow instance is created there is always exactly one active current workstep instance representing the workstep that the WorkFlow is currently on The workstep instance may be owned by a single user who is currently working on it or it may be un owned waiting to be taken ownership of A workstep instance does not have to be completed all at once In other words a user may perform certain tasks leave the workstep to work on a different workstep and then come back at a later time Tasks A task represents an item of work that can be performed during a workstep Since a workstep can only be owned by a single user all of the tasks within that workstep that are performed must be performed by that one user rather than different tasks being performed by different users Tasks within a workstep do NOT have to be performed in any specific order However you can specify the order that the tasks are presented to the user Tasks can include user operations or automated operations User tasks are simply instructions telling the user to do something Once the user has done that task they simply click on the task to mark it as completed Automated tasks are operations that are carried out by the system for the user Automated tasks include forcing a document index field to a specific value executing command line instructions to launch separate applications or perform a system operation and raising COM events to
284. on Grant Cleanup This operation removes sessions that have remained idle longer than the specified Max Session Idle Time value This operation also removes document grants that have expired Storage Utilization Snapshots This operation takes a reading of all of the storage in use by each entity and records that value Each snapshot represents a Sample in the entity s utilization report WorkFlow Automated This operation takes ownership of worksteps and then completes worksteps in any WorkFlows that have a participant marked as lt Automated gt WorkFlow Max Times This operation processes all active worksteps with expired time limits sends the appropriate notifications and transitions to new worksteps as defined PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 64 WorkFlow Pre Conditions When this operation executes it looks for any pre conditions defined with the Criteria Only Document Selection Method If any documents meet the criteria the WorkFlow instance is created and the document is marked so that WorkFlow definitions will no longer be processed against the document The mark on the document is removed when an index field marked as a WorkFlow Trigger is modified This feature is particularly useful for allowing an index field to act as a date that triggers a WorkFlow instance for a document Configuring Automation Service Scheduling To configure automation service scheduling
285. on Jobsessive eaen i EEEa ate eed EEEN ERE seein idk 128 Report Management ErtOtSescisscnorisies otstes aiii en EEEE EEE NEE EAE EEEE 132 Report Management File Sets i cc veschevcesciesiees cveectaes aa desescasativiees caeencsi EEE EERE 135 Message Capture File Sets isiin nin i i EESE EERE RER 140 Chapter 5 Project Administration sesseeseessesessoesoessessessessoeseesoesossoecoesseseorseesoeseseo 144 Creating New Projects 23s ccccseessesudetayeecsnsssccxedevaceacesnusneesevasugesaatiajeveisuanett Maden bviaslenssetauaseaies 144 Rebuilding Full Text for Projects ccceececseccsseseceseseeesecseeseceeeecsaeeeceaecaessesaeeeeeavenseasenteaeeas 150 Compressing Full Text for Projects irssi ii i 150 Enhanced Auditingecsnnnncsiesirn i i E RE E E E E EEE 151 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide iii Table of Contents Chapter 5 Project Administration continued Document ASsSociations ccccccccssssssessseesseeceseceseceaecaaecaaecaeecaeeeaeseaeeeeesneseseseseseseaeeeaeenaeenaes 158 SOCUMIDY ACCES E EE E ide seesancenghd E sigursidedlestasactineales 163 Document Security Levels cccccceescescessceeeesecesecsecaecaaecaeecaeesaeseaeeeaeseeceeseeeeeaeeeaeeeasenaeenaes 172 Directory Manager Jobs cceecsesssceeeerceseeeceseceeesecaeceessecaeesecaeesecnaeeneeaecatesecaeeaeenaveneeaeenseaeeas 178 Chapter 6 Records Retention sscssccccscsscscsecsscecsscccs
286. onditions for that same WorkFlow will be evaluated However other WorkFlow definitions pre conditions will be evaluated to see if WorkFlow instances should be created for them If no pre conditions are defined for a WorkFlow WorkFlow instances will have to be manually created by administrators or users explicitly granted access to do so PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 288 W Chapter 10 WorkFlow Note New version pre conditions are not re evaluated for existing documents those already residing in the system when importing with the Full Reload as New Object Version option New Version pre conditions are only re evaluated during document check in Workstep Definition A workstep definition describes an activity that forms one logical step within a process defined by a WorkFlow definition This activity may be automated by the WorkFlow server with no user intervention or may require the user to perform one or a series of tasks A workstep definition includes one or more tasks that are assigned to a single participant While worksteps must be performed in the order defined by the WorkFlow definition tasks within a workstep can be performed in any order Workstep Workstep Instance A workstep or workstep instance is a representation of a single enactment of a workstep definition within a WorkFlow instance It is the smallest unit of work scheduled by the PaperVisi
287. only or read write This setting can be changed at a later time for each data group If a data group is marked as read write when a document is deleted from PaperVision Enterprise the files will be physically deleted from their source data group Otherwise only the reference pointers to that document are deleted from the PaperVision Enterprise database no files are deleted Load COLD data and External documents into full text engine This setting specifies that COLD data and external documents such as MS Word files will become full text searchable when they are imported or added to the system Keep data group database archives after import As a data group is imported a copy of the data group database is made with a date and time stamp in the same directory where the data group resides These copies can be used to roll back to an old version of the data group database if it has been updated appended over time by adding additional documents from another application Default Import Type As data groups are imported PaperVision Enterprise checks whether a data group was previously imported If so this setting specifies whether PaperVision Enterprise will import the new documents that have been added to the data group Append or overwrite the existing documents Full Reload Note The Full Reload import type will not delete any documents that were deleted from the data group by another application To delete all documents for a
288. ons 16 Click Configure in the Index Field Criteria section The Configure Index Field Criteria dialog box appears Configure Index Field Criteria Project Index Fields Field Name From To Parse Type Pattern Line Column Lenath Invoice Number From Not Configured Invoice Date From Not Configured Payee From Not Configured Check_Number From Not Configured Amount From Not Configured Check Date From Not Configured Configure Index Field Criteria 17 Select the index field to configure and then click Edit The Configure Index Field dialog box appears Configure Payee From Parse Type fasta ig stars tag Regular Exp Line Column Length Configure Test Parsing Cancel Configure Index Field 18 Select the Parse Type as described below e Absolute Position This parse type extracts the index field data from a specified line and column position in the application s data e Regular Expression This parse type locates the index field data that meets the specified regular expression e Regular Expression Position This parse type locates the first text occurrence that meets the regular expression Then the index field data is extracted based on position line and column from the first character of the found regular expression text PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 227 Chapter 8 Integration Definitions 19 If your Parse
289. ontents of the file as well as different settings that might be helpful For instance it can recommend to use EBCDIC translation if it suspects that the file is not an ASCII file Also line delimiting may be recommended based on the carriage return line feed count In addition to these recommendations a character count is displayed showing the ASCII decimal value hexadecimal value and number of occurrences of each character This can be useful in determining if certain hidden characters need to be replaced or discarded such as Null characters lt File Analysis r File Analysis EBCDIC Encoding Suspected ASCII Score 0 No Translation Was Performed Key Character Analysis m Character Counts ASCII Decimal Hex Count lt Null gt 0 oO 50425 lt Char 1 gt 1 on 2 lt Char 2 gt 2 02 lt Char 3 gt 3 03 lt Char 4 gt 4 04 lt Char 5 gt 5 05 6 7 8 9 1 lt Char 6 gt 06 lt Char 7 gt 07 lt Backspace gt 08 lt Tab gt ag n ONOOO OOO O lt LineFeed gt File Analysis PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 239 a Chapter 9 Report Management File Settings File settings allow you to configure the block size translation type character replacement text sequence removal and other related settings New Report Management Job Block Size KB 1024 Translation fasci No Translation m Character Replace
290. or Sort By Amount v m Display Selection Search Results First Document mee New Integration Definition Provide a unique Name for the integration definition Select the Method used by the integration definition Select or enter a portion or all of the third party application s Window Title DO ee If the selected Method includes Trigger on Hotkey select the hot key sequence that will be used to trigger the integration Note You must use a hot key that is not already used by the third party application PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 224 Chapter 8 Integration Definitions 7 Ifthe selected Method is Trigger on Hotkey Send Keys for Clipboard click Configure in the Send Keys Configuration section The Configure Send Keys dialog box appears Configure Send Keys r Defined Key Sequence to Send Add Remove Test Cancel Configure Send Keys 8 Click Add The Add Key Sequences dialog box appears Add Key Sequences Press each keyboard combination that you would like sent to your application You will see your entries added to the Defined Key Sequence list Finished Send lt Tab gt 3 Add Key Sequences 9 Enter the key sequence necessary to copy the data from the third party application to the clipboard Press the sequences on your keyboard as if you were entering them direc
291. or later Microsoft SQL Server SQL Server 2005 or later Note Optionally you can install Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition if you are installing PaperVision Enterprise from the DVD Internet Browser Internet Explorer 8 or later PaperVision ActiveX Viewer and Browser Based Viewer Mozilla Firefox 3 6 or later Browser Based Viewer Google Chrome Browser Based Viewer Safari on iPad devices and Macs Browser Based Viewer SVGA Monitor 1024 x 768 or higher recommended PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 8 Chapter 1 Introduction Minimum Hardware Requirements Gone are the days of minimum hardware configurations as most enterprise software is capable of operating on the base hardware configurations i e a current processor and 4 GB of memory for desktops and 8 GB of memory for servers However each organization and their intended use of PaperVision is unique Your intended workload max number of users quantity and types of operations performed within a specific periodicity etc coupled with your security and redundancy requirements will dictate the hardware requirements for your implementation PaperVision has the distinct capability of being able to scale both up and out Most of the functions performed by PaperVision can be configured to take advantage of powerful hardware configurations such as those with many processor cores and hundred
292. ort Management eee eeeeeeereeeee 234 filtering data group list cc ccceccsccssecccesescvsdeecsentesecsconvees 97 FIPS81 encryption ccceccescceseceseeseeeneeeneeees 108 fixed anchors Report Management 234 floating anchors Report Management 234 folders security access rights for 163 Force Index Value workstep task type 316 form overlays Report Management Config r tlON siisii scires iiis 273 full text database results per query 006 48 G General SCCUTILY osiers ksieni iiio 108 global administration INtFOCUCTION eeeeeeeseeeeceseceseceseeeecaeecseesneeses 14 global administrators 00 0 cceeeceeeceteereeeeees 14 22 Creating NOW cirri aE EAE RRE 23 deleting siini ea REA 24 editing properties Of eseeeeseeessseeeeseeseesee see 23 setting password ss sssessesseeeesseeessrserseeseeses 24 global_en resx file modifying 362 63 H help OD tAMMTIG 5 co csscesnhcicicncntsseinadhade oedss chesstsbensesascs 13 Obtaining online 0 eee eeeceeeeeeneeeeceeeeeteees 13 TESOULCES s5 sccnkeessstcnsacsancs exassaesgneessessanescassunesoas 345 help resources cceeseeeeeecsceseeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeens 345 I TMPOTt Lists eeso ienei oeeie 14 TMPOTt LOGS AEE ee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeceeeneeeeenees 31 36 import paths file types monitored 27 modifying multiple 30 ANOMILOLE 25555 cies ons E TT 27 TMPOTt QUEUE sssri
293. oved once they are evaluated Message Capture policies make extensive use of regular expressions For a syntax guide on the use of regular expressions see Appendix F Regular Expressions File Sets The PaperVision Message Capture engine creates file sets to allow processed information to be grouped into manageable chunks of data These chunks of data are appended into data groups The primary value of file sets is the ability to perform a roll back in which the data for the file set is removed from the PaperVision Enterprise system no longer available for retrieval and based on the data group status permanently removed from the data group This function is useful in removing file sets that were created by a job that was incorrectly configured without affecting the rest of the information within the data group When documents are deleted from a file set contained within a Read Write data group the data file containing the document s information is modified to completely remove the document from the file set Each message capture file set contains at least the following files e Data File s These files contain the output message data They are named with a PVMSGDATx extension e Offset File s These files contain the offset data that is used to calculate where specific message data can be located within the corresponding data file They are named with a PVMSGOFFx extension e Message File This file contains the document index
294. ovided Entity ID in their name can be used This is useful in scenarios where an entity s tables exist in a restored database separate from the PaperVision Enterprise system tables Data Group Path As PaperVision Enterprise imports data groups sets of data it can optionally copy the data groups from their source location to a new location This path specifies the location where data groups are to be copied in that case This path also specifies where new attached documents and new document versions are to be written to Migration Backup Path This setting specifies the path where migration jobs or backup packages are processed Full Text Path This setting specifies the path where full text database indexes are stored Batch Path This setting specifies the path where batches created by the PaperVision Capture product are stored Disable Entity Disabling an entity prevents any users including administrators from logging into the system PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 69 az Chapter 3 Entity Configuration Disable Utilization Tracking By default every user operation within PaperVision Enterprise is tracked to allow administrators to perform security audits and utilization reports Enabling this setting causes PaperVision Enterprise to skip utilization tracking for each operation Note The data group migration backup full text and batch paths do not ne
295. ow instance information workstep instance information and document information This feature allows administrators to tailor the emails sent from the WorkFlow to the dynamic needs of an internal process Except where indicated tags can be used in any of the email values send from send to subject body All tag settings are required Tags for Client and Automated Workstep Tasks The following tags can be used in worksteps that are both automated workstep s participant is listed as lt Automated gt and non automated workstep s participant is an actual user PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 292 Chapter 10 WorkFlow lt WF WSINSTDOCID gt WorkFlow Instance Document ID lt WF WFINSTID gt WorkFlow Instance ID lt WF WSINSTID gt WorkStep Instance ID lt WF CURRENTDATETIME gt Current Date Time in yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format lt WF DOCINDEX FieldName gt Document s index field value for the specified field as specified by the FieldName lt WF DOCGRANT This tag creates a document grant with the specified expiration date time in yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format and password passwords Password cannot contain or lt symbols FieldsNotVisible BaseURL gt FieldsNotVisible specifies the names of any index fields pipe delimited that should not be visible in the document grant BaseURL specifies the URL to the site where the document grant is created i e https l
296. ower WITHOUT reaching a point of diminishing returns assuming the rest of your environment is designed properly including network storage etc No Use of IIS Sessions PaperVision Enterprise s web applications as well as its web services are completely free from IIS sessions In other words an administrator could completely disable sessions on their IIS server and take advantage of the performance gains made by running HS without the use of sessions mode PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 338 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security Rather than using HS sessions PaperVision Enterprise uses its own session architecture 1 When a user logs into PaperVision Enterprise a session identifier session ID is created The user s credentials and access state information are stored in the database referenced by this session ID The session ID is encrypted and then passed back to the user s computer 2 Every time the user performs an operation such as searching not only is the information pertaining to that search passed back to the server but the user s encrypted session ID is passed back to the server Depending on the type of operation being performed the session s state information may be updated 3 When the user logs out of the system this session ID and its state information are destroyed PaperVision Enterprise s session architecture not o
297. package file uses compression that is 100 compatible with the existing PK Zip 2 04g format and optional WinZip 9 0 AES encryption Since the contents of the package are stored referentially extracting their contents to a separate location using an automated tool such as the PaperVision Data Transfer Manager can allow you to maintain a duplicate copy of all of the documents and full text data in a separate location from the original PaperVision Enterprise supports four types of backup jobs e Backup Data Group Full Administrators can tag a data group to be backed up in its entirety The full contents of the directory where the data group is located are backed up e Backup Project Incremental Administrators can specify that certain projects should have their full document contents including all revisions backed up As each project s backup completes PaperVision Enterprise records the last document object that was backed up so it can start where it left off for the next backup of that project e Backup Project Full A full backup is just like an incremental backup except that every time the backup job starts it resets the last document object backed up to zero forcing the entire project to be backed up e Backup Full Text Administrators can specify that certain projects should have their full text database contents backed up Backup package files may also include two additional unencrypted files e PackageCreationFail
298. page fe Next document starts fi pages after curent page m Region Dimensions Height lines fi Width columns fis r Region Offset from Anchor Top lines fo Left columns jo Region Properties General Region Name The name of the region is used only for your reference PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 263 i Chapter 9 Report Management Detail Region This setting specifies whether or not the region is a detail region Detail regions are repeatedly located in the same area on a page for extracting detail data whereas non detail regions are located only once on a page Break Documents If this setting is enabled a document break will be placed if the region is successfully located on the page Document breaks can either occur on the current page Current document starts 0 pages prior to current page prior to the current page or after the current page Region Dimensions These values specify the height in lines and width in columns of the region on the page The region dimensions can be configured in this screen or drawn graphically using the mouse Note Regions can fall outside the boundaries of some pages Region Offset from Anchor These values specify the offset distance from the top left corner of the anchor that the top left corner of the region is to be created once an anchor is located PaperVis
299. perVision Enterprise the files will be physically deleted from their source data group Otherwise only the reference pointers to that document are deleted from the PaperVision Enterprise database no files are deleted PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 102 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Note Document files cannot be physically deleted from PVERM data groups as they are contained in the shared print streams of other documents 3 Click OK to save your changes Modifying Data Group Paths In some scenarios you may need to move one or more data groups to a new location Once data groups have been physically moved you must modify the paths that PaperVision Enterprise uses to reference the data group locations To modify data group paths 1 Inthe Data Groups screen select the data groups to modify and then click the Modify Path icon PaperVision Enterprise will evaluate the selected data group paths to locate their common path The Search and Replace Path dialog box appears ii Search and Replace Path Original Path c pve_data ENT 1 000000002 000000001 Replacement Path C pve_data ENT1 NewPath hase Search and Replace Path 2 To replace the original path browse to the Replacement Path and then click Replace PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 103 W Chapter 4 Entity Administration Purg
300. perties Click the Overlay Text Properties icon to modify the overlay s font appearance and positioning within the form S Overlay Display Properties r Overlay Text Font Font Name Courier New Bold True Font Size 18 75 Italics False r Overlay Text Position Left pixels 26 Top pixels 51 Line Height pixels 23 OK Cancel Overlay Text Display Properties Overlay Text Font This font is used to render the text onto the blank overlay form Overlay Text Position These values specify the location where the overlay text is rendered onto the blank form and the height of each line of text in pixels PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 277 w Chapter 9 Report Management Modifying the Overlay Form Click the Overlay Form Modification icon to modify the size of the form image or to add remove pixels to from the image Overlay Form Modification m Form Image Resizing Width orig 1275 fi 275 Height orig 1650 fi 650 Maintain Aspect Ratio Iv m Overlay Image Cropping pixels to remove Left fo Right fo 0 Top Bottom fo m Overlay Image Add Border pixels to add Left fo Right fo 0 Top Bottom fo Cancel Overlay Form Modification Width Altering this value causes the blank form s image width to be stretched or shrunk Height Altering this value causes the blank form s
301. pes can be imported DATAGRP MDB for PaperFlow Data Groups COLDGRP DAT for DataFlow Data Groups CDSTAMP MDB for Docu ROM Data Groups PROJECT MDB for ScanTRAX Data Groups CARFILE TXT for C A R Data Groups DATAGRP XML for XML Data Groups ERMGROUP XML for PVERM Data Groups MSGGROUP XML for PVMSG Data Groups PVPKG file for PaperVision Package Files 3 Select from the following import methods Import Immediately will cause PaperVision Enterprise to import the data group while you wait Submit Job to be Imported Automatically will submit the import to be handled by the PaperVision Automation Service rather than making you wait for the import to complete Map Data Group to Entity will cause PaperVision Enterprise to map the data group information to the entity so that any data groups that are identified by the automation service that have the same customer ID and customer name will automatically be imported into the entity without actually performing the data group import operation 4 Select whether to perform an Append import to only import documents that have not been previously loaded from this data group or a Full Reload import to completely reload all of the documents in the data group Note The Full Reload setting does not pertain to data groups that have never been imported into PaperVision Enterprise as new data groups are always imported as appends Also PVERM and PVMSG data groups only support A
302. ppend imports 5 If desired override your entity s default import settings by making the necessary changes Full descriptions for all import settings are located in the Entity Configuration chapter PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 101 Chapter 4 Entity Administration 6 Click Start Based on your selected import method PaperVision Enterprise will either import the data group immediately or it will be submitted to the automation service to be handled at a later time If the data group is submitted to the automation service via a UNC path any automation server can import the data group otherwise only the current automation server will be able to perform the import Viewing and Editing Data Group Properties To view or edit data group properties 1 Inthe Data Groups screen select the appropriate data group and then click the Properties icon The Data Group Properties dialog box appears Data Group 000000002 000000001 Properties Name 000000002 000000001 Updated 2005 05 03 10 57 11 Type PaperFlow Image Size 29 6 MB 30330 KB Encryption Not Encrypted Original Name PFFTOOO1 Path CAD ocuments and SettingsAdministrator Desktop D Projects Human Resources Last Loaded 7 l Read write Data Group Properties 2 Change the Read Write setting to meet your requirements If a data group is marked as Read Write then when a document is deleted from Pa
303. quantifiers n n n m the matching pattern is non greedy A non greedy pattern matches as little of the searched string as possible whereas the default greedy pattern matches as much of the searched string as possible For example in the string 0000 o matches a single o while o matches all o s Matches any single character except n To match any character including the n use a pattern such as s S pattern Matches pattern Note To match parentheses characters use or pattern Matches pattern but does not capture the match This is useful for combining parts of a pattern with the or character For example industr ylies is a more economical expression than industry industries pattern Positive lookahead matches the search string at any point where a string matching pattern begins For example Windows 95 98 NT 2000 matches Windows in Windows 2000 but not Windows in Windows 3 1 Lookaheads do not consume characters i e after a match occurs the search for the next match begins immediately following the last match not after the characters that comprised the lookahead pattern Negative lookahead matches the search string at any point where a string not matching pattern begins For example Windows 95 98 NT 2000 matches Windows in Windows 3 1 but does not match Windows in Windows 2000 Lookaheads do not
304. r Page e6 m Text Sequence Removal ltems Defined 0 Configure Page Preamble Insertion Type None Quantity to Insert jo r Delete Blank Pages mee New Report Management Job Page Settings 11 Modify the page configuration settings to meet the requirements of your data files For descriptions of each setting see the section on Page settings PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 283 w Chapter 9 Report Management 12 Select the Fields Breaks tab The Report Management Job Fields Breaks dialog box appears For descriptions of each setting see the section on Page settings S Report Management Job Properties General File Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays m Project Index Fields Invoice Number No Invoice Date Payee Check_Number Amount Check Date m Fixed Page Document Break Maximum Pages per Document fo m Sample Process Settings Output Path ffiledsit ColdT empPath ee Blocks to Run fo i Test Execution omen New Report Management Job Fields Breaks Settings 13 Modify the fields and breaks configuration settings to meet your indexing requirements For descriptions of each setting see the section on Fields Breaks settings PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 284 14 Select the Form Overlays tab The New Report Managem
305. r and confirm the new password for the user passwords are case sensitive 3 Select OK to set the new password PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 126 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Importing Users User lists can be imported populating most of the user s configuration data Users can be imported using a pipe delimited or tab delimited text file Each line of the text file can contain the following information in this specific order e User Name e Password e Full Name e Email Address e System Administrator if value is 1 e Other Administrator if value is 1 2 or 3 Note In the Other Administrator column a WorkFlow Administrator has a value of 1 a Capture Administrator has a value of 2 a WorkFlow and Capture Administrator has a value of 3 e User must change password at next login if value is 1 e User can change password when desired if value is 1 Only the first two fields user name and password are required on each line of text If fields are not specified the default values are used Below is a sample of an import file user password 1 Test test test com 0 1 1 1 user2 password2 Test2 test2 test com 0 3 1 1 To import users 1 Inthe System Users screen select Action gt All Tasks gt Import User Password List 2 Select the file containing the user information PaperVision Enterprise will import the users and display
306. r enter any other value select Users enter ad hoc Index Field Values or select from list PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 147 W Chapter 5 Project Administration 12 To use pre populated index field value lists select the Add button to manually add values to the list Tip To enter multiple values separate each index value by the tilde character 13 To have the pre populated index field value list retrieved from the list provided in a PaperFlow data group select Get Index Field Value List from Data Group 14 As a data group is imported PaperVision Enterprise can verify that index field information has been provided in the incoming data By selecting Required to Continue Importing imports will immediately stop once a document that has a blank field is encountered This is particularly useful where a data group being imported has not been fully indexed Note Importing a PaperFlow data group with a new project that has not been created in PaperVision Enterprise will populate this option automatically if PaperFlow s Required for Processing option has been set Also this option does not apply to PVERM PaperVision Enterprise Report Management data groups as the file sets within them cannot be partially imported 15 If the index field should initiate a WorkFlow instance for a document select WorkFlow Trigger For more information see the descr
307. r numerous purposes such as the encryption of cached documents PaperVision Enterprise s encryption process utilizes the following design e Algorithm Rijndael AES 256 bit e Encryption Mode CBC Cipher Block Chaining e Padding Method FIPS81 Federal Information Processing Standards 81 scheme ISO10126 e Secret Key Generation User defined pass phrase is passed through the SHA 2 algorithm Secure Hashing Algorithm to generate a 256 bit hash PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 109 Creating a New Encryption Key To create a new encryption key 1 Select the entity and then select General Security gt Encryption Keys The Encryption Keys screen appears PaperVision Administration Console EEE Name KeyType o Entities WA Cache Key Rijndael AES 256 bit H lt Default Company 1 Decrypt Rijndael AES 256 bit El Backup Processing Wa Import Key Rijndael AES 256 bit Current Activity Data Storage A General Secur Security Policy i System Groups KZ System Users E Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs E Projects Report Management Errors Reports 1172572009 11 49AM 4 Encryption Keys 2 Click the New icon The New Encryption Key dialog box appears New Encryption Key Key Name Key Type Rijndael AES 256 bit Pass Phrase Description New Encryption Key 3 Enter the Key Name that they will use to i
308. r pages displaying a result grid and the Support_Files dndDefault css files are now located in the Support Files default_style css style sheet e Support Files admin_style css contains the style sheet attributes specific to the administration pages e Support Files printPreview xsl contains the style sheet and formatting attributes used when printing a result grid e Javascript dojo dsi themes tundra tundra css contains the style sheet and formatting of buttons check boxes date calendar controls dialog boxes etc PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 353 H Appendix D Customization and Integration Additional Customization The application can be further customized by modifying the App_GlobalResources globalSettings resx file located in the PVEWeb directory The XML based globalSettings resx file contains the following attributes e gblAboutName Defines the product name to display in the About window defaults to PaperVision lt sup gt amp reg lt sup gt Enterprise e gblAllowOverrideShowEntID Defines whether a user can override the gblLoginShowEntID setting by setting a cookie If set to false users will not be able to configure whether the Entity ID is displayed default true e gblAttachURL Defines the ServerRefURL property which is used by the PaperVision ActiveX Document Viewer controls for functions such as determining the URL presented for docu
309. ration and System Architecture Reference Guide 160 W Chapter 5 Project Administration 8 Click the Test Criteria button to validate your criteria You will be notified if any errors exist 9 Click OK Importing a Document Association Document associations that have been previously exported can be imported into the PaperVision Enterprise Administration Console To import a document association 1 Inthe Document Associations screen click the Import icon 2 Inthe Import Document Association dialog box locate the directory containing the document association 3 Select the XML file and then click Open 4 When the notification indicates the import was successful click OK Exporting a Document Association The export creates an XML document describing the association so it can be imported into another PaperVision Enterprise system To export a document association 1 Inthe Document Associations screen select the document association 2 Click the Export icon 3 Inthe Export Document Association dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 4 Enter the file name for the export 5 Click Save A message will notify you where the export was written Deleting Document Associations To delete document associations 1 Inthe Document Associations screen select one or more document associations 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterp
310. re Reference Guide 300 iz Chapter 10 WorkFlow 14 Repeat steps 7 through 13 for each additional pre condition Note In most scenarios only one pre condition will be required Defining WorkFlow Definitions To define a new WorkFlow 1 Click the Add icon and then select Add WorkFlow from the popup menu e The WorkFlow steps appear in graphical format e Details on defining worksteps are covered in the Worksteps Window topic 2 Once all of your worksteps have been defined click the Save button in the WorkFlow Designer As documents are imported or added to the system their index values will be compared with the WorkFlow s preconditions and if they match will automatically instantiate new WorkFlow instances Exporting WorkFlow Definitions To export a WorkFlow Definition 1 Select the WorkFlow Definitions option from the PaperVision Enterprise Administrator main page 2 Double click the WorkFlow to be exported 3 Click the Export B button and then select the export format from the Export drop down list Note Select the Export workflow to XML option to import a WorkFlow back into PaperVison Enterprise w Export workflow to XML T Exportworkflow diagram to PDF lea Export workflow diagram to PNG Exportworkflow diagram to Visio WorkFlow Export Options 4 Navigate to the directory in which the exported WorkFlow diagram is to be stored 5 Click Save to store the WorkFlo
311. reen appears i Document Access Archives Available Archives Run Date Time Start Date Time End Date Time 2011 06 07 10 05 27 2011 05 27 13 54 19 2011 05 27 14 23 29 View Restore Archives 3 Select the archives and the click the Restore button 4 You will be warned that the archive will be permanently deleted once it has been successfully restored Click Yes to continue with the restore operation and subsequent deletion 5 If you are restoring document access archives the system will first scan the archives being restored to ensure that all of the projects in the archives still exist under the same name as when the archive was created If projects have been renamed or deleted you will be prompted to select an existing project to map the entries into 7s Map Missing Project Map Missing Project PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 335 a Chapter 11 Reports 6 Select the project map or select lt No Project Map gt and then click OK The project mappings are automatically saved to the local Digitech Systems Common Files PVDM INI file where PaperVision Enterprise was installed so you will not have to remap the project every time you attempt to restore archives Once all of the project mappings have been determined the archives will be restored Note If the PVDM INI file is edited after viewing a document and the edit affect
312. rent line with the previous line e blank space Inserts a single vertical space carriage return line feed and then outputs the remainder of the line e 0 zero Inserts two vertical spaces carriage returns line feeds and then outputs the remainder of the line e minus sign Inserts three vertical spaces carriage returns line feeds and then outputs the remainder of the line The remaining twelve codes are dynamic and are known as channels The action taken for each of the remaining twelve codes can be defined Channel 1 is the most common and by standards is generally used to indicate Top of Form PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 253 w Chapter 9 Report Management To configure ASA ANSI Channel Commands 1 Inthe Page tab select the ASA ANSI with Channel Commands detection method 2 Click the Configure button in the Page Detection section The ASA ANSI with Channel Commands dialog box appears ASAJANSI with Channel Commands Page De m Control Code Settings Start Column i Column width f Strip Codes D Skip to Channel Codes Channel Action 1 MovetoLine z 2 Ignore No Action v Action Value i e a e ed eb fe ee ff p p p o ras i a D o ASA ANSI with Channel Commands Page Detection PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 254 a Chapter 9
313. res of PaperVision Enterprise allow you to easily expand your system by adding additional licenses as well as assign licenses to different entities within the system Also Named licenses assigned to a specific workstation as opposed to concurrent licenses can be assigned to their appropriate system workstation To view the Licensing screen select Global Administration gt Licensing gt PaperVision Administration Console DEMO Action Help Eafe Global Administration Product Version Quantity SerialNumber Assigned Entity License Date Automation Service Status tl Advanced Admin Pack 30 DayDemo 01 00 1 00002 lt Default Company gt 2011 11 22 Ei Deletion Queue e Enterprise WorkFlow 30 Day Demo 01 00 1 00001 lt Default Company gt 2011 11 22 A Email Queue ia Enterprise User License 30 Day Demo 10 00 50 00000 lt Default Company gt 2011 11 22 G3 Global Administrators H Import H a Maintenance g8 Migration Jobs gt Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings H E Entities 11 22 2011 3 14 PM Licensing Adding a New License You can add a new license via the internet or by contacting Digitech Systems Technical Support team If you are integrating with PaperVision Capture a global administrator can also add licenses in the PaperVision Capture Administration Console PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 38 w Chapter 2 Glob
314. ription User operations instruct the user to perform a task Once the user has completed the task the user will click on the task to mark it as completed User operations have the following options Require Confirmation End user will have to select OK from a message box that will appear when the task is complete Message Specifies the message or question that is displayed in message box This task type causes the server if this is an automated task or the client s computer to execute the specified command line program This task type has the following options Path Specifies the full path and file name of the command to execute Operation Specifies the Shell operation to perform Parameters Specifies the parameters that are passed to the PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 309 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow Task Type Description command line when executing the command The following Parameter Tags can be used for both automated and client tasks WF ENTITYID Entity ID WF WSINSTDOCID WorkFlow Instance Document ID WF WFINSTID WorkFlow Instance ID WF WSINSTID Workstep Instance ID WF PROJID Project ID WF WFDEFID WorkFlow Definition ID WF WENAME WorkFlow Definition Name WF WSDEFID Workstep Definition ID WF WSNAME Workstep Definition Name WF CURRENTDATETIME Current Date Time in yyyy mm dd hh nn ss format WF DOCINDEX FieldName
315. rise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 161 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Editing the Properties of a Document Association To edit the properties of a document association 1 Inthe Document Associations screen click the Properties icon The Document Association Properties dialog box appears F Document Association 4 Properties Association Name Company Name Search Project Human Resources v Search Criteria Employee ID Company Name Payee Search Type Sort By Or Employee ID z OK Cancel Document Association Properties 2 Make the necessary changes to the document association and then click OK PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 162 a Chapter 5 Project Administration Security Access PaperVision Enterprise offers the ability to limit access to the different functionality such as printing and emailing within a project Additionally administrators can limit which fields can be viewed searched and altered Note Security rights are cumulative users accumulate individual rights as well as all rights assigned to any group s of which they are a member Security Rights The following security rights can be applied to document functions annotations audit reviews records retention destruction settings and folders in PaperVision Enterprise View Documents This setting gran
316. rkFlow icon Description 0 Resets the Zoom feature to the default settings E Scales the WorkFlow Definition to fit the size of the window Scales the current WorkFlow diagram to the width of the screen aie one a Car e ae e Ca e OOO E Define Worksteps for a WorkFlow Definition 1 Click the WorkFlow Definitions 2 Select an existing WorkFlow definition and click the WorkFlow Properties icon The WorkFlow Designer screen displays 3 Click the Add icon and then select Add Workstep Tip You can also right click on an existing Workstep and select the operation from the context menu PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 303 i racking Index Pre Conditions OO WorkSteps Get Invoice racking Invoice OP WorkSteps A Get kg Process 2 a g Process Inv a B test b 8 s 9P ep Add Workstep Spe cut E Copy Paste x Delete Right Clicking a Workstep Context Menu Note The new workstep will automatically be linked to the currently selected workstep This helps you quickly design your layout and also allows you to change the workstep links at a later time TIETE B e Tracking Index Pre Cond E OO WorkSteps Get In eB Tracking Invo OO WorkSteps Lig Proce Proce B test 4 Optionally enter a description for the new Workstep
317. rt eeeeeeeeeeereeeeee 331 32 W web file cache URL wo eeceeeeeceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeneens 59 web vs application servers esceseeseeereeees 354 Wildcard searches 364 WorkFlow automation service operations cceeee 63 PLANTING gt s305scsscsstecgsspenstsiesnseeesenecuiniiesteteess 292 terMiNOlOy eeeeceeeseecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeens 288 91 WorkFlow definition ccccsesceeseereeereeerees 288 WorkFlow definitions Configuring ceeececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeees 301 21 deactivating oii scsceccveieteeetbaseedsbviavinesbeseansones 323 de letmo eres orreen a a renter eereee erates 324 CCIE ets eer E ERE rR 322 EXPONE 503 isso ave eann ITERE a 324 MOTO aE AES TT 325 introduction ssise ssesississisrisssosrscssesrisensrsssssisses 300 WorkFlow History report ccecceseeceee 333 34 WorkFlow instance seeen 288 WorkFlow instance history ccceeeeetees 336 WorkFlow pre conditions document selection methods cece 303 WorkFlow Status report cceeeeeseeereees 335 37 WorkFlow trigger cceccesceseceteesteeseeeeeees 64 303 workgroup system design scenario 0 0 355 workstep GeRMINON isi is hie R 289 workstep defimition cccecesceeseereeeseeeseeeeens 289 workstep instance definition s ssiri n 289 workstep owner definiti n sssrinin e 291 workstep participant ssseeseeesessesereersreere sree 290 workstep post conditions Ce
318. rthermore http https traffic can if desired easily traverse a firewall allowing you to place your web servers in your DMZ and place your application servers which communicate with the databases and document stores into a separate secured network Data Segregation PaperVision Enterprise s use of databases segregates all of the data for one entity from the data for a different entity In a hosting environment this is a key factor in ensuring that one entity cannot access another s data A feature unique to PaperVision Enterprise is its ability to handle this segregated data that may exist in separate physical databases or even on separate physical servers from a centralized Global Administration console rather than requiring that each entity be managed from its own instance of an application Data Encryption PaperVision Enterprise provides data encryption services using the industry standard AES 256 encryption algorithm Administrators can define their own encryption keys pass phrases and apply encryption to data within their security policy This ensures that the raw data can never be accessed by unauthorized users PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 343 Appendix C System Architecture PaperVision Enterprise derives great strength through its flexibility It can be installed on a single stand alone workstation or it can be distributed to tens of thousands or more users
319. rtinent information has already been extracted PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 233 a Chapter 9 Report Management Anchors Anchors are used to identify regions on a page Anchors can either be Fixed or Floating Once an anchor is located the region boundaries are determined by the region s offset from the anchor in columns and rows Fixed Anchors Fixed anchors are always located in the same position on the page distanced from the top left corner Floating Anchors Floating anchors are located by searching for a sequence of data within the page The anchor is placed wherever the sequence is located the region is identified and index values are extracted The engine then repeats this process until the sequence can no longer be located Floating anchors can only be located within their Floating Anchor Sequence Range an area of the page in which the sequence search is to be performed Floating anchors can also have a Validator Sequence Once a floating anchor is located the system checks to see if the validator sequence can be located within the specified Validator Sequence Range If not the anchor is discarded Validator sequences allow a secondary check to occur when the anchor is located Fields Fields are used to extract document index fields or detail data from regions Field locations are always fixed within their region relative to the top left corner
320. ruction x m Notifications 7 Send email notification when documents are scheduled for destruction Email Address es rrr m Destruction Review Automatically destroy documents C Require document review prior to destruction Email Address es FO List Link URL Co F Reviewer specifies destruction schedule m Destruction Offset Destroy fo minute s after documents are identified Records Retention Policy General PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 188 a Chapter 6 Records Retention General Settings General settings for Records Retention Policies include general classification settings notifications destruction review and destruction offset properties Policy Name This setting specifies the name of the policy within the policy set Status This setting specifies whether or not this policy is active Inactive policies are not evaluated Policy Type This setting specifies whether documents will be evaluated for destruction deleted or retention locked Send email notification when documents are scheduled for destruction This setting specifies that an email should be sent to the designated Email Address es indicating that documents have been scheduled for destruction Multiple email addresses can be specified by separating them with commas This email is sent at the time that the documents destruction date t
321. s The pattern describes one or more strings to match when searching a body of text The regular expression serves as a template for matching a character pattern to the string being searched Examples Syntax d 3 d 2 d 4 Locates Social Security Number such as 123 12 1234 Syntax s Locates Blank lines Syntax 0 1 9 1 012 0 1 9 12 0 9 3 01 19 20 0 9 2 Locates Various date formats such as 12 24 97 12 24 97 and 12 24 97 Syntax Sun Mon T ues hurs Fri day Wed nesday Sat urday T ue hu r Locates Days of the week in both Sunday and Sun formats Syntax 0 9 4 4 Locates 16 digit credit card numbers Syntax SMITH JONES Locates Any occurrence of SMITH followed by JONES with or without characters between the two names Additional information on regular expressions can be located at http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us script56 html js56reconIntroductionToRegularExpressions asp PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 358 Appendix F Regular Expressions Metacharacters The following table contains a complete list of metacharacters and their behavior in the context of regular expressions Character Description Marks the next character as a special character a literal a back reference or an octal escape e For example n matches the character n n matche
322. s e CURRENTDATETIME 96H Current Date Time minus 96 hours e CURRENTDATETIME 900N Current Date Time plus 900 minutes e CURRENTDATETIME 120S Current Date Time plus 120 seconds PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 158 Chapter 5 Project Administration Creating a New Document Association You can create a new Document Association that links one or more index fields or specific index values in one project to a second project You can then create subsequent document associations for each project in your entity Alternatively you can assign wildcards as search criteria if you have not already selected a specific index field name or index value For more information see Appendix E Search Criteria To create a new document association 1 Expand the appropriate project and then select Document Associations The Document Associations screen appears a PaperVision Administration Console SEE Action Help 3k 58 2 mi Backup Jobs Name Associated Project E Processing Logs Ey Colorado Accounts Sales 8 Current Activity F Company Name Human Resources Data Storage Ert Local Accounts Sales General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs Projects Accounts Receivable Enhanced Auditing A Ghee ciations HA Document Security Levels 3 Integration Definitions 3 Security Access f Directory Manager Jobs 5g Records Destruction Lis
323. s orescence aenur 106 deletion qUCUC ssr 14 18 deletion queue item manually running 19 detail Sets srera are n ieee 10 Directory Manager jobs s s s 178 CLEANING sorie enire EErEE 180 83 deleting 5 sic ncaccindscacnosaeinase nae 184 Editing 03 cess casdicaseseagianeiseiesseasd ensins 184 disabling data group sizing ce eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 50 disclosure reasons adding oo eeeeecceesceseceteeeseceseeeeecseeeeenseeaes 152 53 disclosure recipients adding oo eecceeceseceteceeeceecaeeeseeeeeeneeseeeerens 154 Document Access report eee 326 27 document associations ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 156 CPO ALM D seisein nienie 157 59 deleting oc c sscccacesscscacesecssesedsesvaseseetcaceserieasesee 159 CMM sisisi ii aisn 160 EXPONE isisisi siseseproeniiissis krisi s saasa Spa 159 IMPONE is sad5 ss csdaes ipesbesceadsnnthiscondssinesbaseanseas 159 document files Report Management 232 document grants eceeeeeeseceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 88 deleting nissepige iccastseedeegnss ieee sisscheasisutees tales 88 document indexing Report Management 233 34 document security level APPLY Gs esezescaneozs sei seeseviordecblenaeeseevicuestoestennts 176 deleting es aces scceaders sedyivascGahtess riens 176 Ann e E T fete errr reer tee 177 submitting to be applied as Maintenance Queue a a E E eases estes ebesaees 176 document security levels CLEANS A E E dein aes 172 75 document selection methods
324. s a newline character e The sequence matches and matches Matches the position at the beginning of the input string Matches the position at the end of the input string Matches the preceding character or subexpression zero or more times For example zo matches z and zoo is equivalent to 0 Matches the preceding character or subexpression one or more times For example zo matches zo and zoo but not z is equivalent to 1 Matches the preceding character or subexpression zero or one time For example do es matches the do in do or does is equivalent to 0 1 n is a nonnegative integer matches exactly n times For example 0 2 does not match the o in Bob but matches the two o s in food n is a nonnegative integer matches at least n times For example o 2 does not match the o in Bob and matches all the o s in foooood o 1 is equivalent to o 0 0 is equivalent to o m and n are nonnegative integers where n lt m matches at least n and at most m times For example o 1 3 matches the first three o s in fooooood o 0 1 is equivalent to o Note Do not place a space between the comma and the numbers PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 359 a Appendix F Regular Expressions Character Description When this character immediately follows any of the other
325. s as XML lends itself to being manipulated for that type of task To export a report 1 While viewing a report select the report items to export 2 Click the Export Selection icon 3 Inthe Export Report dialog box locate the directory where the export will be written 4 Enter the file name for the export 5 Click Save A message will notify you where the export will be written Archiving a Report Range Archives provide administrators a simple way to free up database space while maintaining data to be reviewed at a later time When an archive is created an XML document is created with all of the report data for the specified date range Then the data that has been archived is removed from the active system Archives are not available for WorkFlow status and records retention destruction reports since they represent actual live data To archive a report 1 While viewing a report select the Archive Range icon The Archive Range dialog box appears 4 Archive Range Select the From and To date values to define the range you would like to archive From Date Time 2011 05 01 00 00 00 To Date Time 201 1 05 31 23 59 59 i Cancel Archive Range 2 Enter the date time ranges and then click OK You will be prompted to ensure you want to archive the selected range 3 Select Yes to archive the items PaperVision Enterprise will archive the requested items and then run your displayed report again PaperV
326. s could potentially cause issues if a directory manager job starts running while files are still being transmitted Selecting this option causes each job to run only when a file called dirmgr submit or lt packagefilename gt submit is located in the root of the job s path The contents of this file are not important in fact the file can be completely blank as it is not imported as part of the job PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 52 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Clear package workspace prior to each use This setting causes the package workspace to be cleared prior to importing a data group from a package file running a backup job or running a directory manager job This is particularly useful when an administrator is encountering failures on these types of operations that are leaving the failed data in the package workspace Max Attachment Data Group Size MB This setting specifies the maximum size in MB of an attachment data group before a new one is automatically created If this value is zero no size limit is enforced Max Backup Package Content Size MB This setting specifies the maximum size in MB of content data placed into a backup package during a project level backup Once the maximum size is reached a new package file is created Note This setting does not specify the size of the package file but the size of its contents
327. s of GB of memory scaling up Additionally PaperVision has the capability to spread its processing requirements across numerous computers scaling out PaperVision products are designed and tested for specific operating systems not hardware environments Numerous customers successfully run PaperVision in virtual environments including VMWare and Microsoft s Hyper V While this technology has matured over the years we have seen issues with common software other than PaperVision not operating properly or efficiently because of the virtualized environment In the cases that we have witnessed the issue was with the virtual environment not the software product If our technical support believes that the hardware environment including virtualized environments is contributing to an operational or performance issue they may request that you assess that the issue under a different or non virtualized environment If you do intend to use a virtualized environment for your PaperVision implementation be sure to carefully consider the implications of running in a shared environment Remember you are not just sharing processors and memory you are also sharing network and disk resources with the other virtualized environments on the same hardware Installation and Configuration The accompanying PaperVision Enterprise Installation and Getting Started Guide provides comprehensive documentation on installing and configuring both PaperVision Enterpr
328. s the Brower Based Viewer such as adding editing the redirect statement HS must be restarted to ensure the browser based viewer detects the change PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 336 Appendix A Additional Help Resources At Digitech Systems we provide multiple resources to help find answers to your questions Technical Support Contact our legendary customer support staff Monday through Friday between the hours of 8 a m and 6 p m Central Time for answers to your questions about our products Direct 402 484 7777 Toll free 877 374 3569 Email support digitechsystems com Help on the Web MyDSI is an interactive tool for all Digitech Systems customers Log in to http mydsi digitechsystems com to download product updates license purchased software view support contract renewals and check the status of your software support cases and requests User Forums Log in to http forums digitechsystems com to exchange answers and ideas with other users in our moderated community Knowledge Base Log in to http kb digitechsystems com to search our extensive Knowledge Base for articles on all Digitech Systems products PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 337 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security A great deal of effort has been taken to create a system capable of addr
329. scecesccesssccecsescescesssseseness 185 Records Retention Policy S tS rts sereen eaen osas taaa buss rE AERE E EE eA E E REEERE Ri 185 Records Retention Policies cccccecscesscessceseesseessecseceaecseecaeecaeecseseaeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeesaeenaes 188 Records Retention Policy Set Configuration cccccsscsseseceeeeeceseeeceseceeeseceeeeceeveeceaeeneeaeens 193 Records Destr ction Lists ciii csscsciecsscstsses caecbacvaseaszcnedessagestencascbbesnsfavsesoaesdeseegiseavscacesvccatensaces 199 Chapter 7 Message Captures ccscssssssssssccssccsssecssccscsscccsscecesccesssccecscccescessssceseness 201 PUE SES aea a E E E E a a AE A N 201 Message Capture Policy Sets cccecccccccsssessecesecesececeaeceeecseecaeecseeeaeeneeseeseeesaeeneeenaeenaeenaeenaes 203 Message Capture Policies cccccccessesssesssessceeecesecesecaecaecseecaeeeseeeseenseeeeseeseaeenseseaeenaeenaeentes 207 Chapter 8 Integration Definitions csccsssssscccscscccscecssccessscecseccesceeseseeeness 220 Integration Definition Settings ccccccecccssecesecssecseceseceecaeecseecseceaeeneceeeeeeeeeenseseeenaeenaeenaes 220 Creating a New Integration Definition cccecccecceeseceecececseeeseeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeenseenseenaeenaeenaes 223 Chapter 9 Report Management cccssssscssscssssssscssssessscssscssscsssscsscsescesooesees 231 FANGS CUS oases cape ceSete es cares pense ever cove sere E cere se Secs E 231 Docu
330. se Deleting Maintenance Queue Items You can delete maintenance queue items that have not been processed This operation can be performed on a job has accidentally been queued to be processed To delete maintenance queue items 1 Select one or more items 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 42 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Maintenance Logs Maintenance Logs provide a recorded history of maintenance jobs performed by the PaperVision Automation Service To view maintenance log entries select Global Administration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Logs PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Ei Automation Service Status Era Deletion Queue ksa A Email Queue Era i Global Administrators Import Licensing Hg Maintenance a Maintenance Queue Big Maintenance Logs oO 26 Migration Jobs Notifications Process Locks 4 Report Management Errors System Settings E Entities gt 5 31 2011 1 35PM oy Maintenance Logs PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 43 iz Chapter 2 Global Administration Viewing a Maintenance Log Entry To view a maintenance log entry 1 Select the appropriate maintenance log entry and then click the Properties EJ icon 2 The Maintenance Log Properties dialog box appears
331. sessosossosoecseososeossesesesssossssssssssee pAb n Arae niaan a taa e a nanih A a tia a aie d V Require web clients to use the browser plugin Enable Integrated Windows Authentication Disable encrypted document grant URL s MV Graphically sign image based documents Disable signature duplication when signing image based documents Session Cleanup Max session idle time minutes 20 Encrypt cached documents for plugin Key Name kNo Encryption Me Data Group Encryption Key Name kNo Encryption v nter Process Communications Pass Phrase peee Core Entity Security Policy General Require all session requests to originate from same source This setting requires all session activity to originate from the source of the original login This ensures that someone cannot take over your session to gain access to your documents When you log into PaperVision Enterprise it tracks the IP address or computer name that was used to gain access Every time you request information from the server it checks to verify that your request originated from the same IP address or computer name If not PaperVision Enterprise denies the request and sends a notification to the system administrators PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 113 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Require web clients to use the browser plug in When a user views a document
332. set Destroy fo minute s after documents are identified Records Retention Policy General 8 Configure the policy and then click OK to save the policy For descriptions of each policy setting see the section on Records Retention Policies 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for any additional policies 10 In the New Records Retention Policy Set dialog box click OK to save the policy set PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 196 w Chapter 6 Records Retention 11 Select Yes to save the policy set and make it the current Active Policy Set superseding any existing policy sets Note Any information that was selected in the Clear setting will be cleared immediately Importing a Records Retention Policy Set PaperVision Enterprise includes the ability to import a policy set that was created by previously exporting the policy set The import process will import the entire configuration To import a policy set 1 Inthe Records Retention Policy Sets screen click the Import icon 2 Select the XML file and then click Open 3 Click OK Deleting Records Retention Policy Sets Both active and superseded policy sets can be deleted When the active policy set is deleted the most recent policy set left remaining with the highest ID number will become the active policy set To delete policy sets 1 Inthe Records Retention Policy Sets screen sel
333. setting you can also right click on the appropriate setting and then select the operation from the context menu To create a new project 1 Select the entity and then select Projects The Projects screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Action Help E Global Administration Name 2 Entities 3 Accounts Receivable lt Default Company gt 1 al 3 Human Resources Backup Processing a Sales E Current Activity Data Storage E General Security G Message Capture Policy Sets S Migration Jobs ey Human Resources ey Sales Report Management Errors Reports 11 13 2003 3 32 AM Projects PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 144 E Chapter 5 Project Administration 2 Click the New icon The New Project dialog box appears 7s New Project Project Name Max Revisions jo m Document Index Fields FieldName Field Type Field Format Add Edit Remove i A a Cancel New Project 3 Enter the new Project Name 4 Enter the Max Revisions value This value specifies how many revisions of a document are kept when a document is checked back in oldest versions are automatically removed If this value is set to zero all revisions are kept 5 If you intend to use this project to hold messages processed by the PaperVision Capture Server click the Add Email Capture Fields EF icon to have the pre de
334. sineres iiianoe iaia 9 entity properties attach to existing database tables 0 68 Batch path issiron snrnid 68 COMLACIS vis scccteeseteessvsstresiceuseessotennssccuaseesenseeee 70 data group patho ee seeeceeeeesteeeeeeceeeeeeneees 68 database settings cseeeceeeceteereeteeereeeeneees 68 disable entity i ccescef secs aaiesstseteascn eres 68 disable utilization tracking ceeeeeeeeeeeees 69 full text path cece eeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteenteeneees 68 Gem tall cc evdeyeedesisrdess naa aae aee eNi 67 import SCttINYGS 0 eeeeeeecseeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeenees 71 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 381 MATIC reese asses E RS RE 67 notification method cceeeesceseesteeseeeneeees 71 entity security policy account lockout settings 114 15 authentication settings ce ceeeeeeeees 115 16 general settings 0 ceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 112 13 modifying seireks vainen 117 password settings sssseeseeesesersereee seee 116 17 exporting Document Associations seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 159 import log entries 33 Integration Definitions 229 Message Capture Policy Sets cesses 219 range of import log entries 34 Records Retention Policy Sets ce 197 Report Management jobS ccceceeseeees 287 MEPOTUS a i2ilesiseieeevsndsadeeds chives EERE 341 WorkFlow definitions ccecseeseereeeeees 324 F fields Rep
335. ssoesees 318 Document ACCES Senier nnee EE denies E EEE EEEE EENEN EET 318 Records Retention Destruction sissie prenera ERE 320 System Operations Queries nsare E EE E E E E 322 MGA OTN nnn E N eeeceecteeets 323 WorkFlow History cecccesecsceeseeeseesseesecesecesecnsecaecaeceaecaaecseecaeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeseeeeenseseeenseenaeenaes 325 WOrkFlOW Status iseen a ei ere eae E ei eiai 327 Are MVE Se aiani e E e tea E E E E ets 334 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide iv Table of Contents Appendix A Additional Help Resources ssscssscssscssssessccssecssessssssecsssesseesoes 337 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security scssssssssssseses 338 Scalability and Reliability 0 0 ccc eeccesecssecseeeseeeseeseecaeecneeeeeceeeeeeseceseceeeceaeceaecaeceecaeeeseeaes 338 WED SELVICES E E E oveguvss sicudest daceveasulestunc E A 340 SECUTI o oee N RE E ceayevis Qandets des ieeas E E 342 Appendix C System Architecture cssccsscsssscssscssscsssssssscsssssssssssssssesssessssesesenes 344 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Express Edition cccesccesecssecsseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneenseenaeenseenaeenaes 344 ATLOMATOM SELVELS pernaira a nnp ni R S AE RE E tay oecds cbiabaastssaseds obs 345 Web vs Application Servers cccceccecssesssesscsseceeceseceaecaecseecaeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeseeeaeenseeeaeenaeenaeenaes 346 System Design Scenarios 0 c cccccescc
336. submit a security level to be applied as a maintenance queue entry 1 Inthe Document Security Levels screen select one or more document security levels 2 Click the Submit to be Applied icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the submittal You will be notified that the maintenance queue entries have been created and how many document security levels were applied Deleting Document Security Levels Deleting document security levels will delete the level so it cannot be applied to any additional documents and will remove the level from all documents it is already applied to To delete a document security level 1 Inthe Document Security Levels screen select one or more document security levels 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Editing an Existing Document Security Level To edit an existing document security level 1 Inthe Document Security Levels screen select the appropriate document security level 2 Click the Properties icon 3 Inthe Edit Document Security Level dialog box make the necessary modifications to the document security level 4 Click OK to save the changes PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 177 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Directory Manager Jobs Directory Manager jobs automate the batch import process of documents from any source media Imported documents can be automatically indexed by specific directory na
337. t Management Job File Settings 7 Modify the file settings to meet the requirements of your data files For descriptions of each setting see the section on File settings 8 Select the Line tab The Report Management Job Line dialog box appears PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 281 a Chapter 9 Report Management New Report Management Job General File Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Line Delimiter Type CR LF 13 10 or x0D 04 v Fixed Line Width E D Line Pre Processing Leading Characters to Remove fo Leading Spaces to Insert fo Line Post Processing Leading Characters to Remove fo Leading Spaces to Insert fo Maximum Line Width fo Cancel New Report Management Job Line Settings 9 Modify the line configuration settings to meet the requirements of your data files For descriptions of each setting see the section on Line settings PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 282 a Chapter 9 Report Management 10 Select the Page tab The Report Management Job Page dialog box appears New Report Management Job General File Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Page Detection Detection Method Max Lines per Page Configure Page Preamble Discard Type None x Quantity to Discard fo Expand to Max Lines E Max Lines pe
338. t Message When enabled a test message is sent to an email address to verify the settings are correct Attachment Path This path is used by the automated email engine to temporarily store email attachments until the email is actually sent This path should be accessible from all PaperVision Enterprise servers processing sending and generating i e through automated WorkFlow tasks emails Note If Email Queue items are deleted either via sending the email or deleting them manually their attachments are removed from the Attachment Path Global Administrator Notification Method Notifications can be received in one of three manners e Publish Notification Notifications are published into the PaperVision database and accessed via the Administration Console e Send Email Notifications are sent via email to the global administrator s email address e Publish Notification and Send Email Both of the above listed options are used for each notification PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 59 i Chapter 2 Global Administration System Settings Local Local settings are specific to the local machine on which they are configured If multiple application servers or automation servers are installed the local settings must be configured for each server EE System Settings General Data Replication Email Notifications Local m Local Settings Web Fi
339. t consists of one or more policies Each policy is evaluated in the order in which it is displayed When policy sets are saved the data that can be cleared can be specified which allows policy sets to begin evaluating documents as if no destruction and or lock date time has been specified e Nothing specifies that no destruction or retention information should be cleared e Destruction Information specifies that all destruction dates destruction information and destruction lists for all documents in this project will be cleared no destruction scheduled for any documents e Lock Information specifies that all lock dates and lock information for all documents in this project will be cleared no locks maintained for any documents PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 185 iz Chapter 6 Records Retention e Destruction and Lock Information specifies that all destruction dates destruction information destruction lists lock dates and lock information for all documents in this project will be cleared no destruction scheduled or locks maintained for any documents A Maintenance Queue item is created when policy sets are saved causing the project s most recent policy set to be processed When the Records Retention Automated operation is not scheduled to run often i e once a day policy changes will be processed quickly as long as the Maintenance Queue operation has been scheduled
340. t for 148 PV ESearchUR Livsccsscscstesserectersensevdvnretess 360 388 R Raise COM Event workstep task type 315 records destruction lists cscsseeeeereeteeneeees 199 cleaning UP esse cesecscrtesecaseessevasiees cba tetaeeacvieaenns 200 Ge let soc esecisecestatieckivseesievatiees eseesiciieiensts 199 records retention MTEC O MUCHO eissioes tesisini 185 policy Sets isc fesvcccs waciveicvacessessetees deveseeeeets 185 86 records retention policies 188 196 198 criteria settings eeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 191 92 general settings ee seeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeererenee 190 records retention policy set activating a superceded eceeseeeseeseeerenee 198 configuration ce eeeeseeeceteceeeeetteeeneeeres 193 97 Edit Esoporen vannan piaia an iE anaes 198 Records Retention policy sets d letinp ssrin raian es anaE n 197 CXPOTING seere sisii eroien iina anio res Ear EEs na 197 Records Retention Policy Sets POTIN E enang e E a NE 197 Records Retention Destruction Report 328 29 regions Report Management cseceeeeee 233 regular CXPLeSSIONS cecceeseeeeeeeeeteeeees 366 70 replication destination path eseeeeeeeeeeeee 55 replication journal entry path eee eeeeeeeeee 56 report archives TESTONINE vieiis R i E 343 VIS WUD srice ioannis 342 PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 383 Report Management
341. t page of the last document pi oo Shows or hides the overlay for the current page Scales the overlay image to the width of the screen Scales the overlay image to the height of the screen Scales the overlay image to fit on the screen PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 271 Form Overlays Form Overlays settings allow you to add edit remove and reorder form overlays for the report management job Report Management Job Properties General File Line Page Fields Breaks Form Overlays Form Overlays Report Management Job Form Overlays pepe hgh MeO peo ep atten fo gion ee a Wo ee eae ee ee o OR PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 272 wW Chapter 9 Report Management Configuring Form Overlays PaperVision Enterprise Report Management includes the ability to perform form overlays which overlays the parsed page text onto a blank form creating an image that reproduces the original printed page An unlimited number of overlay forms are supported per report management job Each form overlay has a set of rules that are applied to it In order for a form to be selected for a page all of the rules must be met When a page of a document is retrieved PaperVision Enterprise will evaluate all of the rules pertaining to each form overlay in the order that they were listed until a form overlay is identified whose rules
342. tation that will monitor the import path Select Any to allow any automation server to monitor the path If you want to assign a specific automation server or workstation proceed to the next step 4 Select Specific to either manually enter the workstation or browse to select the workstation that will load the data from the path You can enter or select a specific server name i e Serverl or workstation instance in the ServerName_Instance format i e assigning Serverl_13 would allow import paths to be monitored by instance 13 on Serverl1 5 If you wish to temporarily disable the monitoring of this path remove the check mark from the Active setting 6 Click OK Editing an Existing Monitored Import Path To edit an existing monitored import path 1 Double click the monitored import path in the list The Monitored Import Path Properties dialog box appears Es Monitored Import Path Properties Path serverl PVE_Import_Path es Workstation Monitored Import Path Properties 2 Ifapplicable change the import path workstation settings and active status 3 Click OK Deleting an Existing Monitored Import Path To delete monitored import paths 1 Highlight one or more monitored import paths 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 30 iz Chapter 2 Global Administration Modifying Multiple Monitored
343. te a generic global document security level which locks down all of the documents Then an administrator can create individual document security levels and grant users access to those levels they are required to access PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 172 Creating a New Document Security Level To create a new document security level 1 Expand the appropriate project and select Document Security Levels The Document Security Levels screen appears PaperVision Administration Console efx Action Help Ele Global Administration a Entities i Payments Over 1000 lt Default Company gt 1 ges Payments Under 1000 El Backup Processing El Current Activity Data Storage E General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets a Migration Jobs 5 4 Projects Accounts Receivable g Enhanced Auditing A as ae Regain Defintions Ss Security Access f Directory Manager Jobs 5g Records Destruction Lists EB Records Retention Policy Sets Report Management Jobs 2 WorkFlow Definitions r 1171372009 3 10 AM Document Security Levels PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 173 2 Click the New 2 icon The New Document Security Level General dialog box appears New Document Security Level f General Criteria Project Name Accounts Receivable Level Name Grant Access to
344. tecture Reference Guide 306 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow 14 Click OK to save the new Workstep The new Workstep will be added to the WorkFlow definition 15 Repeat steps 1 to 13 for each additional Workstep Linking and Removing Links from worksteps After you have defined the worksteps you may need to link them to designate the flow of the worksteps Worksteps are linked from another workstep In other words when you select a workstep and choose to link it you will then select the workstep that will have previous control To link Worksteps 1 Select the Worksteps that need to be linked 2 Click the Link Workstep A icon jis WorkFlow Designer koka o DORIS FP APPOHAM EOM AAL Tracking Index Pre Conditions OF WorkSteps 8 Get Process Invoice B Tracking Invoice esse Select Workstep The selected Worksteps are linked PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 307 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow G Workflow Designer ete ba ozs FPF PPORHB sgen sA O B Tracking hoe Stan sees Pre Cordbons AP wip 2 Oce Process Invoice T E Trcting bvcice Linked Worksteps 3 Select Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any additional links that need to be created 4 To remove any unnecessary links select the linked Worksteps and then click the Delete Link amp icon Defining Workstep Tasks After you have graphically defined the wor
345. ted by the system to let you know that certain events have taken place that may need your attention Some of the notifications that are automatically generated include e A data group was successfully loaded Entity Administrators e A migration job was submitted Entity and Global Administrators e A migration job has finished running Submitting User Entity and Global Administrators e A purge failed Global Administrators e Login attempts were made to a locked account Entity Administrators e Login attempts were made when all licenses were in use e A workstep instance has been unprocessed for too long Defined User Group e A session s source IP address or host name changed in the middle of the session if the administrator has prohibited this in the Security Policy To view all notifications select the entity and then select Current Activity gt Notifications a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration Date Time Recipient_ Source Entities 2011 06 01 12 00 16 ADMIN PYlmport ImportD ataGroup lt SYSTEM AUTOMATION gt lt Default Company gt 1 2011 06 01 12 00 15 ADMIN PY Import ImportD ataGroup lt SYSTEM AUTOMATION gt Ga Backup Processing 2011 06 01 12 00 10 ADMIN P lmport ImportD ataGroup lt SYSTEM AUTOMATION gt By Current Activity 2011 05 31 13 25 59 ADMIN ADMIN iC fi Current Sessions 2011 05 27 13 51 55 ADMIN P Import ImportD ataGroup ADMIN a Document Gra
346. teps First security levels are defined Second those security levels are applied to documents When one or more security levels are applied to a document that document is no longer accessible to all users with security access to the project Instead the users must also have access to at least one of the document security levels assigned to the document A document can have an unlimited number of document security levels assigned to it Applying document security levels can be accomplished in one of three manners e As documents are imported or added if any Automatic Selection Criteria has been defined PaperVision Enterprise will automatically apply the document security levels whose criteria matches the document s index values e Document security levels can be applied in bulk to all of the existing documents Any document that meets a level s Automatic Selection Criteria will have the level assigned to it e Document security levels can be applied manually Administrators can search for documents in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client select specific documents and then apply or remove specific security levels Administrators can easily detect documents that have been assigned document security levels since they are listed with a lock icon displayed next to the document in a search results list Document security levels can limit user access to only specific documents In order to accomplish this the administrator needs to crea
347. terprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 114 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Disable signature duplication when signing image based documents If enabled will keep old signatures from being carried forward on image based documents Max Session Idle Time This setting specifies the number of minutes that a user can sit idle before the automation service automatically kills the user session logs the user out of the system This value cannot exceed value assigned in the General System Settings by the global administrator Encrypt cached documents for plug in Key Name When a PaperVision Enterprise application server caches documents to be accessed by remote users it temporarily places them at a location where the remote PaperVision Enterprise plug in can retrieve the document from and then remove it Setting the Key Name to the desired encryption key will cause the application server to use the specified key to encrypt the document that is being placed at the cache location The remote plug in will retrieve the encrypted document and decrypt it using the same key If a remote user is not using the PaperVision plug in the documents will not be encrypted as there is no mechanism for those users to decrypt the documents Data Group Encryption Key Name This setting specifies the encryption key that is to be used to encrypt data as it is stored encryption of data at rest See the section on Data Group En
348. th for all Entities 2 Select the directory or path where the new data group path will reside 3 Enter the name of the path in the File Name field and then click Save PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 17 w Chapter 2 Global Administration Automation Service Status The Automation Service Status displays the current status of all automation servers connected to the PaperVision Enterprise database allowing you to determine what automated processes are currently in progress You can configure multiple automation service processes to run on a single physical machine In this scenario each automation server process is specified in the MACHINENAME INSTANCE format To change the number of automation services that can be run simultaneously launch the PaperVision Configuration Utility and then enter the value in the Simultaneous Processes field For more information on the PaperVision Configuration Utility see the accompanying PaperVision Enterprise Installation and Getting Started Guide You can also stop and start the automation service processing for any server by selecting the stop or start 8 icons after selecting an automation server Stopping the service operations does not stop the process itself rather the process receives a command to not perform further processing after it has finished its current operation a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Admi
349. the order and conditions under which they execute that are controlled by the WorkFlow engine to automate a business process WorkFlow WorkFlow Instance A WorkFlow or WorkFlow instance is a representation of a single enactment of a WorkFlow definition A WorkFlow definition is just that a definition and a WorkFlow instance is the live execution of that definition When a document is imported into PaperVision Enterprise the system may based on pre conditions spawn a WorkFlow instance of a WorkFlow definition In other words you may create a WorkFlow definition for a loan processing application but the WorkFlow instances are the live representations of loans as they are processed through that WorkFlow It is important to note that a single document can be active in multiple WorkFlow instances at the same time If the document is deleted from the system the WorkFlow instance will be transitioned to the end automatically with a history entry outlining that the document was deleted Pre Conditions Pre conditions define a set of rules based on document index criteria that are used to determine if documents should automatically spawn new WorkFlow instances when a document is added to the system via importing data groups or manually adding a new document A WorkFlow definition can contain multiple pre conditions Once a pre condition is met for a specific WorkFlow definition and the WorkFlow instance has been instantiated no additional pre c
350. the page s textual content will be overlaid TIF JPG GIF and PNG image file types are supported Setup Overlay This operation displays the Setup Overlay screen to configure the rendering of the form overlay PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 274 a Chapter 9 Report Management f Setup Overlay eare aell eS REPLACEMENT OF PRIOR CLAIM 12 01 1119 PAYORorsc amp r OVB NO XOA DSIFLOWCOM REGIONAL HosP IANN RALO 192 ANYSTRERT AVFMIF 2073144f1 psrrLonco mb 69500 1204 paea ae Fe erat tL 115 LAFAYE L IK RD 103 NURI HHAMP TUN HE USY62 p oes 115 LAFAYETTE RD 103 HORTHHAME TON HE 03962 0000 Payee Invoice Number Check Number Amount MATTHEWS SAMANTHA 20314461118 01061149 906 06 GUERRA RALPH 92053621 118 09111165 555 2 DATES SANDRA 92061182118 08181119 810 8 HENDERSON GREGORY 92133144118 06011166 921 11 VETTER CHARLES F 92153685118 06101118 894 8 BENNETT BRENDA L 92181031 118 10231119 30 00 Page 1 of 1 20314461 118 MATTHEWS SAMANTHA 01061149 906 06 Setup Overlay While PaperVision Enterprise Report Management allows you to explicitly set all of the values necessary to generate a well aligned form overlay it also offers the ability to graphically manipulate those settings providing you immediate feedback to your changes You can graphically move the position of the overlay text on the image altering th
351. them with a poe comma m Add New Disclosure Recipient PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 156 Chapter 5 Project Administration 3 Enter the new disclosure recipient You can enter multiple recipients by separating them with a comma 4 Click OK to save the new recipient s 5 Alternatively you can copy the disclosure recipients from another project s list so you do not have to enter them multiple times by selecting Copy The Copy Recipient List from Project dialog box appears Select the project from which the Disclosure Recipients should be copied Copy Recipient List from Project 6 Select the project from which to copy the disclosure recipient list and then click OK Any recipients that already exist in the list will be ignored 7 Click OK to save the disclosure recipient list PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 157 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Document Associations Document Associations allow users to view documents that are linked via common index fields or index values across multiple projects In the Administration Console you can link index fields or index values in one project to a second project When a user performs a document search in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client and subsequently views a document in either document viewer all associated documents meeting the search crit
352. tion ODP files e Quantum compression format when extracting CAB files e Self extracting archives created with WinZip WinRar and AllZip e Timestamps are preserved when files are extracted however there is no correction for Daylight Savings Time Q What document file formats are supported for native viewing within the Browser Based Viewer without requiring any additional software A The following file formats are supported for native viewing COLD ERM Formats e COLD documents DataFlow textual documents and PVERM COLD documents Image Formats e BMP Standard Windows format including OS 2 bitmap e CGM Computer Graphics Metafile e CLP Windows Clipboard e CUR Windows 3 x and Win95 cursor e CUT PAL Dr Halo CUT e DCRAW RAW Digital Camera Raw e DCX Intel multi page FAX e DIB Microsoft Device Independent Bitmap e DICOM DICM DCM Digital Imaging amp Communication in Medicine versions 3 0 1991 2006 e GEM GEM Paint e GIF Graphic Image Format e WDP HD Photo Windows Media Photo e ICA MOD IBM IOCA and MO DCA e ICO Windows Icon e IFF Electronic Arts e IMT IMNET Groups III and IV PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 370 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions e J2C JPEG2000 e JFX Kofax Group4 e JP2 JPC J2K e JPG JPEG JPEG e JPX JPEG2000 Extensions e LV Lazer View e MSP MS Paint e NCR NCR e PBM Portable Bit
353. tion jobs 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 131 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Report Management Errors Administrators can view report management errors for all report management jobs for their entity When the job is processed any errors that occur are written to the report management error log Viewing an Error Log Entry To view an error log entry 1 Select the entity and then select Report Management Errors 2 Double click on the error log entry to view The Report Management Error Log Entry dialog box appears amp Report Management Error Log Entry Log ID 2 Eror Time 2011 06 02 09 40 00 Job Name UB92 Workstation CHADGYiP_O Source File F Coldlnput RM_TestData O verlayT estFiles UBS2DATA TXT Message 4 Parsing Error Occurred Error Number 29122 Error Source Execute ParseLines PYER M Sys Error Description The buffer does not contain the selected line delimiter Report Management Error Log Entry Properties 3 Click Close PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 132 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Exporting Selected Error Log Entries You can export selected error log entries to an XML file To export selected error log entries 1 Inthe Report Management Errors screen select one or more entries and then click
354. tion value matching its own computer name Once the data group has been imported it is automatically removed from the import queue If an error occurs during the import process the import queue entry is updated with the error and then disabled Once the problem has been resolved the administrator can enable the import queue entry once again To view the list of Import Queue items select Global Administration gt Import gt Import Queue a PaperVision Administration Console mM Action Help Global Administration Workstation Submitted Location Automation Service Status CHADGVIRXP 2011 05 27 10 59 34 C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop D ata Groups 16_Bit Ei Deletion Queue CHADGYVIRXP 2011 05 27 11 04 20 C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop Data Groups PaperF A Email Queue CHADGVIRXP 2011 05 27 11 06 12 C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop D ata Groups Dupe C g Global Administrators CHADGVIRXP 2011 05 27 11 06 40 C Documents and Settings Administrator Desktop D ata Groups Chad L Ba Import g A Monitored Import Paths gl Import Logs amp Licensing g Maintenance of S Migration Jobs Notifications Process Locks Report Management Errors System Settings H Entities gt 5 27 2011 2 35PM oy Import Queue PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 26 i Chapter 2 Global Administration Viewing the Properties of Import
355. tions e Data Storage General Security g Message Capture Policy Sets g Migration Jobs H Projects rA Report Management Errors Reports 6 1 2011 2 38 PM Document Grants Although document grants expire you can manually delete them by selecting the appropriate ones and then click the Delete icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 89 Locked Users Based on your assigned security policy users may get locked out of the system when they attempt to log in too many times with an incorrect password PaperVision Administration Console Efx Global Administration Entities USER_1 2011 06 01 14 46 55 127 0 0 1 lt Default Company gt 1 ic KE Backup Processing By Current Activity iC gi Current Sessions rea Document Grants i Locked Users i D Notifications e Data Storage General Security 1g Message Capture Policy Sets a Migration Jobs Projects Report Management Errors i Reports 671 2011 248PM oy Locked Users Although your security policy may automatically re enable these accounts after a specified period of time you can re enable them manually by unlocking the user To unlock a user select the user account and then click the Unlock 8 icon PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 90 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Notifications Notifications are messages that are usually genera
356. tivating a Superseded Message Capture Policy Set Activating a superseded policy set causes the existing active policy set to become superseded To activate a superseded policy set 1 In the Message Capture Policy Sets screen select the superceded policy set 2 Inthe Message Capture Policy Set Properties dialog box click Save 3 Click Yes to save the policy set and make it the current Active Policy Set superseding any existing policy sets Deleting Message Capture Policy Sets Both active and superseded policy sets can be deleted When the active policy set is deleted the most recent policy set left remaining with the highest ID number will become the active policy set To delete message capture policy sets 1 Inthe Message Capture Policy Sets screen select or more policy sets 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The most recent policy set that is remaining will become the active policy set PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 218 w Chapter 7 Message Capture Exporting a Message Capture Policy Set PaperVision Enterprise allows you to export message capture policy sets The export creates an XML file describing the policy set so it can be imported into another PaperVision Enterprise system All policy set properties are included in the XML document To export a message capture policy set 1 In the Message Capture Policy Sets screen select th
357. tly into your third party application As you type you will see your entries added to the Defined Key Sequence to Send list 10 If applicable click the Send lt Tab gt button to send the Tab key to your application PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 225 E Chapter 8 Integration Definitions 11 If applicable click the Insert Delay button to insert a delay between keystrokes The Insert Delay dialog box appears Insert Delay Enter the number of milliseconds to delay before the next OK keystroke o Cancel l Insert Delay 12 Inserting time delays between keystrokes provides additional time for third party applications to process input from PaperVision Enterprise In the Insert Delay dialog box enter the number of milliseconds to delay before the next keystroke and then click OK 13 In the Add Key Sequences dialog box click Finished after you have entered all of the key sequences 14 In the Configure Send Keys dialog box click the Test button PaperVision Enterprise will locate the appropriate Window Title send the specified key sequence and then display the raw data extracted from the application View AIl Data Advanced Keyboard Solutions View All Data Test Results 15 Click OK once you are satisfied with the test results PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 226 W Chapter 8 Integration Definiti
358. tration and System Architecture Reference Guide 121 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration Editing an Existing Group To edit an existing group 1 Inthe System Groups screen select the appropriate group and then click the Properties icon The Group Properties dialog box appears C AUDIT TEAM Properties Group Name SURLe S33 Available Users Group Members BOBR DAVIDC Select All Select All Group Properties 2 Make the necessary modifications to the group and then click OK to save the modifications Note The modifications will take effect the next time the group members log in to PaperVision Enterprise Deleting Groups To delete existing groups 1 Inthe System Groups screen select one or more groups 2 Click the Delete icon 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 122 w Chapter 4 Entity Administration System Users Users represent each individual user of the PaperVision Enterprise system Although you can assign project rights to groups you can also assign project rights to individual users User accounts can be manually created or a pipe delimited or tab delimited text file can be used to batch load users with or without their passwords and additional settings Creating a New User To create a new user 1 Select the entity and then select General Security gt System Users The System
359. ts Eal Records Retention Policy Sets Op Report Management Jobs ag WorkFlow Definitions Human Resources E Sales Report Management Errors Reports ADMIN 11 9 2003 10 02AM Document Associations PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 159 w Chapter 5 Project Administration 2 Click the New icon The New Document Association dialog box appears FR New Document Association Association Name Search Project Accounts Receivable Search Criteria Invoice Number Invoice Date x Amount z Check Number x Check Date z Payee ae Search Type Sort By Or Invoice Number v ee Criteria Ea New Document Association Enter the Association Name 4 From the Search Project drop down list select the project to be cross searched during the user s search 5 Inthe Search Criteria section you can select an index field name from the drop down list or enter a specific index value in the field Note You can enter wildcards as search criteria if you have not already selected an index field name or index value 6 Select the Search Type which specifies the operator and or used when multiple index fields are being searched 7 Select the Sort By setting which specifies how the document associations search results list is sorted PaperVision Enterprise Administ
360. ts in PaperVision Enterprise When you enter an index value to perform a search for a document the application compares the value you entered against your database tables and retrieves documents that meet your specific criteria Detail Sets Detail sets also referred to as duplicate documents define a collection of index values that allow multiple sets of field data to reference a single document If documents with detail sets appear in a search results screen in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client they display with a plus sign allowing users to expand all documents contained in the detail set Detail sets can be created in PaperFlow PaperVision Capture PaperVision Message Manager and PaperVision Enterprise Report Management The example below illustrates a search results screen with detail sets that have been expanded to show the documents related Check Number Check Date and Payee index values The Invoice Number and Invoice Date detail sets vary across documents Sales 6 Documents Displayed G Search Criteria Page 1 of 1 Collapse SelectAll BiCenturytink 42345 0019 10 25 000 208 10 15 Century Link 12345 2011 10 25 1001 2011 10 16 Digitech Systems Inc 2000 2011 10 20 1 2011 10 10 Digitech Systems Inc 2000 2011 10 20 2 2011 10 11 Digitech Systems Inc 2000 2011 10 20 3 2011 10 12 Documents Inc 5000 2011 10 24 1 2011 10 15 Detail Sets PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture
361. ts the ability to view documents View Outside PaperVision This setting grants the ability to view document from outside of the PaperVision Enterprise system i e not using the browser plug in If this option is not selected for a user other than a system administrator and documents are accessed via the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client the user will be forced to use the browser plug in regardless of the Document Access Method settings Export Open Documents This setting allows users to export documents and to open the source documents in their native applications as determined by their operating system Print Fax Documents This setting allows users to print and fax documents Email Documents This setting allows users to email documents WorkFlow Instantiations This setting allows users to create new WorkFlow instances for documents PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 163 W Chapter 5 Project Administration Tag for Migration This setting allows users to tag documents for migration Delete Documents This setting allows users to delete documents Modify Documents This setting allows users to alter document index values and to check documents in and out of the system versioning Add Documents This setting allows users to add documents to the system Create Document Grants This setting allows users to create document grants View WorkFlow Status
362. ued to be processed by the PaperVision Enterprise Automation Service Once the job has been processed it is automatically removed from the queue To view maintenance queue items select Global Administration gt Maintenance gt Maintenance Queue a PaperVision Administration Console mex Action Help Global Administration ID Submitted E Automation Service Status amp 1 2011 05 31 13 09 55 Data Group Move Entity 1 Data Group 6 000000001 0000000 Deletion Queue CA Email Queue 3 Global Administrators E Import Licensing H a Maintenance 3 Maintenance Queue fat Maintenance Logs BE Migration Jobs gt Notifications Process Lacks Report Management Errors System Settings Entities 5 31 2011 1 10 PM Maintenance Queue PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 41 a Chapter 2 Global Administration Viewing Maintenance Queue Item Properties To view import queue item properties 1 Select the appropriate maintenance queue item and then click the Properties EJ icon The Maintenance Queue Item Properties dialog box appears Maintenance Item 1 Properties Submitted 2011 05 31 13 09 55 Name Data Group Move Entity 1 Data Group 6 000000001 00 Information lt MAINTINFO gt lt MAINTTYPE gt DG MOVE lt MAINTTYPE gt lt ENTITYID gt 1 lt ENTITYID gt lt DGID gt 6 lt D GID gt lt MAINTINFO gt Maintenance Queue Item Properties 2 Click Clo
363. uments or functions in any projects unless the Global Administrator grants access to these items Creating a New WorkFlow Definition Before defining your WorkFlow ensure that the user groups who will act as workstep participants have already been created in General Security To create a new WorkFlow definition 1 Expand the Projects folder and then navigate to the WorkFlow Definitions link for the appropriate project PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 297 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow Ay Projects a i Accounting fee Enhanced Auditing poli 4 Document Associations fs ia Document Security Levels bee Integration Definitions ae Security Access pe 24 Directory Manager Jobs 3 Records Destruction Lists Records Retention Policy Sets oS Report Management Jobs geo WW orkFlow Definitions WorkFlow Definitions link 2 Click the New icon The New WorkFlow dialog displays New Workflow x Workflow Name I Project Name Accounting v a eve New WorkFlow dialog 3 Enter a name for the new WorkFlow definition 4 Select the project to which this WorkFlow will be associated from the drop down list 5 Click OK The WorkFlow Designer screen displays PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 298 rOBO a s 9 2 70 gem AlB i Tracking Index p e Tracking Invoice E itil E
364. ures txt Lists any files that were supposed to be backed up but could not be located during the process e lt Package File Name gt pvpkginfo XML file containing the associated Entity ID and the name not value of the encryption key that was used to encrypt the package PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 82 a Chapter 4 Entity Administration Creating New Backup Jobs When you create new backup jobs you can also select the projects to back up Package File information and scheduling intervals Before you run a backup job ensure the Migration Backup Path has been configured for the entity for more information see the section on General entity properties in Chapter 3 A temporary Package Workspace directory must also be configured for more information see the section on Local System Settings in Chapter 2 If a Package File Encryption Key is required the appropriate encryption key must already be configured for more information see the section on Encryption Keys in Chapter 4 To execute a backup job the Backup Processing automation service operation must also be scheduled for more information see the section on Automation Service Scheduling in Chapter 2 To create a new backup job 1 Select the entity and select Backup Processing gt Backup Jobs The Backup Jobs screen appears PaperVision Administration Console Action Help a Global Administration Backup Type Sch
365. using a group of application servers Furthermore PaperVision s web services have been engineered to minimize the number of round trips that must be made between computers greatly reducing the amount of network traffic generated by the system A round trip is made every time one computer communicates with another In order to minimize the number of round trips taken PaperVision groups operations into a single communication returning all of the information to the requesting computer before it was even aware that it needed the additional information Process Redirection PaperVision Enterprise s redirection feature allows a web server or even a second or third tier application server to redirect all of its processing to a separate application tier of servers As such a web server can concentrate on generating web pages offloading all of its processing of the PaperVision application to a separate server or group of servers to provide reliability Automation Service The PaperVision Automation Service performs a number of automated tasks including importing data processing WorkFlow items and performing security operations The automation service can be run on multiple computers to provide scalability and reliability PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 340 Appendix B Ensuring Scalability Reliability and Security Database Scaling By now we have eliminated the web server
366. ve been idle too long are killed logged out Q When the PaperVision Automation Service automatically imports data groups how does it know which entity to import the data group into A When an administrator manually imports a data group a data group mapping is created This mapping looks at the data group s customer company ID value and the data group s customer company name value It then checks to see if any data groups with the same information have been previously mapped to the current entity If not it maps this ID name pair to the entity it is being imported into When the automation service imports the data group it looks at the same ID name pair and looks for a mapping to an entity If one is found it continues loading the data group Otherwise it will send a notification to the administrators to alert them that the data group has not been mapped Q What document file formats are supported for native viewing within the PaperVision ActiveX Document Viewer without requiring any additional software A The following file formats are supported for native viewing Archive File Formats e 7 Zip version 4 57 e BinHex e Bzip2 e Expert Witness Compression EnCase e GZIP version 2 e ISO e Java Archive e Legato EMailXtender Archive PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 363 a Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions e Mac Disk Copy Disk Image e MacBinary e Microsoft Bac
367. ved PaperVision Enterprise contains technology under license from Autonomy Inc All rights reserved PaperVision Enterprise contains portions of imaging code owned and copyrighted by Pegasus Imaging Corporation DBA Accusoft Pegasus Tampa FL All rights reserved NON DIGITECH SYSTEMS Digitech Systems Inc 8400 E Crescent Parkway Suite 500 Greenwood Village CO 80111 Phone 303 493 6900 Fax 303 493 6979 www digitechsystems com Table of Contents Chapter 1 INtroductt One vscccsccvsssscssssccecesessosssessccesseunsssssssssecnssonnassvensssocssoenasesensssovossenesses 6 MACS S VEN cs A Sach ara sea E E E a eleven ete 6 System REQUITCMSNtS sss irine aae Re ass Goes antes bhiees ERE nE E a Goatees 8 PaperVision Enterprise Terminology csscsscssssscesseeceseeeeesecaeesecneeeceaeeeessecaeeaesaeserseaeeeteaeeas 9 Using the Administration Console sscsscescsseecesceseeecesecetesecaevsecnaeeceaeceeseecaeeaesaseneaeeateaes 12 Chapter 2 Global Administration o ssoesoossoossoossoosssosssosssosssosssosssosssosssoesssesssesssee 15 Automation Service Status cecesscsssessessecseessceeeeecesecsessecseesecnaveecsaeceessecsteeecneseeeeaeeeeeaeeateaes 18 Deletion Queue sis caisccsssecasszs cascdeesnesdacteond edvenveutaces oneas n o oddadeasosstesve ces ducaavceee sds odd dgevsucedeetevaice 19 Email Queue 2 ssceieciacessscecesscdeas esntesaecds tdadeaawsadesauctagiensecedscds EE E Ee AE OE ae iE sratine
368. vel is automatically removed 8 Click the Test Criteria button to validate your criteria You will be notified if any errors exist 9 Click OK to save the new security level Note Although the new document security level is saved it is not yet applied to documents Applying a Document Security Level You can apply document security levels to documents in three ways e Applying the levels to documents as they are imported or added based on the levels criteria e Manually applying the levels to specific documents from the search results list in the PaperVision Enterprise Web Client application e Applying the levels to all existing documents in the project that meet the levels criteria To apply a security level to all existing documents in a project that meet the level s criteria 1 Inthe Document Security Levels screen select the appropriate security level 2 Click the Apply amp icon You will be notified how many additional documents to which the document security level was applied PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 176 w Chapter 5 Project Administration Submitting a Document Security Level to be Applied as a Maintenance Queue Entry You can submit a document security level to be applied as a maintenance queue entry Once the automation service processes maintenance jobs the selected security levels are then applied to existing documents To
369. verifies that the session is still valid performs the requested operation and then updates the user s Last Activity Time If a user sits idle for too long as specified by the administrator the session may automatically be terminated If during user login a client application specifies that it is capable of pinging the server the server will instruct the client application to send a keep alive ping at a specified interval This background ping is used to verify that the client application is still opened If a client has not sent the expected ping within the 20 seconds of the specified ping interval the session will be automatically terminated This ping validation is useful in freeing up licenses used by applications that were closed without logging out the user Without pinging the session wouldn t get terminated until the session times out Note Some mobile browsers do not support background operations as a result the Client Ping Increment setting is not applicable to iPad devices If you are using the Safari Browser on the iPad device the length of your session depends on the Max Session Idle Time value the system administrator assigned for the entity The Current Sessions screen contains a list of all of the sessions currently in use a PaperVision Administration Console Action Help Global Administration User Name Login Time Last Activity Last Ping Licenses Entities BA ADMIN 2011 05 27 14 14
370. w Report Management Job General File Line J Fields Breaks Form Overlays LTR m Page Detection Detection Method Max Lines per Page Configure Page Preamble Discard Type None v Quantity to Discard jo Expand to Max Lines E Max Lines per Page 66 Text Sequence Removal ltems Defined 0 Configure Page Preamble Insertion Type None v Quantity to Insert jo Delete Blank Pages E F Report Management Job Page Settings Page Detection Method This setting specifies the method used to organize lines into pages of text For more information see the section on Page Detection Methods PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 247 mz Chapter 9 Report Management Page Preamble Discard Type Quantity to Discard Once a page has been assembled from lines you can have lines words or characters stripped from the beginning of each page prior to further processing This is particularly useful in situations where the file has been pre processed to insert markers to split pages but those markers shouldn t be displayed in the resultant output Expand to Max Lines If a page has fewer lines than the value specified in the Max Lines per Page setting additional blank lines will be appended to the end of the page Max Lines per Page This value is used in Expand to Max Lines as well as the Max Lines per Page Detection Meth
371. w diagram Defining Worksteps This topic provides an overview of the navigational operations in the Worksteps window Within the Worksteps window you can add Worksteps to WorkFlow definitions and link PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 301 w Chapter 10 WorkFlow Worksteps Additionally you can define Workstep tasks and post conditions that complete the WorkFlow definition process To define the worksteps for a WorkFlow definition it is recommended to 1 Graphically create all of the worksteps that make up the WorkFlow 2 Graphically link all of the worksteps to designate the flow from one workstep to the other 3 Define the tasks and post conditions for each workstep The following operations are available in the WorkFlow Designer Icon Description Displays a drop down list that contains options to add the following OS Add Workflow Adds anew WorkFlow definition to work Add Pre Condition Add a precondition to the WorkFlow QP Add Workstep Adds a Workstep to the WorkFlow Add Task Adds a new task to the selected Workstep amp Add Post Condition Add a post condition to the selected Workstep a a Exports the WorkFlow to El XML PDF i PNG Visio Prints the WorkFlow Zooms in on the WorkFlow diagram Zooms out from the WorkFlow diagram PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 302 wW Chapter 10 Wo
372. workstep regardless of the current state of the WorkFlow In the case where an owner of a workstep instance is no longer with a company the administrator can move the WorkFlow instance back to the same current workstep as an unowned workstep or move it to an entirely different workstep in the WorkFlow PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 328 a Chapter 11 Reports To move a WorkFlow instance to a new workstep 1 In the WorkFlow Status dialog box select the appropriate WorkFlows and then select the Move to Workstep icon The Select Workstep dialog box appears 5 Select Workstep Available Worksteps lt Stop Exit WorkFlow gt Approved for Payment Contact Vendor Rejected Review Submit Payment Select Workstep 2 Select the workstep to which the WorkFlow will be transitioned and then click OK 3 Click Yes to confirm the transitioning of the WorkFlow instances The current worksteps will be marked as completed administratively and the new workstep instance will be created PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 329 a Chapter 11 Reports Viewing Reports To view Document Access System Operations Queries WorkFlow History and WorkFlow Status reports select the appropriate entity and then expand Reports The Reports screen appears a PaperVision Administration Console DE Action Help Gl
373. ze MB fio File Set Encryption Key lt No Encryption gt v Compress Output Data E Import During Processing MV Active Iv Analyze File mee Report Management Job General PaperVision Enterprise Administration and System Architecture Reference Guide 236 a Chapter 9 Report Management Project This setting specifies the name of the associated project Name This setting specifies the unique name of the report management job Input Paths When the parsing engine starts it checks the specified input paths to see if any files exist All of the files that exist in the specified directories will be processed Default Font This is the font to be used when configuring fields and document breaks Max Data Group Size MB Once a file set has been created during processing the engine will attempt to look for a read write enabled data group with enough space to append the file set without exceeding this value If one cannot be found a new data group will automatically be created for the file set Max File Set Size MB This setting specifies the maximum size of each file set This is particularly useful for limiting how much data would be rolled back when a configuration mistake is made It is important to note that this value is considered after an entire document has been written to a file set In other words a single document will not be spread across multiple file sets This could resu

PaperVision® Enterprise

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PaperVision&reg; Enterprise

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PaperVision® Enterprise